Signature Series

Component Installation
Manual
P/N 270497 • Rev 2.1 • 16DEC04
DEVELOPED BY Edwards Systems Technology
8985 Town Center Parkway
Bradenton, FL 34202
(941) 739-4300
COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright © 2004 Edwards Systems Technology
This manual and the products it describes are copyrighted by
Edwards Systems Technology (EST). You may not reproduce,
translate, transcribe, or transmit any part of this manual without
express, written permission from EST.
This manual contains proprietary information intended for
distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole
purpose of conducting business with Edwards Systems
Technology, Inc. If you distribute any information contained in
this manual to unauthorized persons, you have violated all
distributor agreements and we may take legal action.
CREDITS This manual was designed and written by EST Technical
Services - Documentation Department, Sarasota.
 Content

Audible Detector Base

SIGA-270(L) - Fire Alarm Stations
SIGA-270P - 2-Stage Fire Alarm Station
SIGA-278 - Double Action Fire Alarm Station
SIGA-AA30 and SIGA-AA50 - Audio Amplifiers
SIGA-AB4 - Audible Detector Base
SIGA-APS (-220) - Auxiliary Power Supply Module
SIGA-CC1 - Single Input Signal Module
SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module
SIGA-CC2 - Dual Input Signal Module
SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module
SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay
SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module
SIGA-CT1I - Single Input Module
SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module
SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module
SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF - Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange
SIGA-DGS - Surface Adapter for use with the SIGA-DG Detector Guard
SIGA-DGSA - Surface Adapter
SIGA-DGSB - Detector Guard Surface Box
SIGA-DH - Duct Detector Housing Assembly
SIGA-DMP - Duct Detector Mounting Plate
SIGA-DTS - Duct Detector Test Station
SIGA-HFS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector
SIGA-HRS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector
SIGA-HRSI - Intelligent Grade 1 Heat Detector
SIGA-IB - Detector Base
SIGA-IB4 - Detector Base
SIGA-IM - Isolator Module
SIGA-IO - Input-Output Module
SIGA-IPHS(B) - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector
SIGA-IPHSI - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector
SIGA-IS - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
SIGA-ISI - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
SIGA-LED - Remote LED Alarm Indicator
SIGA-MAB - Class A-B Input-Output Module
SIGA-MB4 - Transponder Mounting Bracket
SIGA-MCC1 - Single Input Signal Module
SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-sync Output Module
SIGA-MCC2 - Dual Input Signal Module
SIGA-MCR - Control Relay
SIGA-MCRR - Control Reversing Relay Module
SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector
SIGA-MDM - Signature Digital Message Module

Signature Series Component Installation Manual i

 SIGA-MIO - Input-Output Module
SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module
SIGA-MP1 - Mounting Plate
SIGA-MP2 - Mounting Plate
SIGA-MP2L - Mounting Plate
SIGA-MRM1 - Riser Monitor Module
SIGA-PHS - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector
SIGA-PHSI - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector
SIGA-PS - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
SIGA-PSI - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
SIGA-RB - Detector Base
SIGA-RB4 - Detector Base
SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module
SIGA-SB - Detector Base
SIGA-SB4 - Detector Base
SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module
SIGA-TS - 4 Inch Box Trim Skirt-Ring
SIGA-TS4 - Trim Skirt-Ring
SIGA-TSB - Four Inch Box Trim Skirt-Ring
SIGA-UIO2R - Universal Input-Output Motherboard
SIGA-UIO6(R) - Universal Input-Output Motherboard
SIGA-UM - Universal Class A-B Module
SIGA-WTM - Waterflow-Tamper Module
SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station
SIGI-IBS - Detector Base

ii Signature Series Component Installation Manual

Important Information

Limitation of liability
The products described in this manual have been designed to
meet the requirements of NFPA Standard 72; Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., Standard 864; and Underwriters Laboratories
of Canada, Inc., Standard ULC S527. Installation in accordance
with this manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the
authority having jurisdiction is mandatory. EST shall not under
any circumstances be liable for any incidental or consequential
damages arising from loss of property or other damages or losses
owing to the failure of EST products beyond the cost of repair or
replacement of any defective products. EST reserves the right to
make product improvements and change product specifications
at any time.
While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of
this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents, EST assumes
no responsibility for errors or omissions.

FCC warning
This equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy.
If this equipment is not installed in accordance with this manual,
it may cause interference to radio communications. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits
for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These rules are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference when this
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment is likely to cause interference, in which case
the user at his own expense, will be required to take whatever
measures may be required to correct the interference.

Signature Series Component Installation Manual iii

Document history

Revision Date Reason For Change

1.0 12FEB97 Initial Release
2.0 06DEC99 Added the following installation sheets to the manual: AB4,
CRR, MAB, MCR, MCRR, MCC1, MCC2, MCT2, UIO2, and
UIO6(R). Removed SIGA-RB Sounder Base.
3.0 16DEC04 Added the following installation sheets: Audible Detector Base,
SIGA-AA30 and SIGA-AA50, SIGA-AB4, SIGA-APS (-220),
SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-CT1I, SIGA-CT2I, SIGA-DGSA, SIGA-
DGSB, SIGA-IO, SIGA-IPHSI, SIGA-ISI, SIGA-MCC1S, SIGA-
MD(S), SIGA-MDM, SIGA-MIO, SIGA-MRM1, SIGA-PHSI,
SIGA-PSI, SIGA-RM1, SIGA-SEC2, SIGA-TS4, SIGA-TSB.
Removed the following installation sheets: 2-CTM, SIGA-MCT2.

iv Signature Series Component Installation Manual

 Audible Detector Base

Product description Wire size: 12 to 18 AWG (2.50 to 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and
18 AWG are preferred.
Compatible detectors: All Signature Series detectors
Compatible electrical boxes
AB4G-SB Surface Box for Audible Base
North American 2-1/8 in (54 mm) deep 4-inch square box
North American 4 by 4 inch octagonal ring (mud box)
Standard European 100 mm square box
Agency listings: Meets or exceeds requirements specified in
UL 268, UL 464, and ULC-S525
Base diameter: 6.8 in (173 mm)
Base height from box: 0.8 in (21 mm)
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mount): 12 in (305 mm)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Table 1: Operating current in mA (RMS)

Voltage Low dBA High dBA
16 Vdc 17 28
24 Vdc 24 41
33 Vdc 31 52
16 Vfwr 41 48
The Audible Detector Base is designed to add an audible
output function to any Signature Series detector. The base can 24 Vfwr 51 60
operate as an independent local alarm, or as part of a zone or 33 Vfwr 60 66
system alarm with synchronized audible output.
Vdc = Volts direct current, regulated and filtered
This installation sheet applies to Audible Detector Base units Vfwr = Volts full wave rectified
with model numbers GSA-AB4G and SIGA-AB4G.
The Audible Detector Base output is field-configurable for
Table 2: Sound level output (dBA)
output tone (steady or temporal) and output volume (low dBA
or high dBA). Signal Voltage Low dBA High dBA
Depending on the system supporting the Signature loop, the Reverberant room per UL 464 [1]
base can operate as follows:
Temporal 16 Vdc 71.5 78.1
• It can follow the state of the device it supports
• It can be configured (in the SDU) for other operating modes 24 Vdc 75.5 80.7
• It can be controlled by program rules you write
33 Vdc 78.5 83.1
The base uses the same address and programming label as
the detector it supports. Steady 16 Vdc 75.5 81.7
24 Vdc 79.5 84.5
Specifications 33 Vdc 81.8 86.5
Operating voltage: Regulated 16 to 33 Vdc, 16 to 33 Vfwr
Reverberant room per UL 268
This device was tested to the regulated 24 Vdc/fwr
operating voltage limits of 16 V and 33 V. Do not apply Temporal 16 Vdc 77.5 84.1
80% and 110% of these values for system operation.
Operating current: See Table 1 24 Vdc 81.5 86.7
Supervisory current: DC = 10 mA, FWR = 15 mA 33 Vdc 84.5 89.1
Default settings
Output volume: High dBA Steady 16 Vdc 81.5 87.7
Output tone: Temporal pattern
Sound level output: See Table 2 24 Vdc 85.5 90.5
Temporal pattern: 0.5 s on, 0.5 s off, 0.5 s on, 0.5 s off, 0.5 s 33 Vdc 87.8 92.5
on, 1.5 s off, repeat cycle
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C). Not all dBA = Decibels, A-weighted
detectors are rated for this range. Refer to the installation [1] For UL 464 applications, low dBA settings are for private
sheet for the specific detector used with the base. mode only
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH

Installation Sheet 19NOV03 P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0

Audible Detector Base 1/4
Installation instructions

Cautions
To avoid accidental damage to the panel, disconnect all power
before wiring the unit.
Electrical supervision requires the wire run to be broken at
each terminal. Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires
around the terminals.

The base must be connected to a continuous voltage whether

the output tone is set to steady or temporal.
Refer to Figure 1 when you install the base.
Sleeping rooms: In sleeping areas, the high dBA output and
steady tone settings must be used.
AB4G-SB: When using the AB4G-SB box, install a reinforcing
plate at every knockout you use. (Reinforcing plates are
included with the box.) Remove the knockout first, then slide
the reinforcing plate into the plastic housing. After the plate is
in place, install the conduit connector and nut. See Figure 2.

To install the sounder base:

1. The unit default is for high dBA output. To set the output to
low dBA, cut the circuit board trace as marked on the back
of the PC board. (See Figure 3.)
2. The unit default is for temporal pattern output. To set the
output to steady tone, cut the circuit board trace as marked
on the back of the PC board. (See Figure 3.)
3. Select and install a compatible electrical box, and bring the
field wiring into the box.
4. Connect the field wiring to the terminals on the back of the
base plate. You must observe polarity for the unit to
function properly. (See Figure 3.)
5. Attach the base plate to the electrical box.
6. Align the trim ring so that the four tabs on the ring mate
with the four slots in the base plate, then press the trim ring Figure 1: Installing the Audible Detector Base
onto the base plate until the tabs lock.
7. Attach the desired Signature detector to the base. Align the
arrows on the detector and trim ring, press the detector into
the base, and rotate the detector until it locks into place.
8. Apply power and activate the unit to verify that it is
operating properly.

Figure 2: Installing reinforcing plates on the AB4G-SB box

P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0 19NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/4 Audible Detector Base
Wiring diagram
For additional wiring details, see the applicable control panel
installation manual.

Volume setting Tone setting

Default = High volume Default = Temporal pattern
Cut for low volume Cut for steady tone

To configure output
volume or tone, cut
DATA- DATA- DATA+
the circuit board as
SIG+ SIG- OUT IN IN/OUT shown.

24 Vdc in - - 24 Vdc out

From power supply or To next base or EOL relay
previous base
+ +

-
Data in - Data out
From Signature controller or To next Signature device
previous device + +

Figure 3: Output configuration and wiring diagram

Application diagrams
Detector operates the base The Signature CR module is optional, and is used to silence
the bases on the line.
In this application the detector operates the base. That is, the
base follows the state of the detector, going into and out of
alarm with the detector.

First device Last device

AB4G AB4G
IN/OUT

IN/OUT
DATA+

DATA+
S IG+

S IG+
S IG-

S IG-

24 Vdc
From listed - Listed EOL
power supply + relay and
supervising
8 7 6 module

CR
4 3 2 1

Data in
From Signature +
controller
-

Figure 4: Wiring for detector operation of bases

Installation Sheet 19NOV03 P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0

Audible Detector Base 3/4
System turns on all bases The Signature CR module is optional, and is used to silence
the bases on the line.
In this application the detector operates the base. In addition,
all bases on the line can be activated by system programming
that triggers the Signature CRR to reverse supplied polarity.

First device Last device

AB4G AB4G

IN/OUT

IN/OUT
DATA+

DATA+
S IG+

S IG+
S IG-

S IG-
24 Vdc
From listed - Listed EOL
power supply + relay and
supervising
8 7 6 8 7 6 5 module

CR CRR
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

Data in
From Signature +
controller
-

Figure 5: Wiring for detector and system operation of bases

System turns on bases with synchronization If the Signature CRR module is not activated, then each
detector can still operate its base, but the bases will not be
In this application, all bases on the line are activated by system synchronized.
programming that triggers the Signature CRR module. The
bases are synchronized by the G1M-RM for temporal sound. The Signature CR module is optional, and is used to silence
the bases on the line.

First device Last device

AB4G AB4G
IN/OUT

IN/OUT
DATA+

DATA+
S IG+

S IG+
S IG-

S IG-

Listed EOL
relay and
supervising
module

8 7 6 5 8 7 6 8 7 6 5

G1M-RM CR CRR
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

24 Vdc
From listed -
power supply +
Data in
From Signature +
controller
-

Figure 6: Wiring for synchronized operation

P/N: 3100672 REV: 2.0 19NOV03 Installation Sheet

4/4 Audible Detector Base
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
Description Construction: Cast zinc with steel backplate
The Fire Alarm Station, 270 Series, is a component of the Signature Operation mechanism: Single action, pull lever
Series. It is a normally-open, dry contact signal initiating device that
Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
requires only one action by the user in order to initiate an alarm. The
single input module mounted to the back of the unit supervises the Standby current: 250 µA
station and sends an alarm signal to the loop controller when the
switch is closed (i.e. when the handle is pulled). Activated current: 400 µA
Device addressing Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
One device address is required. The loop controller assigns an Operating humidity range: 0 - 93 % RH
address to the station automatically. A custom address can be Replacement glass rods
assigned to the station via laptop computer; no addressing switches USA, P/N 276-GLR (pkg 20 rods)
are used. CAN, P/N 27165 (pkg 12 rods)
LEDs Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the station, Compatible electrical boxes
when the unit is removed from the electrical box. North American: 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
Normal: Green LED flashes Standard: 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang
Alarm/active: Red LED flashes cover
Mounting Special order surface mount boxes
27193-10: Cream enamel finish
The terminal blocks will accept AWG 12, 14, 16, or 18 wire (2.5, 1.5, 27193-11: Red enamel finish
1.0, or 0.75 sq mm ). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
Shipping weight: 1.2 lbs (0.5 kg)
System controller capability
The 270 Series requires the Signature Loop Controller.
Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching PRODUCT DIAGRAM
The 270 Series is factory assigned personality code 1 which
configures the station for alarm latching operation. When the pull
lever is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the Loop Controller and
the alarm condition is latched at the fire alarm station.
FIRE LOCAL
ALARM ALARM
WARNINGS
This device will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further PULL PULL
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. IN CASE IN CASE
OF OF
FIRE FIRE

270 270L

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-270 and SIGA-270L

Fire Alarm Stations

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387048P FILE NAME: 387048P.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 6.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 02JUN99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) The pull station is shipped from the factory complete with a single Cover release
input module attached. The electronic module contains no user- Compatible electrical box screw
serviceable parts and should NOT be disassembled.
2) Open the pull-station by using a flat blade screwdriver to twist the
cover release screw counterclockwise while pulling the cover
away from its backplate.
3) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground
faults.
4) Make all wiring connections as shown in the diagram. Back
plate
5) Write the address assigned to the pull-station on the label
provided and apply the label to the pull-station. Peel off the Toggle
removable serial number label from the pull-station and apply it to switch
the appropriate location in the Serial Number Logbook. MAL
NOR

6) Using the two 6-32 x 5/8 in (16 mm) machine screws provided,
mount the pull-station to the electrical box.
T
LIF
7) Pull the glass rod release lever and install the glass rod through Glass rod
the mounting bracket on the front of the pull-station. Set the release
toggle switch to the NORMAL position and snap the cover into its lever
locked position.

WIRING DIAGRAM
Notes
[1] Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring
specifications.
2 All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Factory
connections:
do NOT alter

Green LED
(normal)
Red LED
(alarm/active)
4 3 2 1

TB1

Wire Stripping Guide

DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)

DATA IN (–) DATA OUT (–) 1/4 in (~6 mm)

From Signature controller To next device Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that connect to
or previous device [1] the terminal block of the module.

REAR VIEW CAUTION: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing
of 270 Series less wire may result in a faulty connection.

P/N: 387048P REV: 6.0 PG: 2 / 4

 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

Description Construction: Zinc coulé avec plaque arrière en acier

Le poste d'alarme d'incendie, Série 270, est un composant du Série Mécanisme de fonctionnement: Action unique, tirer la manette
Signature. C’est un dispositif de déclenchement de signal à contact
Gamme de tensions de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
sec normalement ouvert qui ne requiert qu’une action de la part de
l'utilisateur pour déclencher une alarme. Le module d'entrée unique Courant de veille: 250 µA
monté à l'arrière du dispositif surveille le poste et transmet un signal
d'alarme au contrôleur de boucle quand l'interrupteur est fermé (i.e. Courant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µA
quand la manette est tirée). Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Adressage électronique Gamme d'humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR
Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Le contrôleur de boucle Barres en verre de remplacement
assigne une adresse au poste automatiquement. Une adresse USA, réf 276-GLR (paquet de 20 barres)
particulière peut être assignée au poste via ordinateur portatif; aucun CAN, réf 27165 (paquet de 12 barres)
commutateur d'adressage n’est utilisé.
Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Témoins à DEL
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Des témoins à DEL de diagnostic fournissent une indication visible de Amérique du Nord: Boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2,5 po) de
l'état du poste, lorsque le dispositif est retiré de la boîte électrique. profondeur
Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote. Standard: Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm
Alarme/actifLe témoin à DEL rouge clignote. (1,5 po) de profondeur avec couvercle simple
Montage Boîtes, montage en saillie, commande spéciale
27193-10: Fini émail crème
Le bornier accepte des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de 0,75 mm carrés 27193-11: Fini émail rouge
(AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 16 et 18 AWG sont préférables.
Poids à la livraison: 0,5 kg (1,2 livres)
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système
Le Série 270 requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature.
Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d'alarme n/o SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT
Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné au 270 série lors de sa
fabrication ce qui configure le poste en mode de verrouillage
d'alarme. Quand la manette est tirée, un signal d’alarme est envoyé
au contrôleur de boucle et la condition d’alarme est verrouillée au
poste d’alarme d’incendie. FIRE LOCAL
ALARM ALARM

AVERTISSEMENTS
PULL PULL
Ce dispositif NE fonctionne PAS en l’absence de courant électrique. IN CASE IN CASE
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous OF OF
conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de
protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de FIRE FIRE
sécurité supplémentaires.

270 270L

FICHE D’INSTALLATION

SIGA-270 et SIGA-270L
Postes d’alarme d’incendie

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF: 387048P NOM DU FICHIER: 387048P.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 6.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 02JUN99 CRÉÉ PAR: D. Chinell

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: 387048P REV: 6.0 PG: 3 / 4
 MODE D’INSTALLATION

1) Le poste à manette est expédié de l'usine avec un seul module Vis de desserrage du
d'entrée connecté. Le module électronique ne contient aucun Boîte électrique compatible couvercle
composant qui puisse être dépanné par l'utilisateur et NE doit
PAS être démonté.
2) Ouvrir le poste à manette en utilisant un tournevis à lame plate
pour tourner la vis de desserrage du couvercle dans le sens
inverse des aiguilles d'une montre tout en écartant le couvercle
de sa plaque arrière.
3) Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts Plaque
de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre. arrière
4) Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
Interrupteur
5) Écrire l'adresse assignée au poste à manette sur l'étiquette à bascule
fournie et coller cette étiquette sur le poste. Décoller du poste MAL
NOR
l'étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller à l'endroit approprié
dans le registre des numéros de série.
6) Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 5/8 po (16 mm) fournies, LIF
T

monter le poste à manette dans la boîte électrique. Levier de déclenche-

ment de la barre
7) Tirer le levier de déclenchement de la barre en verre et faire en verre
passer la barre en verre dans le support de montage à l'avant du
poste à manette. Positionner l'interrupteur à bascule à la position
NORMALE et pousser le couvercle à enclenchement dans sa
position verrouillée.

SCHÉMAS DE CÂBLAGE

Remarques
[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
Signature pour les spécifications de câblage.
2 Tout le câblage est limité en courant et surveillé.

Connexions
faites à l’usine
NE PAS altérer

Témoin à DEL
vert (normal)
Témoin à DEL
rouge
4 3 2 1
(alarme/actif)
TB1

Dénudage des fils

Entrée des Sortie des
données (+) données (+)
Entrée des Sortie des
données (–) données (–) ~6 mm (1/4 po)
Du contrôleur de boucle Vers le dispositif suivant Dénuder l’extrémité de TOUS les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4
Signature ou du dispositif [1] po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.
précédent
ATTENTION: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut
VUE ARRIÈRE
provoquer un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une
du 270 SÉRIE
longueur plus courte peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

P/N: 387048P REV: 6.0 PG: 4 / 4

 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
Description Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
The 2-Stage Fire Alarm Station, 270P, is a component of the Standby current: 396 µA
Signature Series. The 270P is a normally-open, dry contact, signal
initiating device that requires one action by the user in order to initiate Activated current: 680 µA
a pre-alarm. A keyswitch is used to activate the general alarm upon Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
verification that evacuation is necessary. (Note: The alarm handle
must be in the pulled position in order to insert the key.) The dual Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH
input module mounted to the back of the unit supervises the station. Construction: Cast zinc with steel backplate
Input 1 is used to send a pre-alarm signal to the loop controller when
the switch is closed (i.e. when the handle is pulled). Input 2 of the Operating mechanism: Single action, pull lever with keyswitch
module is used to send an alarm signal to the loop controller when Shipping Weight: 1.2 lbs (0.5 kg)
the keyswitch is activated.
Compatible electrical boxes
Device addressing Standard 4 in square box 2-1/8 in (54 mm) deep box with 1-gang
Two device addresses are required. The loop controller assigns two cover
addresses to the 270P automatically. Custom addresses can be Replacement glass rods
assigned to the station via laptop computer; no addressing switches USA, P/N 270-GLR (pkg 20 rods)
are used. CAN, P/N 27165 (pkg 12 rods)
LEDs Special order surface mount boxes
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the station, 27193-11: WHD = 3 x 4-3/4 x 2-1/2 in (76 x 121 x 64 mm). Red
when the unit is removed from the electrical box. enamel. Combination 1/2 and 3/4 in knockouts top, bottom, rear.
Normal: Green LED flashes 276B-RSB: WHD = 3-1/2 x 5-1/32 x 2-7/16 in (89 x 128 x 62 mm).
Alarm/active: Red LED flashes Red enamel. Combination 1/2 and 3/4 in knockouts top, bottom,
Mounting rear.
The 270P may be flush mounted in a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 Wiremold C5744: Buff, cream enamel finish. Combination 1/2 and
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover, or it may be surface mounted 1 in knockouts top, bottom, rear
using a special order electrical box. (Refer to the specifications
section of this sheet for ordering information.) The terminal block will
accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. PRODUCT DIAGRAM
System controller capability
The 270P requires the Signature Loop Controller.
Personality Code 1: N/O Alarm Latching (Class B)
Inputs 1 and 2 of the 270P are factory assigned personality code 1. FIRE
When the keyswitch is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the loop ALARM
controller and the alarm condition is latched at the fire alarm station.

WARNINGS PULL
IN CASE
OF
This device will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further FIRE
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-270P
2-Stage Fire Alarm Station

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387051P FILE NAME: 387051P.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 5.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 02JUN99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) The 270P is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it Compatible
contains no user-serviceable parts and should NOT be electrical box
disassembled.
Cover release
2) Open the pull station using a flat blade screwdriver to twist the screw
cover release screw counter-clockwise, while pulling the cover
away from its backplate.
3) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground
faults.
4) Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram. Back
plate
5) Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided
and apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serial Toggle
number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate switch
location in the Serial Number Logbook. MAL
NOR
6) Using the two 6-32 x 5/8 in (16 mm) machine screws provided,
mount the pull-station to the electrical box.
7) Pull the glass rod release lever and install the glass rod through LIF
T

the mounting bracket on the front of the pull station. Push the Glass rod
glass rod release lever into its closed position. Set the toggle release
switch to the NORMAL position, and snap the cover into its lever
locked position.

WIRING DIAGRAM
Notes
[1] Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring
specifications.
2 All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Factory
connections:
do NOT alter

Green LED
(normal)
Red LED
(alarm/active)
4 3 2 1

TB1

Wire Stripping Guide

DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)

DATA IN (–) DATA OUT (–) 1/4 in (~6 mm)

From Signature controller To next device Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that connect to
or previous device [1] the terminal block of the module.

REAR VIEW CAUTION: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing
less wire may result in a faulty connection.

P/N: 387051P REV: 5.0 PG: 2 / 4

 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

Description Gamme de tensions de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc

Le poste d’alarme d’incendie à 2 étages, 270P, est un composant du Courant de veille: 396 µA
Série Signature. Le 270P est un dispositif de déclenchement de
signal à contact sec normalement ouvert qui ne requiert qu’une action Courant de fonctionnement actif: 680 µA
de la part de l’utilisateur pour déclencher une préalarme. Un Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
interrupteur à touche est utilisé pour activer l’alarme générale après
vérification que l’évacuation est nécessaire. (Remarque: La manette Gamme d'humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR
d’alarme doit être dans la position tirée pour pouvour insérer la clef.) Construction: Zinc coulé avec plaque arrière en acier
Le module d’entrée double monté à l’arrière du dispositif surveille le
poste. L’entrée 1 est utilisée pour transmettre un signal de préalarme Mécanisme de fonctionnement: Action unique, levier à tirer avec
au contrôleur de boucle quand l’interrupteur est fermé (i.e. quand la nterrupteur à touche
manette est tirée). L’entrée 2 du module est utilisée pour transmettre Poids à la livraison: 0,5 kg (1,2 livres)
un signal d’alarme au contrôleur de boucle lorsque l’interrupteur à
touche est activé. Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 54 mm
Adressage électronique (2-1/8 po) de profondeur avec couvercle simple standard
Deux adresses de dispositif sont nécessaires. Le contrôleur de Barres en verre de remplacement:
boucle assigne deux adresses au 270P automatiquement, ou des USA, réf 270-GLR (paquet de 20 barres)
adresses particulières peuvent être assignées au poste via ordinateur CAN, réf 27165 (paquet de 12 barres)
portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé.
Boîtes montées en saillie, commandées spécialement
Témoins à DEL
27193-11: WHD = 76 x 121 x 64 mm (3 x 4-3/4 x 2-1/2 in). Fini
Des témoins à DEL de diagnostic fournissent une indication visible de émail rouge. Combinaison 1,27 cm (1/2 po) et 1,905 cm (3/4 po)
l'état du poste, lorsque le dispositif est retiré de la boîte électrique. débouchures en haut, en bas et à l'arrière.
Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote. 276B-RSB: WHD = 89 x 128 x 62 mm (3-1/2 x 5-1/32 x 2-7/16 in).
Alarme/actifLe témoin à DEL rouge clignote. Fini émail rouge. Combinaison 1,27 cm (1/2 po) et 1,91 cm (3/4
Montage po) débouchures en haut, en bas et à l'arrière.
Le 270P peut être encastré dans une boîte carrée standard de 10,16 Wiremold C5744: Poli, fini émail crème. Combinaison 1,27 cm
cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur avec couvercle (1/2 po) et 2,54 cm (1 po) débouchures en haut, en bas et à
simple standard, ou il peut être monté en saillie dans une boîte l'arrière.
électrique commandée spécialement. (Se référer à la section des
spécifications de cette fiche pour les renseignements relatifs à une
commande). Le bornier accepte des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de 0,75
mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 16 et 18 AWG sont SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT
préférables.
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système
Le 270P requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature. FIRE
Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme n/o (Classe B) ALARM
Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné aux canaux d’entrée 1 et 2 du
270P lors de sa fabrication. Lorsque l’interrupteur à touche est activé,
un signal d’alarme est transmis au contrôleur de boucle et la
condition d’alarme est verrouillée au niveau du poste d’alarme PULL
d’incendie. IN CASE
OF
FIRE
AVERTISSEMENTS
Ce dispositif NE fonctionne PAS en l’absence de courant électrique.
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous
conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de
protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de
sécurité supplémentaires.

FICHE D’INSTALLATION

SIGA-270P
Poste d’alarme d’incendie à deux étages

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF: 387051P NOM DU FICHIER: 387051P.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 5.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 02JUN99 CRÉÉ PAR: D. Chinell

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: 387051P REV: 5.0 PG: 3 / 4
 MODE D’INSTALLATION

1) Le 270P est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne Boîte électrique

contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et NE doit compatible
PAS être démonté.
2) Ouvrir le poste à manette en utilisant un tournevis à lame plate Vis de
pour tourner la vis de desserrage du couvercle dans le sens desserrage du
inverse des aiguilles d'une montre tout en écartant le couvercle couvercle
de sa plaque arrière.
3) Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts
de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.
4) Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
Plaque
5) Écrire l'adresse assignée au poste à manette sur l'étiquette arrière
fournie et coller cette étiquette sur le poste. Décoller du poste
l'étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller à l'endroit approprié MAL
NOR Interrupteur
dans le registre des numéros de série.
à bascule
6) Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 5/8 po (16 mm) fournies,
monter le poste à manette dans la boîte électrique. LIF
T

7) Tirer le levier de déclenchement de la barre en verre et faire Levier de

passer la barre en verre dans le support de montage à l'avant du déclenchement de
poste à manette. Pousser le levier de déclenchement de la tige la barre en verre
en verre dans sa position fermée. Positionner l'interrupteur à
bascule à la position NORMALE et pousser le couvercle à
enclenchement dans sa position verrouillée.

SCHÉMAS DE CÂBLAGE

Remarques
[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
Signature pour les spécifications de câblage.
2 Tout le câblage est limité en courant et surveillé.

Connexions
faites à l’usine
NE PAS altérer

Témoin à DEL
vert (normal)
Témoin à DEL
rouge
4 3 2 1
(alarme/actif)
TB1

Dénudage des fils

Entrée des Sortie des
données (+) données (+)
Entrée des Sortie des
données (–) données (–) ~6 mm (1/4 po)
Du contrôleur de boucle Vers le dispositif suivant Dénuder l’extrémité de TOUS les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4
Signature ou du dispositif [1] po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.
précédent
ATTENTION: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut
VUE ARRIÈRE
provoquer un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une
longueur plus courte peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

P/N: 387051P REV: 5.0 PG: 4 / 4

 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
Description Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
The Double Action Fire Alarm Station, Model 278, is a component of Standby current: 250 µA
the Signature Series. The 278 is a normally-open, dry contact signal
initiating device that requires two actions by the user in order to Activated current: 400 µA
initiate an alarm. First, the upper door marked LIFT THEN PULL Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
HANDLE must be raised to access the alarm handle. Second, the
alarm handle must be pulled to initiate an alarm. The single input Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH
module mounted to the back of the unit supervises the station and Construction: High impact plastic with steel backplate
sends an alarm signal to the loop controller when the switch is closed
(i.e. when the handle is pulled). Operating mechanism: Double action, pull lever
Device addressing Shipping Weight: 1.0 lbs (0.4 kg)
One device address is required. The loop controller assigns an Compatible electrical boxes
address to the 278 automatically. A custom address can be assigned North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
to the station via laptop computer; no addressing switches are used. Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with 1-gang
cover
LEDs
Replacement glass rods
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the module USA, P/N 276-GLR (pkg 20 rods)
when the unit is removed from the electrictal box. CAN, P/N 276-GLR (pkg 20 rods)
Normal: Green LED flashes Special order surface mount boxes
Alarm/active: Red LED flashes 27193-10: Cream enamel finish
Mounting
The 278 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep
1-gang box, standard 4 in square 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with 1-
gang cover, or European 100 mm square box. The terminal blocks
will accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). PRODUCT DIAGRAM
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
System controller compatibility
The 278 requires the Signature Loop Controller.
Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching (Class B)
The 278 has a factory assigned personality code 1. Personality code
1 configures the 278 for Class B operation. When the pull lever is
activated, an alarm signal is sent to the Loop Controller and the alarm
condition is latched at the fire alarm station. LIFT THEN
PULL HANDLE

PULL FOR
WARNINGS
This device will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires
FIRE
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-278
Double Action Fire Alarm Station

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387047P FILE NAME: 387047P.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 5.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 02JUN99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) The 278 is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it
contains no user-serviceable parts and should NOT be Compatible electrical box
disassembled.
2) Open the pull station. Insert the key into the key-latch cover
release and rotate the key while pulling the cover away from its
backplate.
3) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground
faults.
4) Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram.
Back
5) Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided plate
and apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serial
number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate Toggle
location in the serial number logbook. switch
6) Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided,
mount the pull station to the electrical box.
Key-latch
7) Install the glass rod through the mounting bracket inside of the Glass rod cover release
pull station. Set the toggle switch to the NORMAL position, and
snap the cover into its locked position.

OPEN

WIRING DIAGRAM
Notes
[1] Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring
specifications.
2 All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Factory
connections:
do NOT alter

Green LED
(normal)
Red LED
(alarm/active)
4 3 2 1

TB1

Wire Stripping Guide

DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)

DATA IN (–) DATA OUT (–) 1/4 in (~6 mm)

From Signature controller To next device Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that connect to
or previous device [1] the terminal block of the module.

REAR VIEW CAUTION: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing
of 278 less wire may result in a faulty connection.

P/N: 387047P REV: 5.0 PG: 2 / 4

 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

Description Gamme de tensions de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc

Le poste d’alarme d’incendie à double action, modèle 278, est un Courant de veille: 250 µA
composant du système Série Signature. Le 278 est un dispositif de
déclenchement de signal à contact sec normalement ouvert qui requiert Courant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µA
deux actions de la part de l’utilisateur pour déclencher une alarme. Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
D’abord, la porte du haut où est marqué SOULEVER PUIS TIRER LA
MANETTE doit être montée pour avoir accès à la manette d’alarme. Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR
Ensuite, la manette d’alarme doit être tirée pour déclencher une alarme. Construction: Plastique à résistance élevée aux impacts avec plaque arrière
Le module d’entrée unique monté à l’arrière du dispositif surveille le poste en acier
et transmet un signal d’alarme au contrôleur de boucle quand
l’interrupteur est fermé (i.e. quand la manette est tirée). Mécanisme de fonctionnement: Double action, levier à tirer
Adressage électronique Poids à la livraison: 0,4 kg (1,0 livres)
Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Le contrôleur de boucle assigne Boîtes électriques compatibles
une adresse au poste automatiquement. Une adresse particulière peut Boîte nord américaine de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur simple
être assignée au poste via ordinateur portati; aucun commutateur standard
d’adressage n’est utilisé. Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm (1-1/2
po) de profondeur avec un couvercle simple standard
Témoins à DEL:
Barres en verre de remplacement
Des témoins à DEL de diagnostic fournissent une indication visible de USA, réf 276-GLR (paquet de 20 barres)
l’état du module, lorsque le dispositif est retiré de la boîte électrique. CAN, réf 276-GLR (paquet de 12 barres)
Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote. Boîtes de montage en saillie, commandées spécialement
Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote. 27193-10: Fini émail crème
Montage
Le 278 peut être monté dans une boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord
de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur, dans une boîte carrée standard de
10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur avec un
couvercle simple standard ou dans une boîte carrée européenne de 100 SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT
mm. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de 0,75 mm carrés
(AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 16 et 18 AWG sont préférables.
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système
Le 278 requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature.
Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme n/o (Classe B)
Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné en usine au 278. Le code de
personnalité 1 configure le 278 pour le fonctionnement en classe B.
Quand la manette est tirée, un signal d’alarme est envoyé au contrôleur
de boucle et la condition d’alarme est verrouillée au poste d’alarme LIFT THEN
d’incendie. PULL HANDLE

PULL FOR

AVERTISSEMENTS FIRE
Ce dispositif NE fonctionne PAS en l’absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous con-
seillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection
contre les incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité
supplémentaires.

FICHE D’INSTALLATION

SIGA-278
Poste d’alarme d’incendie à double action

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF: 387047P NOM DU FICHIER: 387047P.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 5.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 02JUN99 CRÉÉ PAR: D. Chinell

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: 387047P REV: 5.0 PG: 3 / 4
 MODE D’INSTALLATION

1) Le 278 est expédié de l’usine assemblé; il ne contient aucun

composant qui puisse être dépanné par l’utilisateur et NE doit Boîte électrique compatible
PAS être démonté.
2) Ouvrir le poste à tirette. Insérer la clef dans l’ouverture du couvercle
pour le verrouillage à clef et tourner la clef tout en écartant le
couvercle de sa plaque arrière.
3) Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts de
connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.
4) Faire toutes les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
5) Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et coller Plaque
cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette de arrière
numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le registre des
numéros de série. Interrupteur
à bascule
6) Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (16 mm) fournies, monter
le poste à tirette dans la boîte électrique. Ouverture du
couvercle pour
7) Faire passer la barre en verre dans le support de montage à l’intérieur
le verrouillage
du poste à tirette. Positionner l’interrupteur à bascule à la position
à clef
NORMALE et pousser le couvercle à enclenchement dans sa position Barre en verre
verrouillée.

OUVRIR

SCHÉMAS DE CÂBLAGE
Remarques
[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle Signature
pour les spécifications de câblage.
2 Tout le câblage est limité en courant et surveillé.

Connexions
faites à l’usine
NE PAS altérer

Témoin à DEL
vert (normal)
Témoin à DEL
rouge 3 2
4 1
(alarme/actif)
TB1

Dénudage des fils

Entrée des Sortie des
données (+) données (+)
Entrée des Sortie des
données (–) données (–) ~6 mm (1/4 po)
Du contrôleur de boucle Vers le dispositif suivant Dénuder l’extrémité de TOUS les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4 po)
Signature ou du dispositif [1] avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.
précédent
ATTENTION: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquer
VUE ARRIÈRE un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courte
du 278 SÉRIE peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

P/N: 387047P REV: 5.0 PG: 4 / 4

 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
The SIGA-AAXX is a high-efficiency, dual-input, switch-mode audio Power requirements
amplifier. The amplifier comes in two versions: 30 watt (SIGA-AA30) and Standby 1 mA @ 24 Vdc
50 watt (SIGA-AA50), and has both 1 V and 25 V input levels. The Active SIGA-AA30 1.7 A @ 24 Vdc
output is supervised, power-limited, and user-selectable for 25 Vrms or Active SIGA-AA50 3.2 A @ 24 Vdc
70 Vrms output voltage.
Frequency response 400 Hz to 4 kHz at -3 dB (ULC)
An integral Signature module under software control selects the amplifier 800 Hz to 2.8 kHz (ULI)
input channel. The amplifier reports its status to the Main Controller
Harmonic distortion < 5%
Module to reduce the need for additional field wiring. The amplifier also
features a backup amplifier connection, which supports one-to-one or Input
banked backup amplifiers. Channel 1 dual input 1 Vrms or 25 Vrms maximum
Channel 2 dual input 1 Vrms or 25 Vrms maximum
Output
SIGA-AA30 30 watts @ 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms
INSTALLATION SIGA-AA50 50 watts @ 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms
Configuration Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z)
EOL resistor 47 kW
1 Mount the amplifier with the screws and washers provided.
Signature Data Circuit
Addresses 2 module addresses
Emulation Signature series CC2 module
Maximum wire size 12 AWG (2.5 mm2)
Backup tone 1 kHz
Operating temperature 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Primary Power Supply Humidity 0 to 93%, noncondensing

Warning!

Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing

Main Controller Module components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

Expander Loop Module

! Caution!
Audio Control Module
Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.

Audio Amplifier LED indicators

LED Color Pattern Description
DS1 Green Steady Power amp disabled
DS2 Yellow Steady Backup mode
DS3 Green Steady Amplifier active
DS4 Green Flashing Normal communications (daughterboard)
DS5 Red Flashing Active condition (daughterboard)
Audio Amplifier

Interlocking washer

Screw

Note: See the installation sheets listed in the title box for other places
to mount the Audio Amplifier.

INSTALLATION SHEET:
2 Configure the amplifier
a. Set JP2 (output voltage) to 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms as required. SIGA-AA30/SIGA-AA50 Audio Amplifiers
b. Set JP3 on the back of the daughter board for the backup mode.
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387343 FILE NAME: 387343.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: J. Massing
Jumper Settings
DATE: 30MAR00 CREATED BY: B. Graham

JP2 Pins 1 and 2: 70 Vrms Related documentation: WB3(R) Wallbox installation sheet, WB7(R) Wallbox
installation sheet, RACCR Remote Audio Closet Cabinet installation sheet
Pins 2 and 3: 25 Vrms
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
JP3 In: TB5 signal before 1 kHz backup tone
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
Out: 1 kHz backup tone before TB5 signal CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 WIRING
3 Wire the amplifier 25 Vrms input wiring
TB1
a. Connect the power, the Signature Data To the Ch 1 input of the 25 V JP3 on reverse side
Circuit (SDC) , the input risers, and the next amplifier COM
backup risers as required.
DS5 DS4
b. Test the circuit before you connect the From the Ch 1 output of the 25 V Out
amplifier to the output wiring. source amplifier COM
3
c. Connect the circuits that check out In Daughterboard
good to the appropriate amplifier TB2
terminals. To the Ch 2 input of the 25 V
next amplifier COM
Note: The terminal blocks indicate the
polarity for normal monitoring of the From the Ch 2 output of the 25 V
circuit’s electrical integrity. Out
source amplifier COM DS1
Audio Amplifier
3
In
1 Vrms input wiring
Data in Data out Notes Detail
To next device 1 Signature series module: CC1, CC2, or UM 1 volt connections
if required
2 UL/ULC Listed 47 kW EOL
TB1 3 The actual placement of the TB1 and TB2
_ _ COM
+ + TB2 output terminals is almost directly behind the 1V
input terminals. Note also that the output Out
CH1 +
_ terminals are taller than the input terminals.
AUDIO OUT COM
4 See the detail for 1 volt connections. 1V
2-AAC In
5 All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
TB3
CH2 +
AUDIO OUT _ TB1 Audio TB4
4 Amplifier
Audio riser out 2 Class B only
3
Audio riser return Class A only
TB2 TB3
4 SIGA JP2 TB5
In_ Out_ 70 V
From the SDC + + TB6
2
3 25 V 2 1
2
_ 24 Vdc from a listed
+
fire alarm power supply 1
TB1 2
Audio TB4 Typical audio
4 Amplifier 1
riser out

3
TB3
TB2 JP2
4 SIGA TB5 Typical audio
In_ Out_ 70 V riser return
+ + TB6 (Class A only)
3 25 V
TB4/TB5 wiring
+ 24 Vdc from a listed
_
fire alarm power supply DS3 DS2 TB4
TB1 SH
Audio TB4
3 +
Amplifier B
2 _
NAC
4 +
A _
TB3
TB2 JP2
3 SIGA TB5 Audio Amplifier
2 In_ Out_ 70 V TB5
+ + TB6
+
4 25 V In _
Backup
+
+ 24 Vdc from a listed Out _
_
To the rest of the fire alarm power supply
Signature devices

P/N: 387343 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 SPECIFICATIONS

Temporal Continuous
Operating Voltage (Note #1) 20 to 24 VDC 20 to 24V FWR 20 to 24 VDC 20 to 24V FWR
Low High Low High Low High Low High
Vol. Vol. Vol. Vol. Vol. Vol. Vol. Vol.
Operating Current (UL 268 Individual alarm) 20mA 44mA 29mA 57mA 20mA 44mA 29mA 57mA
Operating Current (UL 464 Reverse Polarity) 50mA 60mA 55mA 73mA 50mA 60mA 55mA 73mA
Sound Level Output @ 10 ft (3.05 M) Note #2 Low Volume High Volume Low Volume High Volume
Anechoic - Peak @ 24 VDC 99 dBA 99 dBA 104 dBA 99 dBA 104 dBA
Anechoic -Average @ 24 VDC 94 dBA 98 dBA 94 dBA 98 dBA
Reverberant Room per UL 464 @ 24 VDC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA
Reverberant Room per UL 464 @ 20 VDC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA
Reverberant Room per UL 268 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA
Synchronization Pulses at temporal rate within 200 ms on common circuit (Note #3)
Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
Operating Temperature 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 93% RH
Storage Temperature -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C)
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer, White
Maximum Distance from Ceiling (wall mount) 12 in (305 mm)
Compatible Electrical Boxes NorthAmerican 4" (101 mm) Square by 2-1/8" (54 mm) deep; mud box (4in x
4in octagonal concrete ring); European 100 mm2
Shipping Weight 1 Lb. (0.45 Kg)

NOTES:
1. The horn must be connected to a continuous voltage when it is set to sound a temporal horn; it may be connected to either a
pulsed or continuous voltage when set to sound a steady tone.
2. For sleeping area installations, the HIGH VOLUME setting must be used.
3. The temporal pattern for the horn is : 1/2s ON, 1/2s OFF, 1/2s ON, 1/2s OFF, 1/2s ON, 1-1/2s OFF, repeat cycle.
4. The base wil accept #12AWG (2.5 mm2 ), #14 (1.5 mm2 ), #16 (1.0 mm2 ), and #18 (0.75 mm2 ) wire. Size #16 and #18
are preferred.
5. Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop wires around terminals.
6. Rated 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) when used with model SIGA-PS or SIGA-IS.
7.At power up, units may sound for 10 seconds. Do NOT connect 24 VDC until mapping is complete.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SIGA-AB4

North American 4" (101 mm) Square 2-1/8" (54 mm) Deep Box,
2
mud box (concrete ring); European 100 mm .

2.13/16 in
(71 mm)

6 13/16 in (173 mm)

INSTALLATION SHEET:

SIGA-AB4 Audible Detector Base

DRAWING PART NO.: 270754P FILE NAME: 270754.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 1.1 APPROVED BY: RR
2
DATE: 08/12/97 CREATED BY: RW

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
CORPORATION Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, ON, Canada
 WIRING
Base Wiring and Jumper Settings
JW1 JW2
OUT = Low Volume OUT = Steady Tone
IN = High Volume IN = Temporal Tone

DATA (+) IN/OUT

JW1 JW2

DATA (-) OUT

DATA (-) IN
SIG +
SIG -
From Power Supply To Next Sounder Base or
or Previous Sounder Base EOL Relay
24 VDC IN (+) 24 VDC OUT (+)

24 VDC IN (-) 24 VDC OUT (-)

DATA OUT (-)

DATA IN (-)

DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)

From Signature Controller To Next Signature Device
or Previous Device

Head Operates Its Sounder SIGA-CRR Activates ALL Sounders,

(complies with UL 268)
Head Operates Its Sounder
(complies with UL 268 & UL 464)
6254A-003
Audible Bases EOL Relay 6254A-003
1 1
Audible Bases EOL Relay
Listed 24 VDC
Power Supply

Listed 24 VDC
Power Supply

Optional SIGA-CR
for disabling/disconnecting Optional SIGA-CR
Signature Signature for disabling/disconnecting
sounder base
Controller Controller sounder base

NOTES

1 All wiring supervised and power limited.

2 Sounder operates when detector operates (UL 268).
3 Sounder operates when polarity of power supply is reversed, i.e. SIGA-CRR module activated (UL 464).
4 Optional SIGA-CR module used to silence sounders.
5 End-Of-Line relay must monitor and report power supply trouble to control panel.
6 Class B data wiring may be "T-tapped."
7 Polarity of power supply circuit shown in supervisory state.
 CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Temporel Continu
Tension de fonctionnement (Note n° 1) 20 à 24 V CC 20 à 24 V FWR 20 à 24 V CC 20 à 24 V FWR
Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume
faible fort faible fort faible fort faible fort
Courant de fonctionnement (Alarme individuelle UL 268) 20 mA 44 mA 29 mA 57 mA 20 mA 44 mA 29 mA 57 mA
Courant de fonctionnement (Polarité inverse UL 464) 50 mA 60 mA 55 mA 73 mA 50 mA 60 mA 55 mA 73 mA
Niveau du son en sortie à 3,05 m (10 pi.) Note n° 2 Volume faible Volume fort Volume faible Volume fort
Salle anéchoïque - crête à 24 V CC 99 dBA 104 dBA 99 dBA 104 dBA
Salle anéchoïque - moyenne à 24 V CC 94 dBA 98 dBA 94 dBA 98 dBA
Chambre de réverbération selon UL 464 à 24 V CC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA
Chambre de réverbération selon UL 464 à 20 V CC 79 dBA 82 dBA 79 dBA 82 dBA
Chambre de réverbération selon UL 268 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA 85 dBA
Synchronisation Impulsions au taux temporaire à moins de 200 msec sur le circuit commun (Note n° 3)
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série Signature
Température de fonctionnement 0 °C à 38 °C (32 °F à 100 °F)
Humidité de fonctionnement 0 à 93% HR
Température de stockage -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc
Distance maximum du plafond (Montage mural) 304,8 mm (12 po)
Boîtes électriques compatibles Amérique du Nord, section carrée de 101,6 mm (4 po) et de 54 mm (2-1/8 po) de
profondeur; boîte à boue (anneau de béton octagonal de 10,16 cm x 10,16 cm
(4 po x 4 po); Europe 100 mm 2

Poids à la livraison 0,45 kg (1 livre)

NOTES:
1. Base sonore doit être branché à une tension continue quand il est configuré pour émettre un son temporaire; il peut être branché à une tension pulsée
ou continue quand il est configuré pour émettre un son stable.
2. Pour les installations où l'on dort, le réglage sur VOLUME FORT doit être utilisé.
3. La séquence temporelle pour l'avertisseur est: 1/2s MARCHE, 1/2s ARRÊT, 1/2s MARCHE, 1/2s ARRÊT, 1/2s MARCHE, 1-1/2s ARRÊT, répétition du
cycle.
4. La base accepte des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75 mm (AWG n° 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 1 mm ou 0,75 mm (AWG n° 16 et 18) sont
2 2 2 2 2 2

préférables.
5. Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils autour des bornes.
6. Gamme de températures de service: 0 °C à 49 °C (32°F à 120 °F) lorsque l'avertisseur est utilisé avec les modèles SIGA-PS et SIGA-IS.
7. À la mise sous tension, les dispositifs peuvent émettre un signal sonore pendant 10 secondes. NE PAS brancher le 24 V CC tant que la mise en
correspondance n'est pas terminée.

MODE D'INSTALLATION SIGA-AB4

Boîte nord américaine section carrée 101 mm (4 po) x 54 mm (2-1/8 po) de
2
profondeur; boîte à boue (anneau de béton); européenne 100 mm .

2.13/16 in
(71 mm)

6 13/16 in (173 mm)

FICHE D'INSTALLATION:

SIGA-AB4 Base sonore de détecteur

DESSIN RÉF.: 270754P NOM DU FICHIER: 270754.CDR
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.1 APPROUVÉ PAR: RR
2
DATE: 12/08/97 CRÉÉ PAR: RW

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, ON, Canada
CORPORATION
 CÂBLAGE
Câblage de la base et configuration des cavaliers
JW1 JW2
OUT = Volume faible OUT = Son stable
IN = Volume forte IN = Son temporel

DATA (+) IN/OUT

JW1 JW2

DATA (-) OUT

DATA (-) IN
SIG +
SIG -
De l'alimentation ou de la Vers la base sonore suivante
base sonore précédent ou vers le relais FDL
Arrivée 24 V CC (+) Sortie 24 V CC (+)

Arrivée 24 V CC (-) Sortie 24 V CC (-)

Sortie des données (-)

Entrée des données (-)

Entrée des données (+) Sortie des données (+)

Du contrôleur Signature Vers le dispositif Signature suivant
ou du dispositif précédent

La tête contrôle sa base sonore Le SIGA-CRR active TOUTES bases sonores,

(conformément à UL 268)
la tête contrôle sa base sonore
(conformément à UL 268 et UL 464)
Relais FDL
Bases sonores 6254A-003
1 1 Relais FDL
Bases sonores 6254A-003
Alimentation
répertoriée
24 V CC
Alimentation
répertoriée
24 V CC

SIGA-CR optionnel pour SIGA-CR optionnel pour

mettre hors service/déconnecter Contrôleur mettre hors service/déconnecter
Contrôleur
la base sonore Signature la base sonore
Signature

NOTES
1 L'ensemble du câblage est surveillé et à limitation de courant.
2 La base sonore marche lorsque le détecteur marche (UL 268).
3 La base sonore marche lorsque la polarité de l'alimentation est inversée, i.e. lorsque le module SIGA-CRR
est activé (UL 464).
4 Le module optionnel SIGA-CR sert à réduire les bases sonores au silence.
5 Le relais FDL doit surveiller l'alimentation et reporter les problèmes au panneau de commande.
6 Le câblage des données en classe B peut être "dérivée en T".
7 La polarité du circuit d'alimentation est illustrée dans l'état de supervision.
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
The SIGA-APS is a switch-mode auxiliary power AC Input voltage
supply designed to provide additional power for audio SIGA-APS 120 Vac @ 300 W maximum, 50/60 Hz
components and external Notification Appliance SIGA-APS-220 220 Vac @ 300 W maximum, 50/60 Hz
Circuits (NACs). The power supply monitors the AC Maximum wire size 12 AWG (2.5 mm2)
line, performs ground fault testing, and charges Output voltage
batteries (up to 10 Ah). The SIGA-APS also provides a Nominal rating 24 Vdc @ 6.75 A total
Output circuits Two power-limited circuits rated at 24 Vdc @
smooth and uninterrupted transition to batteries in the 3.2 A each
event of an AC power loss. Maximum wire size 12 AWG (2.5 mm2)
Battery charging
All trouble conditions detected by the SIGA-APS are Charge current 1.0 A
transmitted to the fire alarm control panel through its Charge capacity 10 Ah
connection to the Signature Data Circuit (SDC), Signature
eliminating the need for additional devices. All Addressing Two module addresses
connections intended to leave the cabinet are fully Personality Code 03 (Emulates SIGA-CT2)
protected against direct and induced transient voltage Maximum wire size 14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
conditions. Environmental Conditions
Temperature range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Humidity 93%, Non-condensing

INSTALLATION
Warning!
Mount the SIGA-APS with the screws and washers provided.
Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing components.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

Auxiliary Power Supply

! Caution!

Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.

WIRE ROUTING
The routing of power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring differs with each
cabinet. For more information on the routing of power-limited and nonpower-
limited wiring, see the cabinet’s installation sheet.

PRODUCT DIAGRAM

#6 interlocking washers
6/32 x 3/8 pan head screws

INSTALLATION SHEET:
SIGA-APS (-220)
Auxiliary Power Supply Module
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387342 FILE NAME: 387342.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: J. Massing
DATE: 30MAR00 CREATED BY: B. Graham
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 WIRING

Wire Stripping Guide

Strip 1/4 inch from the ends of ALL wires that connect to the terminal blocks of the module.

1/4 inch (6.4 mm)

Caution:
Exposing more than 1/4 inch of wire may cause a ground fault.
Exposing less than 1/4 inch of wire may result in a faulty connection.

To dedicated 220 Vac,

7.5 Amp, 50/60 Hz
supervised branch
circuit
TB1
Line 1 L1
Line 2 L2
Ground G

2 4 220 Vac Auxiliary Power Supply

To dedicated 120 Vac,

15 Amp, 50/60 Hz
supervised branch TB3 1
circuit
+ 24 Vdc
_ NAC1 power
2 4 + 24 Vdc
TB1
_
Hot NAC2 power
_
Neutral
BATTERY + Data out 1
Ground 2 3
Signature
TB2 TB4 Data
120 Vac Auxiliary Power Supply Circuit 3
_
+ Data in
See the details below for the battery terminal wiring.

Auxiliary Power Supply

Route the battery wiring harness
(P/N 250181) through the plastic
Notes
channel under the SIGA-AAXX
amplifiers to the battery terminals. 1 Power-limited
TB2 2 Nonpower-limited
Battery
_
+ 3 Supervised
SIGA-AAXX
TB2
Plastic channel 4 Nonsupervised

SIGA-AAXX

red wire

+ _ + _ + _ + _
Battery Battery
black wire
Top view

387342.CDR REV 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 SIGA-CC1
Single Input Signal Module

Product description Warnings

1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
2. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.

Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current 223 µA
Activated current: 100 µA
Output ratings
24 Vdc: 2 A
25 Vac audio: 50 W
70 Vac audio: 35 W
EOL resistor value: 47 kΩ
Max. circuit resistance: refer to manual
Max. circuit capacitance: 0.1 µF
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
The SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Module is a component of the Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH
Signature Series. The SIGA-CC1 is an analog addressable device Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)
used to connect a supervised output circuit to the riser bus. The SIGA- Construction: High impact engineering polymer
CC1 does not provide supervision of the riser; the fire alarm panel Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)
must provide this function. Upon command from the loop controller, the Compatible electrical boxes
SIGA-CC1 connects the output circuit to the riser input which can be North American 2.5 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
24 Vdc to operate polarized audible and visible signals, 25 V or 70 V to Standard 4 in (101.6 mm) x 1.5 in (38 mm) deep square box with
operate audio evacuation circuits, or telephone audio. One device a 2-gang cover
address is required.
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CC1 automatically.
A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptop
Installation instructions
computer. No addressing switches are used. Note: The SIGA-CC1 is shipped from the factory as an assembled
unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the module
disassembled.
when the cover plate is removed:
To install the module:
• Normal: green LED flashes
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes
1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground
Mounting faults.

The SIGA-CC1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram.
deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided
with a 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG and apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serial
wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate
System controller compatibility location in the serial number logbook.
4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw provided,
The SIGA-CC1 requires the Signature loop controller. The loop
mount the wall plate to the module.
controller downloads the personality code which determines how the
module operates. The following personality codes can be downloaded 5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided,
to the SIGA-CC1. mount the module to the electrical box.
Personality code 5: Riser selector (single input): The SIGA-CC1 is Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
assigned personality code 5 at the factory. This configures the module
as a riser selector for signal power (24 Vdc) or audio evacuation (25 or Wire stripping guide
70 Vac). Since the module is not used for telephone audio, the ring-
tone generator is disabled for this personality code. The output circuit
is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists, the control
panel inhibits the activation of the audible or visible signal circuit, so 1/4 in (~6 mm)
that the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.
Personality code 6: Riser selector (single-input) ring-tone: Personality
code 6 configures the module as a telephone riser selector. When a Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that connect to the
telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook, the terminal block of the module.
module generates its own ring-tone signal. A separate ring-tone riser is
unnecessary. The module sends this signal to the control panel to Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing less
indicate the presence of an off-hook condition, and waits for the wire may result in a faulty connection.
system operator to respond to the call. When the system operator
responds, the ring-tone signal is disabled.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387022P REV: 7.0

SIGA-CC1 - Single Input Signal Module 1/2
 Transient protection caution

Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)

The SIGA-CC1 requires transient protection for installations that

connect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. The
module's circuitry requires a Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)
for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load of
bells or horns.
Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminals
of the bell or horn electrically closest to the module. The bipolar
transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.
Locate bells and horns at least 6 ft (1.83 m) from the module.

Wiring diagram

Personality code 5:
typical speaker circuit

Personality code 6:
typical telephone circuit
Transient protection
(see "Transient protection
Personality codes 5: caution" above
typical notification
appliance circuit
Style Y (Class B) [1] [2] [5] [8]

10 9

UL/ULC listed
47KΩ EOL
Red LED Green LED
(alarm/active) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (normal)

To next device or
Riser out (+) EOL resistor supplied
Riser out (-) with UL/ULC listed
Riser in (+) control panel
From UL/ULC listed [5]
control panel Riser in (-)

From Signature controller Data in (+) Data out (+)

To next device
or previous device Data in (-) Data out (-)
[3] [4]

Notes [5] Supervised and power-limited when connected to power limited

source. If non-power limited, then all power limited wiring in box
[1] For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate technical must use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC.
reference manual Power limited marking must be eliminated.
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sq 6. This module does not support 2-wire smoke detectors
mm) wire
7. Polarity at terminals 9 and 10 on notification appliance, telephone,
[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiring and speaker circuits shown in supervisory condition. Connect as
specifications shown in diagram. Polarity reverses on alarm.
[4] Supervised and power-limited [8] For EN54 applications, an RFK1 must be added to the output
circuit

P/N: 387022P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-CC1 - Single Input Signal Module
 SIGA-CC1S
Auto-Sync Output Module

Product description System controller compatibility

The SIGA-CC1S requires the Signature loop controller. The
loop controller downloads the personality code which
determines how the module operates. The following
personality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-CC1S.
Personality code 5: Single-input riser selector: Personality
code 5 configures the module as a signal power (24 Vdc) riser
selector. The output wiring is monitored for open and short
circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panel to
inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the
riser is not connected to the wiring fault.
Personality code 6: Riser selector (single-input) ring-tone:
Personality code 6 configures the module as a telephone riser
selector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or
lifted from its hook, the module generates its own ring-tone
signal. A separate ring-tone riser is unnecessary. The module
sends this signal to the control panel to indicate the presence
of an off-hook condition, and waits for the system operator to
respond to the call. When the system operator responds, the
The SIGA-CC1S Auto-Sync Output Module is a component of ring-tone signal is disabled.
the Signature Series. The SIGA-CC1S is an intelligent, analog- Personality code 25: Auto sync output (default):
addressable device used to connect a supervised output circuit Personality code 25 configures the module to provide
to a signal riser. Upon command from the Signature loop synchronization of compatible fire alarm signals across multiple
controller, SIGA-CC1S connects the output circuit to the riser zones. The output wiring is monitored for open circuits and
input. The output circuit energizes a riser to operate: short circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panel
• 24 Vdc polarized audible and visual notification appliances to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the
(Note 1) riser is not connected to the wiring fault. Personality code 25 is
• 25 Vac audible evacuation circuits only compatible with EST3, ADT3000, and XLS1000 panels.
• 70 Vac audible evacuation circuits Note: You may use nonsynchronous fire alarm signals with or
• Telephone audio instead of compatible synchronized fire alarm signals, but the
operation of these devices will not comply with UL 1971.
Notes
• The output circuit uses a resynchronizing feature to Warnings
operate polarized notification appliances if they are 1. Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing
compatible with Genesis series products. See the components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury
compatibility section below. or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the
• The SIGA-CC1S does not supervise the 24 Vdc riser; the terminals even when power is shut off!
fire alarm control panel provides this function. 2. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
One device address is required. The loop controller assigns an fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
address to the SIGA-CC1S automatically. A custom address discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
can also be assigned to the module via laptop computer. No specialist.
addressing switches are used. 3. This module does not support conventional smoke
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the detectors.
module when the cover plate is removed:
Specifications
• Normal: green LED flashes
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current 223 µA
Mounting Activated current: 100 µA
Output ratings
The SIGA-CC1S can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in
24 Vdc (telephone riser also): 2 A
(64 mm) deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2
25 Vac audio: 50 W
in (38 mm) deep with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept
70 Vac audio: 35 W
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm).
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. EOL resistor value: 47 kΩ
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)
Construction: High impact engineering polymer

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0

SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 1/4
Shipping weight: 0.48 lb (0.21 kg) To install the module:
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2.5 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
Standard 4 in (101.6 mm) x 1.5 in (38 mm) deep square ground faults.
box with 2-gang cover
2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Synchronization: Meets UL1971 synchronization requirement.
diagram.
All signaling devices signal within 0.01 seconds of each
other for a period of at least two hours while maintaining a 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
one hertz signal rate. (For list of compatible devices, see provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
Compatible device table.) removable serial number label from the module and apply
Note: For synchronization, the maximum resistance between it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
any two devices is 20 Ω. See the voltage specifications for
4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw
the SIGA-CC1S, the signaling device, and the control
panel to determine the maximum allowable wire provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
resistance. 5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Number of devices
Note
Strobe candela rating Maximum strobes
Install in accordance with applicable requirements of the latest
15, 15PS, 5A 29 editions of the NFPA codes and standards, the Canadian
Electrical code (Part 1, Section 32), and the authority having
30, 15/75, 3A, 7A 16 jurisdiction.
60, 75PS, 6A 11 Wire stripping guide
75 10
110, 8A 8
1/4 in (~6 mm)

Installation instructions
Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
Note: The SIGA-CC1S is shipped from the factory as an connect to the terminal block of the module.
assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
should not be disassembled. Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.
Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module
Wiring diagram Notes
[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire. Maximum circuit
Personality code 5: typical speaker circuit capacitance of 0.1 µF
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for
[8] wiring specifications
[4] Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limited
source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the
power-limited mark and:

Personality code 6: typical telephone circuit • Maintain a 1/4 in (6.4 mm) space from power-
limited wiring. (For other mounting methods, see
enclosure and bracket installation sheets to
maintain separation of power-limited and
nonpower-limited wiring.)
[8]
or
• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in
accordance with the National Electric Code
(required for electrical box installations).
Personality codes 5 and 25: typical notification appliance circuit [5] Supervised and power-limited
+ + + + + + [6] Supervised
[9] [8] [7] Polarity shown in supervisory condition. Polarity
_ _ _ _ _ _ changes on alarm.
[8] UL/ULC listed 47 kΩ EOL
[9] Transient protection (see “Transient protection caution”
below)
[1] [2] [4] [6] [7]
_ Transient protection caution
+
The SIGA-CC1S requires transient protection for
installations that connect electromechanical bells or horns to
10 9 output circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bipolar
transient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection against
Auto-Sync Output Module transient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or
Red LED Green LED horns.
(active/short) (normal/trouble)
Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the
terminals of the bell or horn electrically closest to the
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 module. The bipolar transient protector is not polarity-
sensitive.
Locate bells and horns at least 6 ft (1.83 m) from the
[2] [4]
module.
[2] [3] [5]
Riser out (+) Data out (-)

Riser out (-) Data out (+) Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)

Riser in (+) Data in (-)

Riser in (-) Data in (+)

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0

SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 3/4
Compatibility
The SIGA-CC1S is compatible with Genesis, Enhanced Integrity (synchronized), and Enhanced Integrity Power Saver
(synchronized) models.

Compatible device table

Description Model number

Genesis strobes *G1-V15, *G1R-V15, *G1-V30, *G1R-V30, *G1-V60, *G1R-V60, *G1-V75, *G1R-V75,
*G1-V110, *G1R-V110
Genesis horn strobes, high output *G1-HOV15, *G1R-HOV15, *G1-HOV30, *G1R-HOV30, *G1-HOV60, *G1R-HOV60,
*G1-HOV75, *G1R-HOV75, *G1-HOV110, *G1R-HOV110
Genesis horn strobes, low output *G1-HV15, *G1R-HV15, *G1-HV30, *G1R-HV30, *G1-HV60, *G1R-HV60, *G1-HV75,
*G1R-HV75
Genesis wall speakers strobe *G4-S2VM, *G4R-S2VM, *G4-S7VM, *G4R-S7VM
Substitute XLS or ADT for *

Compatible device table

Description Model number
Integrity mini strobes, synchronized *202-15PS, *202-15PSW, *202-75PS, *202-75PSW, *202-3A-T, *202-3A-TW,
*202-5A-T, *202-5A-TW, *202-7A-T, *202-7A-TW, *202-8A-T, *202-8A-TW
Integrity strobes, four inch square box 405-15PS, 405-15PSW, *405-3A-T, *405-3A-TW, *405-5A-T, *405-5A-TW, 405-6A-T,
405-6A-TW, 405-75PS, 405-75PSW, *405-7A-T, *405-7A-TW, *405-8A-T,
*405-8A-TW, CS405-7A-T, CS405-8A-T
Integrity chime strobes *757-3A-CS, *757-3A-CSW, *757-5A-CS, *757-5A-CSW, *757-7A-CS, *757-7A-CSW,
*757-8A-CS, *757-8A-CSW
Integrity horn strobes, temporal 757-7A-T, 757-7A-TW, 757-8A-T, 757-8A-TW
Integrity speaker strobes *757-3A-SS25, *757-3A-SS25W, *757-3A-SS70, *757-3A-SS70W, *757-5A-SS25,
*757-5A-SS25W, *757-5A-SS70, *757-5A-SS70W, *757-7A-SS25, *757-7A-SS25W,
*757-7A-SS70, *757-7A-SS70W, *757-8A-SS25, *757-8A-SS25W, *757-8A-SS70,
*757-8A-SS70W
Integrity speaker strobes, re-entrant wall *757-3A-RS25, *757-3A-RS25W, *757-3A-RS70, *757-3A-RS70W, *757-7A-RS25,
mount *757-7A-RS25W, *757-7A-RS70, *757-7A-RS70W, *757-8A-RS25, *757-8A-RS25W,
*757-8A-RS70, *757-8A-RS70W
Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount *964-3A-4RR, *964-3A-4RW, *964-3A-8RW, 964-3A-8SW, *964-5A-4RR,
25V *964-5A-4RW, *964-5A-8RW, 964-5A-8SW, *964-7A-4RR, *964-7A-4RW,
*964-7A-8RW, 964-7A-8SW, *964-8A-4RR, *964-8A-4RW, *964-8A-8RW,
964-8A-8SW
Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount *965-3A-4RR, *965-3A-4RW, *965-3A-8RW, 965-3A-8SW, *965-5A-4RR,
70V *965-5A-4RW, *965-5A-8RW, 965-5A-8SW, *965-7A-4RR, *965-7A-4RW,
*965-7A-8RW, 965-7A-8SW, *965-8A-4RR, *965-8A-4RW, *965-8A-8RW,
965-8A-8SW
Bell strobes adapter plate *403-3A-R, *403-5A-R, *403-7A-R, *403-8A-R
Power-saver speaker strobes *757S2-15PS, *757S2-15PSW, *757S7-15PS, *757S7-15PSW, *757S2-75PS,
*757S2-75PSW, *757S7-75PS, *757S7-75PSW
Substitute XLS for *

P/N: 3100152 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-CC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module
 SIGA-CC2
Dual Input Signal Module

Product description Specifications

Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current 223 µA
Activated current: 100 µA
Output ratings
24 Vdc: 2 A
25 Vac audio: 50 W
70 Vac audio: 35 W
EOL resistor value: 47 kΩ
Max. circuit resistance: refer to manual
Max. circuit capacitance: 0.1 µF
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2.5 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
Standard 4 in (101.6 mm) x 1.5 in (38 mm) deep square box with
2-gang cover
The SIGA-CC2 Dual Input Signal Module is a component of the
Signature Series. The SIGA-CC2 is an analog addressable device
used to connect up to two supervised output circuits (riser 1 and riser Installation instructions
2). The SIGA-CC2 does not provide supervision of the riser; the fire
alarm panel must provide this function. Upon command from the loop Note: The SIGA-CC2 is shipped from the factory as an assembled
controller, the SIGA-CC2 connects the output circuit to either the riser unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be
1 or riser 2 bus, which can be 24 Vdc to operate polarized audible and disassembled.
visible signals or 25 V or 70 V to operate audio evacuation circuits. To install the module:
Two device addresses are required.
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CC2 automatically. 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground
A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptop faults.
computer. No addressing switches are used. 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the module 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided
when the cover plate is removed: and apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serial
• Normal: green LED flashes number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes location in the serial number logbook.

Mounting 4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw provided,

mount the wall plate to the module.
The SIGA-CC2 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm)
deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep 5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided,
with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG mount the module to the electrical box.
wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
System controller compatibility Wire stripping guide
The SIGA-CC2 requires the Signature loop controller. The loop
controller downloads the personality code which determines how the
module operates. The following personality codes can be downloaded
to the SIGA-CC2. 1/4 in (~6 mm)

Personality code 7: Riser selector (dual input): The SIGA-CC2 is

factory assigned personality code 7. Personality code 7 configures the Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that connect to the
SIGA-CC2 as a one or two output signal power (24 Vdc) or audio terminal block of the module.
evacuation (25 V or 70 V) riser selector. Each output circuit is
monitored for open or shorted wiring. f a short exists, the control panel Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing less
inhibits the activation of the audible or visible signal circuit, so the riser wire may result in a faulty connection.
is not connected to the wiring fault.

Warnings
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
2. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387040P REV: 7.0

SIGA-CC2 - Dual Input Signal Module 1/2
 Transient protection caution

Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)

The SIGA-CC1 requires transient protection for installations that

connect electromechanical bells or horns to output circuits. The
module's circuitry requires a Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)
for protection against transient spikes caused by the inductive load of
bells or horns.
Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminals
of the bell or horn electrically closest to the module. The bipolar
transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.
Locate bells and horns at least 6 ft (1.83 m) from the module.

Wiring diagram

Typical speaker circuit

Typical notification appliance circuit Install the Bi-Polar

Transient Protector here.
From UL/ULC listed control panel
(+)
Ch 2 (Input 2) Riser in [5]
(-)
(+)
Ch 2 (Input 2) Riser out
(-) Style Y (Class B) [1] [2] [5]

14 13 12 11 10 9

UL/ULC listed
47KΩ EOL
Red LED Green LED
(alarm/active) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (normal)
Ch 1 (Input 1) To next device or
(+) EOL resistor supplied
Riser out
Ch 1 (Input 1) (-) with UL/ULC listed
control panel
From UL/ULC listed [5] Riser in (+)
control panel (-)

From Signature controller (+) (+)

Data in (-) Data out To next device
or previous device (-)
[3] [4]

Notes [5] Supervised and power-limited when connected to power limited

source. If non-power limited, then all power limited wiring in box
[1] For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate technical must use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC.
reference manual Power limited marking must be eliminated.
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sq 6. This module does not support 2-wire smoke detectors
mm) wire
7. Polarity at terminals 9 and 10 on notification appliance, telephone,
[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiring and speaker circuits shown in supervisory condition. Connect as
specifications shown in diagram. Polarity reverses on alarm.
[4] Supervised and power-limited

P/N: 387040P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-CC2 - Dual Input Signal Module
 SIGA-CR
Control Relay Module

Product description 2. This module does not support conventional smoke

detectors.

Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
8 7 6 Standby current: 100 µA
Activated current: 100 µA
Contact ratings (pilot duty)
24 Vdc @ 2A
120 Vac @ 0.5 A
Relay type: Form C
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
4 3 2 1
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
The SIGA-CR Control Relay Module is a component of the 1-gang cover
Signature Series. The SIGA-CR is an addressable device used
to provide one Form C dry relay contact to control external Installation instructions
appliances (door closers, fans, dampers, etc.) or equipment
shutdown. The system firmware ensures that the relay is in the Note: The SIGA-CR is shipped from the factory as an
proper ON/OFF state. Upon command from the loop controller, assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
the SIGA-CR relay energizes. TB2-6 and TB2-7 provide a should not be disassembled.
normally closed relay connection; TB2-7 and TB2-8 provide a
To install the module:
normally open relay connection. One device address is
required. 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CR ground faults.
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. diagram.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
module when the cover plate is removed: provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
• Normal: green LED flashes removable serial number label from the module and apply
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

Mounting 4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw

provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
The SIGA-CR can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Notes
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
System controller compatibility electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
The SIGA-CR requires the Signature loop controller. 2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
Personality Code 8: dry contact output: The SIGA-CR is the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.
factory assigned personality code 8 which configures the 3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
SIGA-CR as an output dry relay contact. Code.

Warnings
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0

SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module 1/4
Wire stripping guide

Compatible electrical box

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module.
Wall plate, white
Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. (1-gang)
Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Wiring diagram

Normally Normally
Open Common Closed

[2] [5]

TB2
8 7 6

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller [1] [4] To next device

or previous device

Notes [4] All wiring is power-limited and supervised

[1] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for [5] Supervised and power limited when connected to power
wiring specifications limited source. If non-power limited, then all power limited
wiring in box must use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or
[2] The SIGA-CR must be installed within the same room as equivalent per NEC. Power limited marking must
the device it is controlling eliminated.
3. Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm) wire

P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module
 SIGA-CR
Module ‘Relais de commande

Description de produit 2. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée

conventionnels.
Caractéristiques
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
Courant de veille: 100 µA
Courant de fonctionnement actif: 100 µA
8 7 6 Ampèrage des contacts (fonction de commande)
24 V CC et 2A
120 V CA et 0,5 A
Type de relais: C
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR
Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts
4 3 2 1 Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de
profondeur
Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2
po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple

Le Module ‘Relais de commande SIGA-CR est un composant du

système série Signature. Le SIGA-CR est un dispositif adressable Installation
utilisé pour fournir un contact de relais sec C et commander des Note: Le SIGA-CR est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne
appareils externes (fermetures automatiques de portes, ventilateurs, contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être
registres, etc.) ou l’arrêt d’équipement. Le microprogiciel du système démonté.
assure que le relais rest en position marche/arrêt correct. À la
commande du contrôleur de boucle, le relais SIGA-CR est mis sous
tension. Les bornes TB2-6 et TB2-7 fournissent une connexion de Pour installer le module:
relais normalement fermée. Les bornes TB2-7 et TB2-8 fournissent
une connexion de relais normalement ouvert. Une adresse de 1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts
dispositif est nécessaire. de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.

Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse au 2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
SIGA-CR ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au module 3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et
via ordinateur portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé. coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette
Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du module de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le
lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée. registre des numéros de série.

• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote 4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 1/2 po. (13 mm) fournie,
• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote monter la plaque murale sur le module.
5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies,
Montage monter le module dans la boîte électrique.
Le SIGA-CR peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nord simple Notes
standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîte carrée
de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur avec 1. Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, le
couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, et de conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique que
0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de 0,75 par une débouchure seulement.
mm carrés sont préférables. 2. Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, le
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par une
débouchure ou par les deux.
Le SIGA-CR est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs de
boucle Signature. 3. Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National Electric
Code.
Code de personnalité 8: sortie de contact sec: Un code de
personalité de 8 est assigné au CR lors de sa fabrication et le
configure comme contact de relais sec de sortie.

Avertissements
1. Ce module ne fonctionne pas en l’absence de courant électrique.
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant,
nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local
de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0

SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module 3/4
Dénudage des fils

Boîte électrique compatible

~6 mm (1/4 po)

Dénuder l’extrémité de tous les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4

po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Attention: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquer Plaque murale, blanche
un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courte (simple standard)
peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

Schéma de câblage

Normalement Normalement
ouvert Commun fermé

[2] [5]

TB2
8 7 6

Témoin à
Témoin à DEL rouge DEL vert
(Alarme/Actif) 4 3 2 1 (Normal)

TB1

ENTRÉE DES (+) (+) SORTIE DES

DONNÉES (–) DONNÉES
(–)

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature [1] [4] Au dispositif suivant

ou du dispositif précédent

Notes [5] Supervisé et limité en courant lorsque raccordé à la source de

courant limité. Si non limité en courant, alors tous les câbles à
[1] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle courant limité à l'intérieur du boîtier doit être un câble de type
Signature pour obtenir les spécifications du câblage FPL, FPLR, FPLP ou équivalent tel que NEC. L'identification de
[2] Le SIGA-CR doit être installé dans la même pièce que le dispositif courant limité doit être éliminé.
qu’il contrôle
3. Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75
mm carrés (AWG 18)
[4] Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage

P/N: 387023P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-CR - Control Relay Module
 SIGA-CRR
Polarity Reversal Relay

Product description Specifications

Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 100 µA
Activated current: 100 µA
Contact ratings (pilot duty): 24 Vdc @ 2A
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
8 7 6 5 Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing
Wire gauge: 12 to18 AWG (2.5 to 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and
18 AWG are preferred.
Compatible bases: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
4 3 2 1 1-gang cover
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation instructions
The SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module is a To install the module:
component of the Signature Series. The SIGA-CRR is an
addressable device used to power and activate the audible 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
sounder in Signature Audible Detector Bases. The module can ground faults.
support a 2 A load of bases. The system firmware ensures that
the relay is in the proper state when powered up. On a 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
command from the loop controller, the SIGA-CRR relay diagram.
energizes, reversing the polarity of its 24 Vdc output. One 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
device address is required. provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
The SIGA-CRR requires the Signature loop controller. The removable serial number label from the module and apply
loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CRR it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the 4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
module when the cover plate is removed: provided, mount the module to the electrical box. See
• Normal: green LED flashes Figure 1.
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes 6. The module can be mounted in the fire alarm enclosure
using the SIGA-MP2 Mounting Plate. See Figure 2.
Programming Notes
Personality Code 8: Dry contact output: The SIGA-CRR is • The SIGA-CRR is shipped from the factory as an
assigned personality code 8 at the factory. This configures the assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
module as an output dry relay contact. should not be disassembled.
• If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
WARNING: This module will not operate without electrical electrical box through only one knockout hole.
power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we
suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire • If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
protection specialist. the electrical box through one or both knockout holes.
• Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0

SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay 1/4
 Wiring diagrams
Compatible electrical box All wiring is power-limited and supervised.
Schematic

Wall plate, white

Power in + + Power out
(1-gang) – –

8 7 6 5 Polarity reverses
when activated

4 3 2 1

+ –
Data in
– + Data out

Typical application
Figure 1: Mounting in compatible electrical box
The following wiring diagram shows a typical application. Here,
each detector operates its sounder base. The SIGA-CRR is
Enclosure wall used to activate all sounders, according to system
programming rules. The SIGA-CR is optional, and is used to
SIGA-MP2 mounting plate disable or disconnect the sounders.
Standoffs

Modules

Standoffs

Figure 2: Mounting in SIGA-MP2

First device SIGA-AB4G SIGA-AB4G Last device

IN/OUT

IN/OUT
DATA+

DATA+
SIG+

SIG+
SIG-

SIG-

24 Vdc
From listed – Listed EOL
power supply + relay and
supervising
8 7 6 8 7 6 5
module

SIGA-CR SIGA-CRR

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

Data in
From Signature +
controller –

2/4 13NOV03 P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0

 SIGA-CRR
Module 'Relais à inversion de polarité'

Description de produit Specifications

Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
Courant de veille: 100 µA
Courant de fonctionnement actif: 100 µA
Ampèrage des contacts (fonction de commande): 24 V CC et
2A
8 7 6 5
Température de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Humidité de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR
Épaisseur du fil: 2,5 à 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12 à 18). Des fils
de 1,0 et de 0,75 mm carrés sont préférables.
Bases compatibles: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2
4 3 2 1 po) de profondeur
Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38
mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux
impacts
Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)
Température de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Le module 'Relais à inversion de polarité'; modèle SIGA-CRR,
est un composant du système série Signature. Le SIGA-CRR
est un dispositif adressable utilisé pour alimenter en courant et Installation
activer les Bases Sonore de Détecteur de Signature. Le
module peut accommoder une charge de bases correspondant
à 2 ampères. Le microprogiciel du système assure que le Pour installer le module:
relais est dans l'état correct quand il est mis sous tension. À la
commande du con-trôleur de boucle, le relais SIGA-CRR est 1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni
mis sous tension, inver-sant la polarité de sa sortie 24 volts défauts de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise
CC. Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. à la terre.

Le SIGA-CRR est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs 2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de
de boucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle assigne câblage.
automatiquement une adresse au SIGA-CRR ou une adresse 3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie
particulière peut être assignée au module via ordinateur et coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module
portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé. l’étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit
Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
module lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée: 4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 5/16 po. (8 mm)
• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote fournie, monter la plaque murale sur le module.
• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote 5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm)
fournies, monter le module dans la boîte électrique.
Programmation 6. Le module peut être monté dans le boîtier de l'avertisseur
Code de personnalité 8: Sortie de contact sec: Un code de d'incendie en utilisant la plaque de montage SIGA-MP2.
personalité de 8 est assigné au SIGA-CRR lors de sa Notes
fabrication et le configure comme contact de relais sec de
sortie. • Le SIGA-CRR est expédié de l’usine complètement
monté; il ne contient aucune pièce dépannable par
l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être démonté.
AVERTISSEMENT: Ce module NE fonctionne PAS en
l'absence de courant électrique. Puisque les incendies • Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée,
provoquent souvent des interruptions de courant, nous le conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte
conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de électrique que par une débouchure seulement.
protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de
• Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
utilisée, le conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte
électrique par une débouchure ou par les deux.
• Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National
Electric Code.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0

SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay 3/4
 Schémas de câblage
L'ensemble du câblage est surveillé et à limitation de courant.
Boîte électrique compatible
Schéma

Tension + + Tension
Plaque murale, blanche d'entrée – – de sortie
(simple standard)

8 7 6 5 La polarité s'inverse
quand le relais est
activé

4 3 2 1

Entré des + – Sortie des

données – + données

Application typique
Figure 1: Montage en boîtes électrique compatible Le diagramme de câblage suivant montre une application typique. Ici,
chaque détecteur actionne sa base sonore. Le SIGA-CRR est employé
pour activer tous les sondeurs, selon des règles de programmation
Mur de fixation du boîtier système. Le SIGA-CR (en option) et est employé pour mettre hors
service ou débrancher tous les bases sonore.
Plaque de montage du SIGA-MP2
Intercalaires

Modules

Intercalaires

Figure 2: Montage en SIGA-MP2

Premier dispositif SIGA-AB4G SIGA-AB4G Dernier dispositif

IN/OUT

IN/OUT
DATA+

DATA+
SIG+

SIG+
SIG-

SIG-

Alimentation 24
volts CC – Relais fin de
répertoriée + ligne
répertoriée
et module
8 7 6 8 7 6 5 surveillé

SIGA-CR SIGA-CRR

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

Entré des
données du +
contrôleur –
Signature

P/N: 387336P REV: 3.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-CRR - Polarity Reversal Relay
 SIGA-CT1
Single Input Module

Product description Personality code 2: N.O. alarm delayed latching (Class B):
Personality code 2 operates the same as personality code 1
except that contact closure must be maintained for
approximately 16 seconds before an alarm signal is generated.
Personality code 2 is only for use with non-retarded waterflow
alarm switches.

8 7 Personality code 3: N.O. active non-latching (Class B): A

contact closure causes an active signal instead of an alarm
signal and does NOT latch at the module. Personality code 3 is
typically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc.
Personality code 4: N.O. active latching (Class B): A contact
closure causes an active instead of an alarm event, which is
latched at the module. Personality code 4 is typically used for
4 3 2 1 monitoring supervisory and tamper switches.

Warnings
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
The SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module is a component of the specialist.
Signature Series. The SIGA-CT1 is an analog addressable
device used to connect a Class B, normally open, alarm, 2. This module does not support conventional smoke
supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating device circuit detectors.
(IDC) to a Signature loop controller. One device address is
required. Specifications
The SIGA-CT1 can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitor Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
type applications. This is determined by a personality code that Standby current: 250 µA
is downloaded to the module by the loop controller during
Activated current: 400 µA
system configuration.
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT1 Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the Compatible electrical boxes
module when the cover plate is removed: North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
• Normal: green LED flashes Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes 1-gang cover
Initiating device circuit (IDC)
Mounting EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
The SIGA-CT1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Installation instructions
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
Note: The SIGA-CT1 is shipped from the factory as an
System controller compatibility assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
The SIGA-CT1 requires the Signature loop controller. The loop should not be disassembled.
controller downloads the personality code which determines To install the module:
how the module operates. The following personality codes can
be downloaded to the SIGA-CT1. 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
Personality code 1: N.O. alarm latching (Class B): Personality ground faults.
code 1 is assigned to input channels 1 and 2 at the factory. 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Personality code 1 configures the module for Class B normally diagram.
open dry contact initiating devices (e.g., pull stations, heat
detectors, etc.). When the N.O. input contact of an initiating 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
device is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the loop controller provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
and the alarm condition is latched at the module. removable serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0

SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module 1/4
4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws Compatible electrical box
provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Notes
1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes. Wall plate, white
(1-gang)
3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code.
Wire stripping guide

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Wiring diagram

Style B (Class B)
[1] [2] [4]
Typical N.O.
TB2
initiating device
8 7
UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller To next device

[3]
or previous device

Notes [4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA

[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire 5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG 6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors
(0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for
wiring specifications

P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module
 SIGA-CT1
Module à Une Seule Entrée

Description de produit maintenue pendant environ 16 secondes pour générer un état

d’alarme. Le code de personnalité 2 n’est utilisé qu’avec des
interrupteurs d’alarme de débit d’eau non retardés.
Code de personnalité 3: non verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B):
La fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un état
d’alarme et NE verrouille PAS au niveau du module. Le code de
personnalité 3 est habi-tuellement utilisé pour la surveillance des
8 7 ventilateurs, des registres, des portes, etc.
Code de personnalité 4: verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B): La
fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un état
d’alarme, verrouillé au niveau du module. Le code de personnalité 4
est habituellement utilisé dans la surveillance des contacts de
surveillance et des contacts de défaut.

4 3 2 1
Avertissements
1. Ce module ne fonctionne pas en l’absence de courant électrique.
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant,
nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local
de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Le Module à Une Seule Entrée SIGA-CT1 est un composant du Série
2. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée
Signature. Le SIGA-CT1 est un dispositif analogique adressable utilisé
conventionnels.
pour connecter un circuit de déclenchement (initiating device circuit, ou
IDC) à contact sec normalement ouvert de Classe B, de type alarme,
supervision, ou moniteur, à un contrôleur de boucle Signature. Une
adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Caractéristiques
Le SIGA-CT1 peut être utilisé pour des applications de type alarme, Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
supervision, ou moniteur comme déterminé par le code de Courant de veille: 250 µA
personnalité téléchargé dans le module par le contrôleur de boucle Courant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µA
pendant la configuration du système. Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR
Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse au Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
SIGA-CT1 ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au module Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts
via ordinateur portatif ; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé. Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)
Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du module Boîtes électriques compatibles
lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée: Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de
profondeur
• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2
• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple
Circuit de déclenchement (IDC)
Résistance FDL: 47 KΩ, répertoriée UL
Montage
Résistance de circuit maximum (par canal): 50 Ω (25 Ω par fil)
Le SIGA-CT1 peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nord Capacité de circuit maximum (par canal): 0,1 µF
simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîte
carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur
avec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, Installation
et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de
0,75 mm carrés sont préférables. Note: Le SIGA-CT1 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne
contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système démonté.
Le SIGA-CT1 est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs de
boucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle télécharge le code de Pour installer le module:
personnalité déterminant comment le module fonctionne. Les codes de
personnalité suivants peuvent être téléchargés dans le SIGA-CT1. 1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts
de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.
Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme N.O. (Classe B): Le
code de personnalité 1 est assigné aux canaux d’entrée 1 et 2 du 2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
module lors de sa fabrication. Le code de personnalité 1 configure le
module pour les dispositifs à contact sec normalement ouvert de 3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et
classe B (postes à manette, détecteurs de chaleur, etc.). Lorsque le coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette
contact d’entrée N.O. d’un dispositif de déclenchement se ferme, un de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le
signal d’alarme est envoyé au contrôleur de boucle et la condition registre des numéros de série.
d’alarme est verrouillée au niveau du module. 4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 1/2 po. (13 mm) fournie,
Code de personnalité 2: verrouillage d’alarme retardé N.O. (classe monter la plaque murale sur le module.
B): Le code de personnalité 2 fonctionne de la même façon que le
code de person-nalité 1, mais la fermeture du contact doit être

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0

SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module 3/4
5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies,
monter le module dans la boîte électrique.
Notes Boîte électrique compatible
1. Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, le
conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique que
par une débouchure seulement.
2. Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, le
conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par une
débouchure ou par les deux.
3. Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National Electric Plaque murale, blanche
Code. (simple standard)

Dénudage des fils

~6 mm (1/4 po)

Dénuder l’extrémité de tous les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4

po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Attention: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquer
un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courte
peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

Schéma de câblage

Style B (Classe B)
[1] [2] [4]

TB2 Dispositif de
8 7
déclenchement
N.O. typique FDL 47 KΩ,
répertoriée
UL/ULC
Témoin à DEL
rouge Témoin à DEL
(Alarme/Actif) 4 3 2 1
vert (Normal)

TB1

ENTRÉE DES (+) (+) SORTIE DES

DONNÉES DONNÉES
(–) (–)
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature
Au dispositif suivant
ou du dispositif précédent [3]

Notes [4] Maximum 10 Vcc à 350 µA

[1] Résistance maximum: 25 Ω par fil 5. Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage
[2] Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75 6. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée à deux fils
mm carrés (AWG 18)
[3] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
Signature pour obtenir les spécifications du câblage

P/N: 387021P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-CT1 - Single Input Module
 SIGA-CT1I
Single Input Module

Product description Personality code 18: 4-state N.O. alarm latching (Class B):
For Personality code 18, a contact closure causes an alarm
status and a short condition causes a trouble status.
Personality code 18 is typically used when a short condition
must be distinguished from an alarm condition.

8 7
Warnings
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
2. This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.
4 3 2 1

Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 250 µA
Activated current: 400 µA
The SIGA-CT1I Single Input Module is a component of the Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Signature Series. The SIGA-CT1I is an analog addressable Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
device used to connect a Class B, normally open, alarm, Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating device circuit Construction: High impact engineering polymer
(IDC) to a Signature loop controller. One device address is Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
required. Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
The SIGA-CT1I can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitor Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
type applications. This is determined by a personality code that 1-gang cover
is downloaded to the module by the loop controller during Initiating device circuit (IDC)
system configuration. EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT1I Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the Installation instructions
module when the cover plate is removed: Note: The SIGA-CT1I is shipped from the factory as an
• Normal: green LED flashes assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes should not be disassembled.

Mounting To install the module:

The SIGA-CT1I can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 ground faults.
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. diagram.

System controller compatibility 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
The SIGA-CT1I requires the Signature loop controller. The removable serial number label from the module and apply
loop controller downloads the personality code which it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
determines how the module operates. The following
personality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-CT1I. 4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
Personality code 3: N.O. active non-latching (Class B): A
contact closure causes an active signal instead of an alarm 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
signal and does NOT latch at the module. Personality code 3 is provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
typically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc. Notes
Personality code 4: N.O. active latching (Class B): A contact 1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
closure causes an active instead of an alarm event, which is electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
latched at the module. Personality code 4 is typically used for
monitoring supervisory and tamper switches.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1912 REV: 2.0

SIGA-CT1I - Single Input Module 1/2
2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter Wiring diagrams
the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.
Wire stripping guide

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Style B (Class B)
[1] [2] [4]
Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that Typical N.O.
TB2
connect to the terminal block of the module. initiating device
8 7

UL/ULC listed
Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. 47 kΩ EOL
Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.
Red LED Green LED
(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1
(normal)

TB1

Compatible electrical box (+) (+)

DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)
[3]
From Signature controller To next device
or previous device

Personality codes 3 and 4

Wall plate, white
(1-gang)

22 kΩ resistors

Style B (Class B)
[1] [2] [4]

TB2 Typical N.O.

initiating device
8 7

UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)

TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)
[3]
From Signature controller To next device
or previous device

Personality code 18

Notes
[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for
wiring specifications
[4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA
5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised
6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors

P/N: P-047550-1912 REV: 2.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-CT1I - Single Input Module
 SIGA-CT2
Dual Input Module

Product description Personality code 2: N.O. alarm delayed latching (Class B):
Personality code 2 operates the same as personality code 1
except that contact closure must be maintained for
approximately 16 seconds before an alarm signal is generated.
Personality code 2 is only for use with non-retarded waterflow
alarm switches.

8 7 6 5 Personality code 3: N.O. active non-latching (Class B): A

contact closure causes an active signal instead of an alarm
signal and does NOT latch at the module. Personality code 3 is
typically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc.
Personality code 4: N.O. active latching (Class B): A contact
closure causes an active instead of an alarm event, which is
latched at the module. Personality code 4 is typically used for
4 3 2 1 monitoring supervisory and tamper switches.

Warnings
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
The SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module is a component of the specialist.
Signature Series. The SIGA-CT2 is an analog addressable
device used to connect one or two Class B, normally open, 2. This module does not support conventional smoke
alarm, supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating device detectors.
circuits (IDCs) to a Signature loop controller. Two device
addresses are required. Specifications
The SIGA-CT2 can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitor Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
type applications. This is determined by a personality code that Standby current: 396 µA
is downloaded to the module by the loop controller during
Activated current: 680 µA
system configuration.
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT2 Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the Compatible electrical boxes
module when the cover plate is removed: North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
• Normal: green LED flashes Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes 1-gang cover
Initiating device circuit (IDC)
Mounting EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
The SIGA-CT2 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Installation instructions
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
Note: The SIGA-CT2 is shipped from the factory as an
System controller compatibility assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
The SIGA-CT2 requires the Signature loop controller. The loop should not be disassembled.
controller downloads the personality code which determines To install the module:
how the module operates. The following personality codes can
be downloaded to the SIGA-CT2. 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
Personality code 1: N.O. alarm latching (Class B): Personality ground faults.
code 1 is assigned to input channels 1 and 2 at the factory. 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Personality code 1 configures the module for Class B normally diagram.
open dry contact initiating devices (e.g., pull stations, heat
detectors, etc.). When the N.O. input contact of an initiating 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
device is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the loop controller provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
and the alarm condition is latched at the module. removable serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0

SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module 1/4
4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws Compatible electrical box
provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Notes
1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter Wall plate, white
the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes. (1-gang)
3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code.
Wire stripping guide

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Wiring diagram

INPUT 1 INPUT 2

Typical N.O.
TB2
initiating device
8 7 6 5
UL/ULC Listed Style B (Class B) UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL [1] [2] [4] 47 kΩ EOL

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller To next device

[3]
or previous device

Notes 5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised

[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire 6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for
wiring specifications
[4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA

P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module
 SIGA-CT2
Module à Double Entrée

Description de produit d’alarme. Le code de personnalité 2 n’est utilisé qu’avec des

interrupteurs d’alarme de débit d’eau non retardés.
Code de personnalité 3: non verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B):
La fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un état
d’alarme et NE verrouille PAS au niveau du module. Le code de
personnalité 3 est habi-tuellement utilisé pour la surveillance des
ventilateurs, des registres, des portes, etc.
8 7 6 5
Code de personnalité 4: verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B): La
fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un état
d’alarme, verrouillé au niveau du module. Le code de personnalité 4
est habituellement utilisé dans la surveillance des contacts de
surveillance et des contacts de défaut.

4 3 2 1
Avertissements
1. Ce module ne fonctionne pas en l’absence de courant électrique.
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant,
nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local
de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
2. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée
Le Module à Double Entrée SIGA-CT2 est un composant du Série
conventionnels.
Signature. Le SIGA-CT2 est un dispositif analogique adressable utilisé
pour connecter jusqu’à deux circuits de déclenchement (initiating
device circuit, ou IDC) à contact sec normalement ouvert de classe B,
de type alarme, supervision ou moniteur, à un contrôleur de boucle Caractéristiques
Signature. Deux adresses de dispositif sont nécessaires.
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
Le SIGA-CT2 peut être utilisé pour des applications de type alarme, Courant de veille: 396 µA
supervision, ou moniteur comme déterminé par le code de Courant de fonctionnement actif: 680 µA
personnalité téléchargé dans le module par le contrôleur de boucle Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
pendant la configuration du système. Le contrôleur de boucle assigne Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR
automatiquement deux adresses au SIGA-CT2, ou deux adresses Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
particulières peuvent être assignées au module via ordinateur portatif. Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts
Aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé. Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du module Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de
lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée: profondeur
• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2
• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple
Circuit de déclenchement (IDC)
Résistance FDL: 47 KΩ, répertoriée UL
Montage
Résistance de circuit maximum (par canal): 50 Ω (25 Ω par fil)
Le SIGA-CT2 peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nord Capacité de circuit maximum (par canal): 0,1 µF
simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîte
carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur
avec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, Installation
et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de
0,75 mm carrés sont préférables. Note: Le SIGA-CT2 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne
contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système démonté.
Le SIGA-CT2 est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs de
boucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle télécharge le code de Pour installer le module:
personnalité déterminant comment le module fonctionne. Les codes de
personnalité suivants peuvent être téléchargés dans le SIGA-CT2. 1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts
de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.
Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme N.O. (Classe B): Le
code de personnalité 1 est assigné aux canaux d’entrée 1 et 2 du 2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
module lors de sa fabrication. Le code de personnalité 1 configure le
3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et
module pour les dispositifs à contact sec normalement ouvert de
coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette
classe B (postes à manette, détecteurs de chaleur, etc.). Lorsque le
de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le
contact d’entrée N.O. d’un dispositif de déclenchement se ferme, un
registre des numéros de série.
signal d’alarme est envoyé au contrôleur de boucle et la condition
d’alarme est verrouillée au niveau du module. 4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 1/2 po. (13 mm) fournie,
monter la plaque murale sur le module.
Code de personnalité 2: verrouillage d’alarme retardé N.O. (classe
B): Le code de personnalité 2 fonctionne de la même façon que le 5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies,
code de person-nalité 1, mais la fermeture du contact doit être monter le module dans la boîte électrique.
maintenue pendant environ 16 secondes pour générer un état

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0

SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module 3/4
Notes
1. Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, le
conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique que Boîte électrique compatible
par une débouchure seulement.
2. Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, le
conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par une
débouchure ou par les deux.
3. Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National Electric
Code.
Dénudage des fils Plaque murale, blanche
(simple standard)

~6 mm (1/4 po)

Dénuder l’extrémité de tous les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4

po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Attention: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquer
un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courte
peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

Schéma de câblage

ENTRÉE 1 ENTRÉE 2

Dispositif de
TB2
déclenchement
8 7 6 5
N.O. typique
FDL 47 KΩ, Style B (Classe B) FDL 47 KΩ,
répertoriée [1] [2] [4] répertoriée
UL/ULC UL/ULC

Témoin à DEL Témoin à DEL

rouge 4 3 2 1
vert (Normal)
(Alarme/Actif)
TB1

ENTRÉE DES
(+) (+) SORTIE DES
DONNÉES (–) (–) DONNÉES

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature Au dispositif suivant

[3]
ou du dispositif précédent

Notes 5. Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage

[1] Résistance maximum: 25 Ω par fil 6. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée à deux fils
[2] Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75
mm carrés (AWG 18)
[3] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
Signature pour obtenir les spécifications du câblage
[4] Maximum 10 Vcc à 350 µA

P/N: 387037P REV: 8.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-CT2 - Dual Input Module
 SIGA-CT2I
Dual Input Module

Product description Personality code 18: 4-state N/O alarm latching (Class B):
For personality code 18, a contact closure causes an alarm
status and a short condition causes a trouble status.
Personality code 18 is typically used when a short condition
must be distinguished from an alarm condition.

8 7 6 5
Warnings
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
2. This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.
4 3 2 1

Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 396 µA
Activated current: 680 µA
The SIGA-CT2I Dual Input Module is a component of the Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Signature Series. The SIGA-CT2I is an analog addressable Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
device used to connect one or two Class B, normally open, Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
alarm, supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating device Construction: High impact engineering polymer
circuits (IDCs) to a Signature loop controller. Two device Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
addresses are required. Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
The SIGA-CT2I can be used for alarm, supervisory, or monitor Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
type applications. This is determined by a personality code that 1-gang cover
is downloaded to the module by the loop controller during Initiating device circuit (IDC)
system configuration. EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-CT2I Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the Installation instructions
module when the cover plate is removed: Note: The SIGA-CT2I is shipped from the factory as an
• Normal: green LED flashes assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes should not be disassembled.

Mounting To install the module:

The SIGA-CT2I can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 ground faults.
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. diagram.

System controller compatibility 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
The SIGA-CT2I requires the Signature loop controller. The removable serial number label from the module and apply
loop controller downloads the personality code which it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
determines how the module operates. The following
personality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-CT2I. 4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
Personality code 3: N.O. active non-latching (Class B): A
contact closure causes an active signal instead of an alarm 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
signal and does NOT latch at the module. Personality code 3 is provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
typically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc. Notes
Personality code 4: N.O. active latching (Class B): A contact 1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
closure causes an active instead of an alarm event, which is electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
latched at the module. Personality code 4 is typically used for
monitoring supervisory and tamper switches.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1913 REV: 2.0

SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module 1/3
2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.
3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Compatible electrical box
Code.
Wire stripping guide

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Wall plate, white
(1-gang)
Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Wiring diagrams

INPUT 1 INPUT 2

Typical N.O.
TB2
initiating device
8 7 6 5
UL/ULC Listed Style B (Class B) UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL [1] [2] [4] 47 kΩ EOL

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller To next device

[3]
or previous device

Personality codes 3 and 4

P/N: P-047550-1913 REV: 2.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/3 SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module
 INPUT 1 INPUT 2

22 kΩ 22 kΩ 22 kΩ 22 kΩ 22 kΩ 22 kΩ

Typical N.O.
TB2
initiating device
8 7 6 5
UL/ULC Listed Style B (Class B) UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL [1] [2] [4] 47 kΩ EOL

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller To next device

[3]
or previous device

Personality code 18

Notes
[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiring specifications
[4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA
5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised
6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1913 REV: 2.0

SIGA-CT2I - Dual Input Module 3/3
 SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF
Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange

Product description
Ceiling or wall
surface

Detector base

Detector

Detector Guard Mounting Flange (optional)

The SIGA-DG Detector Guard is a component of the Signature Detector guard

Series. The SIGA-DG is designed to prevent mechanical
damage to Signature Series smoke detectors. Use of the guard
does not affect detector performance and requires no detector Figure 1: Mounting the Detector Guard to a ceiling or wall
sensitivity increase. See the table below for a list of compatible surface
devices.
The optional SIGA-DGMF Mounting Flange is used to mount Mounting the Detector Guard to the
the detector guard to an electrical box or to a ceiling or wall
surface. The mounting flange must be ordered separately.
Mounting Flange
1. Fasten the detector base to the Mounting Flange using the
Compatible devices two 8-32 machine screws that are provided.

Detectors: GSA-PS, SIGA-IPHS, SIGA-IPHS-LG, SIGA-PS, 2. Install the Mounting Flange on an electrical box or directly
SIGA-PS-LG, XLS-IPHS, XLS-PS to the ceiling or wall surface using appropriately sized
screws (not provided).
Bases: GSA-IB, GSA-RB, GSA-SB, SIGA-IB, SIGA-RB,
SIGA-SB Note: The mounting holes in the Mounting Flange provide
clearance for up to a number 10 screw and are positioned
to fit a standard 4-inch square electrical box.
Specifications
3. Route the wiring through the hole in the detector base.
Construction: 16 gauge steel
4. Wire the detector base in accordance with the instructions
Finished dimensions
provided with the detector base, then connect the detector
Detector guard: 6.50 inch diameter x 3.25 inch height
to the detector base.
(16.5 cm x 8.26 cm)
Mounting flange: 7.57 inch diameter x 1.56 inch height 5. Mount the Detector Guard over the detector and to the
(19.2 cm x 3.96 cm) Mounting Flange using the four 10-32 tamper-proof
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm) screws that are provided.
Spacing: Listed detector spacing is not affected by the guard
Finish: White enamel
Mount to electrical box or
Mounting the Detector Guard to a ceiling or directly to a ceiling or wall surface
wall surface
1. Fasten the detector base to an electrical box in the ceiling
Mounting flange
or wall surface using appropriately sized screws (not
provided).
Detector base
2. Route the wiring through the hole in the detector base.
3. Wire the detector base in accordance with the instructions
provided with the detector base, then connect the detector Detector
to the detector base.
4. Mount the Detector Guard over the detector and directly to
the ceiling or wall surface using appropriately sized screws
(not provided) for your application and surface type.
Detector guard
Note: The mounting holes in the detector guard provide
clearance for up to a number 10 screw.
Figure 2: Mounting the Detector Guard to the mounting flange

Installation Sheet 14APR04 P/N: 387317P REV: 3.0

SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF - Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange 1/2
 Detector guard
mounting holes

Detector base
mounting holes

Electrical box or
ceiling or wall surface
mounting holes

Figure 3: Mounting Flange hole descriptions

P/N: 387317P REV: 3.0 14APR04 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-DG and SIGA-DGMF - Detector Guard with Optional Mounting Flange
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The model SIGA-DG Detector Guard is designed to prevent Construction 16 gauge steel
mechanical damage to surface mounted Signature Series
smoke detectors when used with the SIGA-DGS surface Dimensions
adapter. Use of the guard does not affect detector Surface Adapter 8.875" diameter x 2.25" height
performance, and requires no detector sensitivity increase. (22.54cm x 5.71cm)

The guard is finished in white enamel, and secured with Adapter & Guard 8.875" diameter x 5.5" height
tamper-proof fasteners. (22.54cm x 13.97cm)
Compatible Devices
Detectors SIGA-IPHS XLS-IPHS
SIGA-PS XLS-PS GSA-PS

INSTALLATION Bases SIGA-IB GSA-IB

SIGA-RB GSA-RB
1. Install the SIGA-DGS surface adapter (A) over the SIGA-SB GSA-SB
electrical box/conduit using appropriate fasteners.
Mounting holes provide clearance for a #10 screw. Spacing Listed detector spacing is not
2. Fasten the detector base (C) to the SIGA-DG affected by the guard
mounting flange (B) using the two #8-32 machine
screws provided. Finish White enamel
3. Install the mounting flange and detector base (B & C)
on surface adapter, using four #8 bolts provided.
Route the base wiring through the hole in the base.
4. Wire the base in accordance with the instructions
provided with the base, then install the detector (D).
5. Secure the guard cage (E) to the mounting flange
using the four tamper-proof bolts provided, and
tighten securely.

INSTALLATION SHEET: SIGA-DGS Surface Adapter

for use with the
SIGA-DG Detector Guard
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387318P FILE NAME: 387318(R1.0).CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: RR
2
DATE: 04/11/97 CREATED BY: R W
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS, CORP.
SARASOTA, FL. 941-739-4300 Fax: 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The SIGA-DGSA Surface Adapter is used to mount the Construction: 16 gauge steel
SIGA-DG Detector Guard to a surface mount electrical
Dimensions
box. The detector guard is designed to prevent
mechanical damage to surface mounted Signature Surface adapter: 8.875 in diameter x 2.25 in height
Series smoke detectors. Use of the guard does not (22.54 cm x 5.71 cm)
affect detector performance, and requires no detector
Adapter and guard: 8.875 in diameter x 5.5 in
sensitivity increase.
height (22.54 cm x 13.97 cm)
The guard is finished in white enamel, and secured with
Compatible devices
tamper-proof fasteners.
Detectors: GSA-PS, SIGA-IPHS, SIGA-IPHS-LG,
SIGA-PS, SIGA-PS-LG, XLS-IPHS, XLS-PS
Bases: GSA-IB, GSA-RB, GSA-SB, SIGA-IB, SIGA-
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS RB, SIGA-SB
Spacing: Listed detector spacing is not affected by the
guard
Finish: White enamel

1. Install the SIGA-DGSA surface adapter (A) over the

electrical box/conduit using appropriate fasteners.
Mounting holes provide clearance for a #10 screw.
2. Fasten the detector base (C) to the SIGA-DG INSTALLATION SHEET
mounting flange (B) using the two #8-32 machine
screws provided.
3. Install the mounting flange and detector base (B
SIGA-DGSA Surface Adapter
(for use with the SIGA-DG Detector Guard)
and C) on surface adapter, using four #8 bolts
provided. Route the base wiring through the hole in
the base.
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 3100084 FILE NAME: 3100084.CDR
4. Wire the base in accordance with the instructions REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
provided with the base, then install the detector (D). DATE: 05APR00 CREATED BY: B. Graham
5. Secure the guard cage (E) to the mounting flange EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
using the four tamper-proof bolts provided, and SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
tighten securely. CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

L’adaptateur de surface SIGA-DGSA est utilisé pour monter le Construction: Acier de calibre nº 16
dis-positif de protection de détecteur SIGA-DG à une boîte
Dimensions
électrique de montage en saillie. Le dispositif de protection de
détecteur est conçue pour empêcher des dommages Adaptateur de surface: Diamètre de 22,54 cm x hauteur
mécaniques aux détecteurs de fumée de la série Signature de 5,71 cm (8,875 po x 2,25 po)
montés en saillie. L’utilisation du dispositif de protection
Adaptateur et dispositif de protection: Diamètre de 22,54
n’affecte pas les performances du détecteur et n’exige pas
cm x hauteur de 13,97 cm (8,875 po x 5,5 po)
d’augmenter la sensibilité du détecteur.
Dispositifs compatibles
Le dispositif de protection est fini en émail blanc, et fixé avec
des attaches de sécurité. Détecteurs: GSA-PS, SIGA-IPHS, SIGA-IPHS-LG, SIGA-
PS, SIGA-PS-LG, XLS-IPHS, XLS-PS
Bases: GSA-IB, GSA-RB, GSA-SB, SIGA-IB, SIGA-RB,
SIGA-SB
INSTALLATION Espacement: L’espacement du détecteur listé n’est pas
affecté par le dispositif de protection
Fini: Émail blanc

1. Installer l’adaptateur de surface (A) du SIGA-DGSA par

dessus la boîte électrique / le conduit en utilisant les
attaches qui con-viennent. Les trous de montage laissent
un dégagement pour une vis nº 10.
2. Fixer la base du détecteur (C) à la bride de montage (B) FICHE D’INSTALLATION
du SIGA-DG en utilisant les deux vis mécaniques nº 8-32
fournies.
Adaptateur de surface SIGA-DGSA
3. Installer la bride de montage et la base du détecteur (B et à utiliser avec le Dispositif de protection SIGA-DG
C) sur l’adaptateur de surface, en utilisant quatre boulons
nº 8 fournis. Faire passer les fils de la base par le trou
dans la base.
FICHE RÉF: 3100084 FICHIER: 3100084.CDR
4. Câbler la base conformément aux instructions fournies
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
avec la base, puis installer le détecteur (D).
DATE: 05APR00 CRÉÉ PAR: B. Graham
5. Fixer la cage du dispositif de protection (E) à la bride de
mon-tage en utilisant les quatre boulons de sécurité EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
fournis, et serrer fermement. SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 SIGA-DGSB
Detector Guard Surface Box

Product description

Ceiling or wall
surface

Surface box

Detector base

The SIGA-DGSB Detector Guard Surface Box is a component Detector

of the Signature Series. The SIGA-DGSB is designed for use
with the SIGA-DG Detector Guard to prevent mechanical
damage to Signature Series smoke detectors. The SIGA-
DGSB mounts directly to a ceiling or wall surface and provides
a conduit knockout for surface mounted conduit. See the table Detector guard
below for a list of compatible devices.

Compatible devices Figure 1: Mounting the surface box and detector guard

Detectors: GSA-PS, SIGA-IPHS, SIGA-IPHS-LG, SIGA-PS,

SIGA-PS-LG, XLS-IPHS, XLS-PS Detector guard
Bases: GSA-IB, GSA-RB, GSA-SB, SIGA-IB, SIGA-RB, mounting holes
SIGA-SB

Specifications
Construction: 16 gauge steel
Finished dimensions: 7.57 inch diameter x 1.56 inch height
(19.2 cm x 3.96 cm) Detector base
Spacing: Listed detector spacing is not affected by the guard mounting holes
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm)
Finish: White enamel

Installation instructions
1. Mount the detector base to the surface box using the two
8-32 machine screws provided.
2. Route the wiring through the hole in the detector base. Ceiling or wall
mounting holes
3. Install the surface box on the wall or ceiling surface using
appropriately sized screws (not provided).
Figure 2: Surface box hole descriptions
Note: The mounting holes on the surface box provide
clearance for up to a number 10 screw.
4. Wire the detector base in accordance with the instructions
provided with the detector base, then connect the detector
to the detector base.
5. Mount the detector guard over the detector and to the
surface box using the four 10-32 tamper-proof screws that
are provided.

Installation Sheet 14APR04 P/N: 3100744 REV: 1.0

SIGA-DGSB - Detector Guard Surface Box 1/1
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION Compatible Bases SIGA-SB
The Signature Series duct detector housing assembly, Model SIGA- SIGA-RB
DH, is designed for mounting in an air duct to detect the presence of SIGA-IB
smoke in the airstream of duct work sections of the HVAC air handling
systems typically used in commercial buildings. The duct detector is not Compatible Detectors SIGA-PS
intended to be a substitute for an open area smoke detector. SIGA-PHS
SIGA-IPHS
Compatible Remote Annunciator SIGA-LED
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Operating Humidity Range 0 - 93% RH
The duct detector housing assembly should be installed in accordance Air Velocity Range
with NFPA 72 and the authorities having jurisdiction. The preferred
SIGA-PHS, -PS 300 - 4,000 ft/min.
location of the housing is in a length of straight duct at least six duct widths
from any bends or other obstructions as shown (1.524 - 20.312 m/s)
SIGA-IPHS, -IPHSB 300 - 1,000 ft/min.
(1.524 - 5.08 m/s)
Construction Steel, High-Gloss Red
Shipping Weight 5.38 lbs. (2.4 kg)
Air Sampling Tubes
Cat. No. Length
6261-001 8" (0.2 m)
6261-002 2' (0.6 m)
6261-003 3'-6" (1.0 m)
1) Select the location for the duct housing and apply the adhesive 6261-006 6'-6" (1.9 m)
backed drill template on the duct. Drill out the 4 mounting holes and 6261-010 10' (3.0 m)
the (2) 1 5/8" (41 mm) diameter holes for the air sampling and
exhaust tubes. If the air stream is in the opposite direction to that
shown, invert the duct housing.
2) Insert the appropriate air sampling tube (not supplied) in the 1 5/8"
WARNINGS
(41 mm) diameter hole. Orient the tube so that the air flows into the
inlet holes along the side of the tube. If the air sampling tube is 1) For proper operation, ONLY the specified detectors should be
longer than the duct, either cut the end of the tube to fit inside the used with this mounting plate. A detector that is not rated for the air
duct or drill a clearance hole in the opposite duct wall and allow the velocities produced in air ducts will NOT operate properly and may
tube to protrude outside the duct. Insert the rubber stopper result in loss of life.
(supplied) into the far end of the sampling tube.
3) Insert the exhaust tube into the red connector on the housing
oriented with the slanted edge facing downstream. Tighten the
screw on the connector.
4) Bring the duct housing up to the air sampling tube, keeping the
sampling holes oriented directly into the air flow. Insert the end of
the tube into the connector on the housing and tighten the screw on
the connector.
5) Secure the housing to the duct using the four #8 screws provided.
If sampling tube is wider than the duct, seal all potential air leaks on
opposite side of duct from around air sampling tube, including
exposed inlet holes, with duct seal.
6) Remove knockouts from duct detector housing as required. Install
conduit and bring the field wiring into the housing. Leave at least
12" (305 mm) of slack field wiring extending from the conduit for
making the wiring connections.
7) Connect the green ground wire provided on the detector housing to
an appropriate ground. Wire the detector base in accordance with
the instructions supplied with the base. Secure the base to the
adapter plate using two #8-32 screws (supplied).
INSTALLATION SHEET:
8) Mate the detector to the base by rotating the detector on the base
until it stops.
9) Insert the detector assembly into the smoke chamber in the duct SIGA-DH
housing, aligning the locating pin on the smoke chamber with the
hole in the adapter plate. Secure the plate to the smoke chamber Duct Detector Housing Assembly
using two #8-32 x 3/8" (0.95 mm) screws (supplied).
10) Measure air velocity using the Cat. No. 6263-SG Air Velocity Test
Kit.
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-847550-1723 FILE NAME: P-847550-1723.CDR
NOTE
11) Rectangular knockouts are provided on the top, bottom, right, and
front cover of the duct housing for mounting optional modules. The REVISION LEVEL: 3.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
modules are mounted on 1-gang stainless steel plates that fasten DATE: 31AUG00 CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan
to the duct housing. For more information, refer to the Installation
Instructions provided with each module. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
12) For testing information, refer to the applicable duct detector SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
installation instructions. OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 FIGURE 1: SIGA-DH
Front Cover

Adapter Plate

Base

Detector

Locating Pin
Do Not Bend! Smoke
Chamber

Neoprene
Gasket
Attached
Air Sampling
To Housing
Tube
Connector
Red Exhaust
Tube
Connector

Air Inlet Sampling

Tube (Orient With Exhaust Tube
Air Holes Facing (supplied)
Airflow) Orient With
Slant Directed
Away From
Airflow

Rubber Stopper
Must Be Installed
Into End Of
Sampling Tube

AIR DUCT AIRFLOW

P/N: P-847550-1723 REV: 3.0 Page 2 of 4

 PRODUCINFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUITT INFORMATION CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
DESCRIPTION Bases compatibles SIGA-SB
Le boîtier de détecteur sur conduit, modèle SIGA-DH, est conçu pour être SIGA-RB
installé dans un conduit d’air de façon à détecter la présence de fumée dans SIGA-IB
le courant d’air des sections du réseau de conduits des systèmes de Détecteurs compatibles SIGA-PS
climatisation dans les bâtiments commerciaux. Le détecteur sur conduit SIGA-PHS
SIGA-IPHS
Indicateur à distance compatible SIGA-LED
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 - 93 % HR
MODE D’INSTALLATION Gamme de vitesses d’air
Le boîtier de détecteur pour conduit doit être installé conformément à la SIGA-PHS, -PS 1,524 - 20,312 m/s
norme NFPA 72 et aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Le boîtier doit (300 - 4 000 pi/min)
être installé de préférence dans une section rectiligne de conduit, à une SIGA-IPHS, -IPHSB 1,524 - 5,08 m/s
distance égale à au moins six fois la largeur du conduit, à partir de tout coude (300 - 1 000 pi/min)
Construction Acier, rouge brillant
Poids à la livraison 2,4 kg (5,38 livres)
Coude ou autre Tubes d’échantillonnage d’air
obstruction
N° de cat. Longueur
6261-001 0,2 m (8 po)
6261-002 0,6 m (2 pi)
Largeur du conduit 6261-003 1,0 m (3 pi 6 po)
6261-006 1,9 m (6 pi 6 po)
6 fois (minimum) Emplacement du
la largeur du conduit détecteur pour conduit
1) Appliquer le gabarit autocollant à l’endroit choisi sur le conduit. Percer
les 4 trous de montage et les deux trous de 1-5/8 po (41 mm) pour les
tubes d’échantillonage et d’échappement. Si l’air s écoule dans le sens AVERTISSEMENTS
opposé à celui indiqué sur le schéma, inverser l’orientation du boîtier.
Remarque : La figure 1 illustre les étapes décrites dans cette marche à
suivre.
1) Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, N’utiliser QUE les détecteurs
spécifiés avec cette plaque de montage. Un détecteur qui n’est pas
2) Insérer le tube d’échantillonnage approprié (à commander homo-logué pour les vitesses d’écoulement d’air produites dans les
séparément) dans le trou de 1-5/8 po (41 mm) de diamètre. Le tube doit conduits d’air NE fonctionnera PAS correctement ce qui pourrait
être orienté de façon à ce que l’air entre par les orifices
d’échantillonnage percés le long du tube. Si le tube est plus long que le
conduit, le couper de façon à ce qu il entre dans le conduit ou percer un
trou de dégagement dans la paroi opposée du conduit et laisser le tube
dépasser du conduit. Utiliser le bouchon de caoutchouc pour obturer
l’extrémité du tube.
3) Insérer le tube d’échappement dans le raccord rouge en l’orientant de
façon à ce que sa face biseautée soit tournée du côté aval du courant
d’air. Serrer la vis du raccord.
4) Placer le boîtier de façon à ce que le raccord pour le tube
d’échantillonnage vienne à hauteur de celui-ci, tout en maintenant les
orifices de prélèvement d’air fac au courant d’air. Insérer l’extrémité du
tube dans le raccord situé sur le boîtier, puis serrer la vis du raccord.
5) Fixer le boîtier sur le conduit au moyen des quatre vis n° 8 fournies à
cette fin. Si le tube d’échantillonnage est plus long que la largeur du
conduit, enduire de produit d’étanchéité pour conduit le pourtout de
l’orifice où le tube traverse la paroi opposée du conduit, de façon à
obturer toutes les fuites possibles, y compris les orifices
d’échantillonnage qui sont exposés.
6) Retirer les débouchures appropriées du boîtier et y insérer le conduit
électrique pour faire passer le câblage externe à l’intérirur du boîtier.
Laisser dépasser au moins 12 po (305 mm) de fil au bout du conduit
pour les raccordements.
7) Raccorder le fil vert de mise à la terre du boîtier de détecteur à une prise
de terre adéquate. Brancher le câblage de la base du détecteur
conformément aux instructions fournies avec cette base. Fixer la base
sur la plaque adaptatrice au moyen de deux vis n° 8-32 fournies. FICHE D’INSTALLATION :
8) Accoupler le détecteur à la base en faisant tourner le détecteur sur la
base jusqu’à ce qu’il s’arrête.
9) Insérer l’ensemble du détecteur dans la chambre de fumée du boîtier, SIGA-DH
en alignant le goujon d’assemblage de la chambre de fumée avec le
trou de la plaque adaptatrice. Fixer la plaque adaptatrice à la chambre Boîtier de détecteur sur conduit
de fumée en utilisant deux vis n° 8-32 x 3/8 po (0,95 mm) fournies.
10) Mesurer la vitesse d’écoulement de l’air à l’aide du Nécessaire de
mesure de vitesse de l’air (n° de catalogue 6263 - SG). FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-847550-1723 NOM DU FICHIER : P-847550-1723.CDR
11)
NOTE
Le boîtier comporte sur le dessus, le dessous, le côté droit et à l’avant NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 3.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
des débouchures rectangulaires pour l’installation de modules
optionnels. Ces modules sont montés sur des plaques simples en acier DATE: 31AUG00 CRÉÉ PAR : C. Hanrahan
permettant de les fixer sur le boîtier pour conduit. Pour plus de détails,
se référer aux instructions d’installation de chacun de ces modules. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
12) Pour l’essai des détecteurs, consulter la notice d’installation fournie CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
avec le détecteur utilisé. OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553

P/N: P-847550-1723 REV: 3.0 Page 3 of 4

 FIGURE 1: SIGA-DH
FIGURE 1 : SIGA-DH
Couvercle avant

Plaque adaptatrice

Base

Détecteur

Goujon d’assemblage Chambre

Ne pas le tordre ! de fumée

Joint de néoprène
fixé au boîtier
Raccord pour tube
d’échantillonnage de l’air

Raccord rouge pour

tube d’échappement

Tube d’échantillonnage
(Orienter les trous de Tube d’échappement (fourni)
prélèvement de l’air Orienter la face biseautée
face au courant d’air) du tube du côté aval du
courant d’air

Bouchon de caoutchouc
Doit être inséré au bout
du tube d’échantillonnage

BOÎTIER D’AIR COURANT D’AIR

P/N: P-847550-1723 REV: 3.0 Page 4 of 4

 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PRODUCT INFORMATION
The Duct Detector Mounting Plate, Model DMP, is a component of the
1) Refer to Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines. Signature Series used to mount a smoke detector inside an air duct. The DMP
2) Using the template provided on the reverse side of this sheet, drill eight provides screws for mounting the detector base and includes a rubber gasket
(8) 1/16 in (0.158 cm) holes and cut out the 4 3/4 in (12.065 cm) circle. which forms an airtight seal between the mounting plate and the duct.
3) Make sure the holes in the duct correctly align with the holes in the DMP. Refer to the Installation Sheets provided with the detector, base, Remote LED
Alarm Indicator (LED), and/or control relay module for specific wiring
4) Remove the appropriate conduit knockout on the DMP. instructions.
5) Mount the base to the DMP as shown and wire the base according to the
instructions provided with the base.
6) Choose installation option and mount in accordance with diagram. WARNINGS
7) Mount the DMP to the duct using eight #8-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping
screws (provided). 1) For proper operation, ONLY the specified detectors should be used with
this mounting plate. A detector that is not rated for the air velocities
produced in air ducts will NOT operate properly and may result in loss of
life.
INSTALLATION OPTIONS 2) The DMP is intended for use ONLY in the three configurations shown in
Installation Options. For other duct sizes, refer to the appropriate
Installation Options For all 3 options, manufacturer's documentation.
Remote LED Alarm Indicator (LED)
1 mounted directly to DMP ALARM
DMP may be 3) Do NOT mount the DMP on the bottom side of a duct. This position will
mounted on either result in excessive dirt buildup in the detector and affect proper operation.
side of duct.

2.8" (7.11 cm)

Up to 36 in Center Line SPECIFICATIONS
(91.44 cm) Side
Maximum Up to 36 in (91.44 cm) Maximum
Up to 72 in (182.88 cm) Maximum Electrical box (included): Standard 4 in (102 mm) square box 1 1/2 in (38 mm)
if 2 detectors are used deep w/1-gang cover
Compatible bases: SB, RB, IB
Bottom Compatible detectors: PS, PHS, IPHS
Compatible remote annunciator: LED
Control Relay Module
2
8 7 6

(CR) mounted directly Duct wall thickness: Up to 3/4 in (1.905 cm)

to DMP 4 3 2 1
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH

LED Air velocity range:

2.8 in (7.11 cm) ALARM
mounted PS, PHS 0 to 5,000 ft/min. (0 to 25.39 m/s)
Up to 36 in
Center Line at remote
(91.44 cm) IPHS 0 to 500 ft/min. (0 to 2.54 m/s)
location
Maximum
Up to 36 in (91.44 cm) Maximum Construction: Steel, high-gloss red
Shipping weight: 2.7 lbs (1.2 kg)

Blank Cover Plate

3 (standard electrical supply)
mounted to DMP PRODUCT DIAGRAM
LED
2.8 in (7.11 cm) ALARM
mounted
Up to 36 in
Center Line at remote
(91.44 cm)
location
Maximum
Up to 36 in (91.44 cm) Maximum

Option 1 OR
LED
Option 2 OR
Blank Cover Plate
and Control Relay
Module, CR
Option 3
Blank Cover Plate INSTALLATION SHEET

Duct Detector
Mounting Plate, SIGA-DMP
DMP
Duct Detector Mounting Plate

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387053P FILE NAME: 387053P.CDR

Compatible Base
REVISION LEVEL: 6.0 APPROVED BY: S. Jaskiel
DATE: 090200 CREATED BY: S. Hawes
RELATED DOCUMENTS: Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
Compatible Detector EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
DRILL TEMPLATE FOR DUCT DETECTOR MOUNTING PLATE, SIGA-DMP

4 3/4" (12.065 cm)

diameter hole

1/16" (0.158 cm) diameter hole (8 required)

 MODE D’INSTALLATION INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT
La plaque de montage de détecteur pour conduit modèle DMP est un composant
1) Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d’installation. du Série Signature et est utilisée pour monter un détecteur de fumée à l’intérieur
2) En utilisant le gabarit fourni au recto de cette fiche, percer huit (8) trous d’un conduit d’air. Elle comprend des vis de montage pour la base du détecteur et
de 0,158 cm (1/16 po) et découper le cercle de 12,065 cm (4-3/4 po). un joint de caoutchouc qui assure l’étanchéité entre la plaque de montage et le
conduit.
3) Vérifier que les trous de conduit sont bien dans l’alignement de ceux de la Se référer aux fiches d’installation fournies avec le détecteur, la base, le témoin à
plaque DMP. DEL à distance et/ou le module ‘relais de commande’ pour les instructions spéci-
4) Enlever la débouchure de conduit appropriée de la plaque DMP. fiques de câblage.
5) Monter la base sur la plaque DMP comme illustré sur le schéma ci-

6)
dessous et câbler la base selon la fiche d installation qui l’accompagne.
Choisir l’option d’installation et faire le montage suivant le schéma.
AVERTISSEMENTS
7) Fixer le DMP sur le conduit d’air au moyen de huit vis autotaraudeuses n° 1) Pour un fonctionnement correct, utiliser cette plaque de montage
8-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) (fournies). UNIQUE-MENT avec les détecteurs spécifiés. Un détecteur non classé
pour les vitesses d’air produites dans les conduits d’air NE
FONCTIONNERA PAS correctement et peut conduire à la perte de vies
OPTIONS D’INSTALLATION humaines.
2) Le DMP doit être utilisé UNIQUEMENT dans les trois configurations
Témoin à DEL à distance illustrées dans la section Options d’installation. Pour les autres tailles de
Pour les trois options,
1 (LED) monté directement sur DMP ALARM DMP peut être montée
conduit, se référer à la documentation du fabricant appropriée.
sur n’importe quelle 3) NE PAS monter la plaque DMP sur la paroi de fond d’un conduit. Cette
paroi du conduit position résulterait en un empoussièrage excessif du détecteur et
empêcherait son fonctionnement correct.
7,11 cm (2,8 po)

Maximum Ligne d’axe

SPÉCIFICATIONS
91,44 cm Côté
(36 po) Maximum 91,44 cm (36 po) Boîte électrique (comprise): Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm de côté et de
Maximum 182,88 cm (72 po) si 38,1 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur avec couvercle simple standard
Deux détecteurs sont utilisés Bases compatibles: SB,RB, IB
Détecteurs compatibles: PS, PHS, IPHS
Fond
Indicateur à distance compatible: LED
Module ‘relais de commande’
2 (CR) monté directement sur
8 7 6
Épaisseur des parois du conduit: Jusqu’à 1,905 cm (0,75 po)
DMP Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 - 93 % HR
4 3 2 1

Gamme de vitesses d’air:

LED monté
7,11 cm ALARM
à un endroit PS, PHS 0 à 25,39 m/s (0 à 5,000 pi/min)
Maximum (2,8 po) éloigné
91,44 cm Ligne d’axe IPHS 0 à 2,54 m/s (0 à 500 pi/min)
(36 po) Construction et fini: Acier, rouge brillant
Maximum 91,44 cm (36 po)
Poids à la livraison: 1,2 kg (2,7 livres)

Plaque de protection vierge

3 (alimentation électrique
standard) montée sur
DMP
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
LED monté
7,11 cm ALARM
à un endroit
Maximum (2,8 po)
éloigné
91,44 cm Ligne d’axe
(36 po) Maximum 91,44 cm (36 po)

LED Option 1 OU

Plaque de pro- Option 2 OU

tection vierge
et module ‘relais
de commande’,
CR
Option 3
Plaque de FICHE D’INSTALLATION
protection vierge
Plaque de montage
de détecteur pour
conduit, DMP
SIGA-DMP
Plaque de montage de détecteur pour conduit

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: 387053P FICHIER: 387053P.CDR

Base compatible
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 6.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: S. Jaskiel
DATE: 090200 CRÉÉ PAR: S. Hawes
DOCUMENTATION SUPPLÉMENTAIRE: Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
Détecteur compatible EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
GABARIT DE PERÇAGE DE LA PLAQUE DE DÉTECTEUR DE CONDUIT, SIGA-DMP

Trou de diamètre
12,065 cm (4-3/4 po)

Trou de diamètre 0,158 cm (1/16 po) (8 trous à percer)

 Product Information Installation Instructions Specifications
DESCRIPTION 1) The SIGA-DTS is shipped from the factory as an Operating Voltage Range 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
The Duct Detector Test Station, Model SIGA-DTS, is an analog assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts Standby Current 250mA
addressable component of the Signature Series System. One (1) and should NOT be disassembled.
device address is required. The SIGA-DTS is a normally-open Activated Current 400mA
dry contact signal initiating device that requires only one action by 2) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and Operating Temperature Range +32 to +100°F (0 to +38°C)
the user in order to initiate an alarm. The single input module ground faults.
supervises the keyswitch and sends an alarm signal to the loop Operating Humidity Range 0 - 93% RH
controller when the switch is turned to the test position. When the 3) Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring Storage Temperature Range -4 to +140°F (-20 to +60°C)
system associated with the loop controller receives the alarm diagram. Compatible Electrical Boxes
signal, the action associated with the SIGA-DTS and the duct North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) Deep 2-Gang Box
mounted smoke detector is performed. (All outputs to be 4) Write the address assigned to the module on the label Standard 4" Square Box 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Box
activated or functions to be performed by the system are carried provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the European 100 mm Square Box
out.) removable serial number label from the module and apply Construction High Impact
it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number Engineering Polymer
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-DTS Logbook.
automatically, or a custom address can be assigned to the station
via laptop computer; no addressing switches are used. Refer to 5) Using the four 6-32 x 3/8" (9.5 mm) machine screws
Signature Series IOMC Manual (P/N 270144) for details on provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
automatic and custom addressing.
6) Using the four 4-24 x 5/16" (7.9 mm) self-tapping screws
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
station, when the unit is removed from the electrical box.
NOTE:

Status LED Indicator 1) Wire in accordance with NFPA70-1996, National

Green LED flashes. Electrical Code Article 760, Section 760-54(a)(1),
Normal Exception No. 2 and 3.
Alarm/Active Red LED flashes.

2
The terminal block will accept #14, 16 or 18 AWG wire (1.5 mm ,
2 2
1.0 mm , 0.75 mm ). Sizes #16 and #18 are preferred. Notes
SYSTEM CONTROLLER COMPATIBILITY 1 Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for
The SIGA-DTS requires the Signature Loop Controller. wiring specifications.
PERSONALITY CODE 1: N/O ALARM LATCHING (CLASS B) 2 All wiring power-limited and supervised.
The SIGA-DTS is factory assigned personality code 1 which
configures the SIGA-DTS for Class B operation. When the
keyswitch is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the Loop
Controller and the alarm condition is latched at the SIGA-DTS.
Wire Stripping Guide
Strip 1/4" from the ends of ALL wires that connect to the
terminal block of the module.

WARNINGS
CAUTION:
Exposing more than 1/4" of wire may cause a ground fault.
1) This test station will NOT operate without electrical power. Exposing less than 1/4" of wire may result in a faulty connection.
As fires frequently cause power interruption, discuss further
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

SIGA-DTS
Table A - Technical Documentation DUCT DETECTOR TEST STATION
P/N Title
PART NO.: P-847550-1739 ISSUE: 2
270144 Signature Series Technical Reference Manual
270186 Installation & Preventive Maintenance Guide EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
SARASOTA , FL 800-655-4497 Fax. 941-753-1806
270188 System Operations Guide CHESHIRE, CT 203-699-3000 Fax. 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax. 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-678-6767 Fax. 905-678-9791
 SIGA-HFS
Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector

Product description Warnings

1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
Tamper-reist lever arm
Break off to disable 2. This detector will not sense fires that start in areas where heat
(located on base) cannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the
opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3. This detector is intended for use with ionization and/or
Access slot for tamper- photoelectric smoke detectors. The heat detector by itself does not
resist mechanism provide life safety protection.
4. This detector will not detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, or
flames. This device should only be used as part of a broad based
life safety program which includes a variety of information sources
pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishment systems,
Description: The Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector (SIGA- visual and audible devices, and other safety measures.
HFS) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog
device contains a fixed-temperature heat sensor to detect heat from 5. Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be
fire. The heat sensor monitors the temperature of the air in its used when property protection alone is involved. Under no
surroundings and the detector analyzes the data and determines circumstances should heat detectors be relied on as the sole
whether an alarm should be initiated. A heat detector by itself, means of fire protection.
however, does not provide life safety protection. For life safety 6. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
situations, a heat detector should be used in conjunction with ionization accordance with the requirements of the authority having
or photoelectric smoke detectors or a combination thereof. jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC
LEDs: The SIGA-HFS has two LEDs to indicate detector status: Standard CAN 536.

• Normal: Green LED flashes See Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for cleaning instructions.
• Alarm: Red LED flashes 7. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on
• Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. 8. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
Stand-alone operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
detector alarms when heat levels exceed a preset value. See the temperature before applying power.
applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capabilities.
Installation instructions
Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-HFS contains a microprocessor capable
of performing comprehensive self-diagnostic tests and storing results. 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot and
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity rotate the detector counterclockwise to remove it. Note: You can
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and
memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired. removing the plastic lever arm from the base.

Specifications 2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.

Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc 3. Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet
Normal operating current: 45 µA supplied with the base.
Alarm current: 45 µA 4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
Standalone alarm current: 18 mA apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
ULI fixed-temp alarm rating: 135 °F (57 °C)
ULC fixed-temp alarm rating: 140 °F (60 °C) 5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise
Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C) until it snaps into the locked position.
Operating environment
6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed
Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C)
upon completion of the original installation and following any
Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing
modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can
Compatible bases
perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of
Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm
Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
Maximum spacing: 70 ft (21.3 m) centers
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white 8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g) notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C) undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387017P REV: 8.0

SIGA-HFS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector 1/2
 SIGA-HFS
Détecteur de chaleur intelligent à température fixe

Informations sur le produit Avertissements

1. Ce dispositif ne fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons
aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les
incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Levier de verrouillage 2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un
- Casser pour mettre hors endroit où la chaleur ne peut pas l'atteindre. La chaleur dégagée par un feu
service - (situé sur la base) à l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne
pas atteindre le détecteur.
3. Ce détecteur est prévu pour être utilisé avec des détecteurs de fumée à
Fente d'accès du ionisation ou photoélectriques. Le détecteur thermique n’assure pas à lui
mécanisme de verrouillage
seul la protection des vies humaines.
4. Ce détecteur ne détectera pas la teneur en oxygène, la fumée, les gaz
toxiques ou les flammes. Il ne devrait être utilisé que comme élément d’un
programme de protection plus étendu comprenant une variété de sources
d’informations sur la quantité de chaleur et de fumée, des systèmes
d’extinction, des dispositifs sonores et visuels ainsi que d’autres moyens de
Description: Le détecteur de chaleur intelligent à température fixe (SIGA-HFS) protection.
est l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent
comprend un capteur thermique à température fixe pour la détection de la 5. D’après des études indépendantes, les détecteurs thermiques ne devraient
chaleur générée par un incendie. Le capteur thermique surveille la température être utilisés que pour la protection des biens. On ne devrait, en aucun cas,
de l’air environnant et le détecteur analyze les données et détermine ainsi si une utiliser des détecteurs thermiques comme seul moyen de protection.
alarme doit être déclenchée. Un détecteur de chaleur seul, cependant, ne fournit
pas une protection des vies humaines. Pour assurer une telle protection, un 6. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon
détecteur de chaleur doit être utilisé en conjonction avec des capteurs de fumée fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié conformément
à ionisation ou photoélectrique ou combinant ces deux technologies. aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72
et CAN/ULC 536.
Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-HFS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état
du détecteur: Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage,
se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.
• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote
• Alarme: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote 7. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit
• Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service
du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est PAS suffisant pour protéger le détecteur
Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.
des adresses aux détecteurs, ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées
aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est 8. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit
utilisé. dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser
le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.
Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le
contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de
chaleur dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau Modes d’installation
de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement
1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente
autonome.
d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le
Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-HFS contient un microprocesseur capable sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de
d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser verrouillage peut être mis définitivement hors service en cassant et en
les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.
la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et
2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d'installation.
des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces
statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment. 3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui
l'accompagne.
Caractéristiques techniques 4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller
à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc
Courant de veille: 45 µA 5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des
Courant d'alarme: 45 µA aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.
Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA
Seuil de température fixe ULI: 57 ºC (135 ºF) 6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin
Seuil de température fixe ULC: 60 ºC (140 ºF) d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le Série
Point d’alarme réel: 54 à 60 ºC (130 à 140 ºF) Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de
Environnement de fonctionnement sensibilité.
Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF)
7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit
Humidité: 0 à 93% HR - sans condensation
être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur
Bases compatibles
L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
locales.
Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle anti-poussières du détecteur et notifier
Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme
Espacement maximum: Centres de 21,3 m (70 pi) d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)
Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

P/N: 387017P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-HFS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Heat Detector
 SIGA-HRS
Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector

Product description Warnings

1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
Tamper-reist lever arm
Break off to disable 2. This detector will not sense fires that start in areas where heat
(located on base) cannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the
opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3. This detector is intended for use with ionization and/or
Access slot for tamper- photoelectric smoke detectors. The heat detector by itself does not
resist mechanism provide life safety protection.
4. This detector will not detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, or
flames. This device should only be used as part of a broad based
life safety program which includes a variety of information sources
pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishment systems,
Description: The Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat visual and audible devices, and other safety measures.
Detector (SIGA-HRS) is a component of the Signature Series. This
intelligent analog device contains rate-of-rise and fixed-temperature 5. Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be
heat sensors to detect fire. The heat sensors monitor the temperature used when property protection alone is involved. Under no
of the surrounding air and the detector analyzes the data from both circumstances should heat detectors be relied on as the sole
sensors to determine whether an alarm should be initiated. The rate-of- means of fire protection.
rise heat sensor can quickly detect a fast, flaming fire. The fixed- 6. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
temperature heat sensor detects fire when the air temperature near the accordance with the requirements of the authority having
detector exceeds the alarm point. A heat detector by itself, however, jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC
does not provide life safety protection. For life safety situations, a heat Standard CAN 536.
detector should be used in conjunction with ionization or photoelectric
smoke detectors or a combination thereof. See Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for additional information and
for cleaning instructions.
LEDs: The SIGA-HRS provides two LEDs that show detector status.
7. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on
• Normal: Green LED flashes the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
• Alarm: Red LED flashes operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the
• Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns 8. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
addresses to the detector. Custom addresses can be assigned to the recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. temperature before applying power.
Stand-alone operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the
detector alarms when heat levels exceed preset values. See the Installation instructions
applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capabilities.
1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot and
Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-HRS contains a microprocessor capable rotate the detector counterclockwise to remove it. Note: You can
of performing comprehensive self-diagnostic tests and storing results. permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile
memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired. 2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
3. Install and wire the base as described in the Installation Sheet
Specifications supplied with the base.
Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc 4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
Normal operating current: 45 µA apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
Alarm current: 45 µA
Stand-alone alarm current: 18 mA 5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise
ULI fixed-temp alarm rating: 135 °F (57 °C) until it snaps into the locked position.
ULC fixed-temp alarm rating: 140 °F (60 °C)
6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed
Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C)
upon completion of the original installation and following any
Rate-of-rise: 15 °F (8 °C)/min.
modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can
Operating environment
perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.
Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C)
Humidity: 0% to 93% RH, noncondensing 7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of
Compatible bases CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
Maximum spacing: 70 ft (21.3 m) centers undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387018P REV: 8.0

SIGA-HRS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector 1/2
 SIGA-HRS
Détecteur de chaleur vélocimétrique et à température fixe intelligent

Informations sur le produit Avertissements

1. Ce dispositif ne fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons
aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les
incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Levier de verrouillage 2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un
- Casser pour mettre hors endroit où la chaleur ne peut pas l'atteindre. La chaleur dégagée par un feu
service - (situé sur la base) à l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne
pas atteindre le détecteur.

3. Ce détecteur est prévu pour être utilisé avec des détecteurs de fumée à
Fente d'accès du ionisation ou photoélectriques. Le détecteur thermique n’assure pas à lui
mécanisme de verrouillage
seul la protection des vies humaines.
4. Ce détecteur ne détectera pas la teneur en oxygène, la fumée, les gaz
toxiques ou les flammes. Il ne devrait être utilisé que comme élément d’un
programme de protection plus étendu comprenant une variété de sources
d’informations sur la quantité de chaleur et de fumée, des systèmes
d’extinction, des dispositifs sonores et visuels ainsi que d’autres moyens de
Description: Le détecteur intelligent à température fixe et thermovélocimétrique protection.
(SIGA-HRS) est l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif
analogique intelligent comprend un capteur thermovélocimétrique et un capteur 5. D’après des études indépendantes, les détecteurs thermiques ne devraient
thermique à température fixe pour la détection de la chaleur générée par un être utilisés que pour la protection des biens. On ne devrait, en aucun cas,
incendie. Les capteurs thermiques surveillent la température de l’air environnant utiliser des détecteurs thermiques comme seul moyen de protection.
et le détecteur analyse les données des deux capteurs et détermine ainsi si une
alrme doit être déclenchée. Le capteur thermovélocimétrique peut rapidement 6. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon
détecter un incendie à flammes s’étendant rapidement. Le capteur thermique à fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié conformément
température fixe détecte un feu lorsque la température de l’air à proximité aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72
dépasse le point d’alarme. Le détecteur de chaleur seul ne fournit pas une et CAN/ULC 536.
protection suffisante contre l’incendie lorsque des vies humaines sont en jeu. Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage,
Pour assurer une telle protection, il doit être utilisé en conjonction avec des se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.
capteurs de fumée à ionisation ou photoélectrique ou combinant ces deux
technologies. 7. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit
être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service
Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-HRS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est PAS suffisant pour protéger le détecteur
du détecteur. lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.
• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote 8. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit
• Alarme: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser
• Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.
Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement
des adresses aux détecteurs, ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées Modes d’installation
aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est 1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente
utilisé. d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le
Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de
contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de verrouillage peut être mis définitivement hors service en cassant et en
chaleur dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.
de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement 2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d'installation.
autonome.
3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui
Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-HRS contient un microprocesseur capable l'accompagne.
d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser
les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, 4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller
la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces
statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment. 5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des
aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.
Caractéristiques techniques
6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le système
Courant de veille: 45 µA série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de
Courant d'alarme: 45 µA sensibilité.
Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA
7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit
Seuil de température fixe ULI: 57 ºC (135 ºF)
être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur
Seuil de température fixe ULC: 60 ºC (140 ºF)
L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes
Point d’alarme réel: 54 à 60 ºC (130 à 140 ºF)
locales.
Taux d’augmentation: 8 ºC (15 ºF)/min.
Environnement de fonctionnement 8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle anti-poussières du détecteur et notifier
Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF) les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme
Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.
Bases compatibles
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Espacement maximum: Centres de 21,3 m (70 pi)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)
Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

P/N: 387018P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-HRS - Intelligent Fixed-Temperature Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector
 PRODUCT INFORMATION circumstances should heat detectors be relied on as the sole
means of fire protection.
6) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
Description: The Intelligent Heat Detector (HRSI) is a component of accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having
the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains a Grade Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation.
1 heat sensor that detects heat from fire. The heat sensor monitors 7) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain on
the surrounding air temperature and the detector analyzes this data to the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
determine whether an alarm should be initiated. operation. The dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing the
The heat sensor can quickly detect a fast, flaming fire when the air detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
temperature near the detector exceeds the alarm point. A heat 8) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
detector by itself, however, does NOT provide life safety protection. recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
For life safety situations, a heat detector should be used in temperature before applying power.
conjunction with ionization or photoelectric smoke detectors or both.
LEDs: The HRSI provides two LEDs that indicate the status of the
detector.
Normal: Green LED flashes
Alarm: Red LED flashes
Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously
SPECIFICATIONS
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns
addresses to the detector. Custom addresses can be assigned to the Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. Normal operating current: 45 mA
Standalone operation: In the event of communications failure with Alarm current: 45 mA
the loop controller, the detector will alarm when heat levels exceed its Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
preset value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual Classification: Grade 1
for verification of standalone capabilities. Operating temperature range: 32 to 100 °F (0 to 38 °C)
Self-diagnostics: The HRSI contains a microprocessor capable of Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, noncondensing
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity Maximum spacing: 70 ft (21.3 m) centers
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
memory. With some systems, these statistics may be retrieved and Compatible bases
reviewed as desired. Standard: SB, SB4
Relay: RB, RB4
Isolator: IB, IB4, IBS
Audible: AB4
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) Push a small screwdriver into the access slot for the tamper-resist
mechanism while rotating the detector counterclockwise to PRODUCT DIAGRAM
remove the detector. Note: The tamper-resist mechanism may be
permanently disabled by breaking and removing the plastic lever
arm from the base.
2) Refer to the technical bulletin for installation guidelines.
3) Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet Tamper-Resist Lever Arm
supplied with the base. - Break off to disable -
4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and (Located on Base)
apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book.
5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector
clockwise until it snaps into the locked position. Access Slot for
6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and Tamper-Resist Mechanism
notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.

WARNINGS
INSTALLATION SHEET

1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires

frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss SIGA-HRSI
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
2) This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where heat
Intelligent Grade 1 Heat Detector
cannot reach the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on
the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3) This detector is intended for use with ionization and/or INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387271P FILE NAME: 387271P.CDR
photoelectric smoke detectors. The heat detector by itself does REVISION LEVEL: 3.0 APPROVED BY: S. Jaskiel
NOT provide life safety protection.
4) This detector will NOT detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, DATE: 05MAY99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell
or flames. This device should only be used as part of a broad RELATED DOCUMENTS
based life safety program which includes a variety of information Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
sources pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishment
systems, visual and audible devices, and other safety measures. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
5) Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be
used when property protection alone is involved. Under no 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH

Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,
White
Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
6 Shipping Weight
5
SIGA-IB 3.2 oz (91 g)
Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)

7
4

(for wall mounting)

Compatible Electrical Boxes
3

1
North American 1-Gang Box
2 3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-) 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers
BESA Box
NOTES:
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)
From Signature Controller to Next Device 1) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq mm,
or Back to Loop 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
or Previous Device
Controller 2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided and
apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
3) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field
wires around terminals.

Term Description
1 Not Used
2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
3 DATA IN (-)
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 DATA OUT (-) SIGA-IB
7 Not Used

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-IB
Detector Base

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1887 FILE NAME: P-047550-1887.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01974 5

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES
Refer to Standard Detector Base Relay Detector Base Isolator Detector Base
compatible panel
Installation Sheet
for terminal
assignments.

6 6 6
5 5 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1

3
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

BESA Box North American 1-Gang Box

1.5 in
1.1 in (38 mm)
(27 mm)
0.8 in 0.8 in
(20 mm) (20 mm)

2.0 in 2.0 in
(51 mm) (51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm) 4.4 in (112 mm)

3-1/2 in or 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box 60.3 mm Fixing Centers

1.5 in
(38 mm) 1.75 in
(45 mm)
0.8 in
(20 mm) 0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm) 2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

P/N: P-047550-1887 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4

 DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
Base de détecteur à isolateur SIGA-IB
Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec
résistance élevée aux
impacts, blanc

6
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série
5 Signature
Poids à la livraison

7
4

SIGA-IB 91 g (3,2 oz)

Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)
3

1 (montage mural)
Entrée des Sortie des
données (-)
2 Boîtes électriques compatibles
données (-)
Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord
Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
profondeur
Entrée des Sortie des Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
données (+) données (+) profondeur
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature Vers le dispositif suivant Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de
ou du dispositif précédent 60,3 mm
Boîte BESA
NOTES:
1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm2 , 1,5 mm2 , 1 mm2 et 0,75 mm2
(AWG nº 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
Borne Description 2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette
1 Inutilisée dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.
2 Entrée/Sortie
des données (+) 3) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils
3 Entrée des du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.
données (-)
4 Inutilisée
5 Inutilisée
6 Sortie des
données (-)
7 Inutilisée SIGA-IB

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

Base de détecteur
SIGA-IB

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: P-047550-1887 NOM DU FICHIER: P-047550-1887.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR: C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: P-047550-1887 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4
 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur
feuilles
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le
câblage des 6 6 6
5 5 5
bornes.

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1

3
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_
Isoler le blindage avec Blindage
+ du ruban adhésif
S

Panneau de
commande
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.
2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.
Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au
3 niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE

Boîte BESA Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord

38 mm
27 mm (1,5 po)
(1,1 po)
20 mm (0,8 po) 20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po) 51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po) 112 mm (4,4 po)

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) ou de 10,16 cm (4 po) Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm,
de côté et de 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur centres de fixation de 60,3 mm

38 mm
(1,5 po) 45 mm
(1,75 po)
20 mm (0,8 po)
20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)
51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

P/N: P-047550-1887 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4

 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB4
Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH
Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,
White
Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
6 Shipping Weight
5
SIGA-IB4 3.2 oz (91 g)
Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)

7
4

(for wall mounting)

Class A Related Parts 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring
3

1 Wiring Only (SIGA-TS)

2
DATA OUT (-) Compatible Electrical Boxes
DATA IN (-)
North American 1-Gang Box
3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+) BESA Box
to Next Device 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
From Signature Controller 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (using outer mounting
or Previous Device or Back to Loop
brackets on base)
Controller
NOTES:
1) These bases will accept # 12 AWG (2.05 mm ), #14 (1.5 mm ), #16
2 2

(1.0 mm ), and #18 (0.75 mm ) wire. Sizes #16 and #18 are
2 2

Term Description preferred.

1 Not Used 2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided
2 DATA IN/OUT (+) and apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
3 DATA IN (-)
4 Not Used 3) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field
5 Not Used wires around terminals.
6 DATA OUT (-)
7 Not Used

SIGA-IB4

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-IB4
Detector Base

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1889 FILE NAME: P-047550-1889.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01978 3

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES

Refer to Standard Detector Base Relay Detector Base Isolator Detector Base
compatible panel
Installation Sheet
for terminal
assignments.

6 6 6
5 5 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS
4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Surface Mount) 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring

1.5 in
(38 mm)

0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

SIGA-TS

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Flush Mount) Flush Mount Electrical Box

NOTES:
1) A 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring (SIGA-TS) must be installed to give a
"finished" appearance to the 4 in base.
1.5 in
2) Refer to Installation Sheet P/N 387056P for additional
(38 mm)
information.
0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

P/N: P-047550-1889 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4
 DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Gamme de températures de
Base de détecteur à isolateur SIGA-IB4 fonctionnement 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec
résistance élevée aux
6 impacts, blanc
5
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série
Signature

7
4

Poids à la livraison
SIGA-IB4 91 g (3,2 oz)
3

1
Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)
Entrée des 2 Sortie des (montage mural)
Pièces apparentées Jupe de garniture de boîte
électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)
réf. P-025031-0039
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Entrée des Sortie des Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord
Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature profondeur
Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de
60,3 mm
Boîte BESA
Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
Borne Description profondeur
1 Inutilisée Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
2 Entrée/Sortie profondeur
des données (+) (utilisation de supports de montage extérieurs sur la base)
3 Entrée des
données (-) NOTES:
4 Inutilisée
5 Inutilisée 1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm2, 1,5 mm2, 1 mm2 et 0,75
mm21(AWG n° 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
6 Sortie des
données (-) 2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette
dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.
3) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils
du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.

SIGA-IB4

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

Base de détecteur
SIGA-IB4

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-047550-1889 NOM DU FICHIER : P-047550-1889.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE : 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR : C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: P-047550-1889 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4
 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux
feuilles Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le
câblage des
bornes. 5
6 6 5
6
5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_
Isoler le blindage avec
+
S

Panneau de
commande
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.
2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.
Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au
3 niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE
Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de
Jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)
38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage en saillie)

38 mm
(1,5 po)

20 mm
(0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po) SIGA-TS

Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de

38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage encastré)
Boîte électrique pour encastrement

NOTES:
1) Une jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) (Réf.
38 mm SIGA-TS) doit être installée pour donner un aspect final soigné à la base de
(1,5 po) 10,16 mm.
2) Se référer à la fiche d’installation réf. 387056P pour des renseignements
20 mm supplémentaires.
(0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4)
P/N: P-047550-1889 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4
 SIGA-IM
Isolator Module

Product description Specifications

Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 45 µA
Activated current: 45 µA
Maximum circuit resistance between isolators: 6 Ω
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction: High impact polymer
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with
2-gang cover

Application information
In a Class A circuit, a short will be isolated between the two
The SIGA-IM Isolator Module is a component of the Signature SIGA-IM modules located electrically closest to the short as
Series. It is an analog addressable device used to protect a shown in the two configurations below.
Class A data line from total collapse due to wire-to-wire short
circuits. The SIGA-IM monitors line voltages and opens the
data line when a short is detected. A short is isolated between CLASS A CONFIGURATION This part is effectively removed
the two SIGA-IM modules located electrically closest to the from the circuit
short. The number of SIGA-IM modules on a Signature data
circuit (SDC) is limited only by the number of detector IM IM
addresses available on that SDC.
Normal isolator operation Short
circuit
1. A short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23
msec.
2. At 10 msec intervals, beginning on both sides nearest the
loop controller, the isolators close and power the next
isolator in line.
3. An isolator next to a short closes, then reopens within 10 Data out Data return
msec. Loop controller
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-IM
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the CLASS A CONFIGURATION This part is effectively removed
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. WITH T-TAPS from the circuit

Standalone isolator operation IM IM

If communication with the Signature controller fails, the SIGA-

IM isolates any existing short condition and remains open until Short
communication with the Signature controller is restored and the circuit
shorted condition is removed. Refer to the applicable fire alarm
control panel manual to verify standalone capabilities.
Mounting
The SIGA-IM can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64
mm) deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in
(38 mm) deep with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept Data out Data return
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Loop controller
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.

Warning
Installation instructions
This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss Note: The SIGA-IM is shipped from the factory as an
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
should not be disassembled.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1788 REV: 5.0

SIGA-IM - Isolator Module 1/2
To install the module: Wiring diagram
1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
ground faults.
2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
diagram. Green LED
Not used
(normal)
3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the 4 3 2 1
removable serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw
provided, mount the wall plate to the module. From UL/ULC listed To next device or
control panel or return terminals on
5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws previous device listed control panel
provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
(+) (+)
Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA70 National Electrical DATA IN (–) (–) DATA OUT
Code.
Wire stripping guide [3] [4] [5]

Notes
1/4 in (~6 mm)
1. For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate
manufacturer's documentation
Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module. 2. Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to Signature Loop Controller installation sheet for
Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. wiring specifications
Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.
[4] This module should be used only with Class A wiring
[5] Maximum circuit resistance between isolators is 6 Ω
6. All wiring is power-limited and supervised

P/N: P-047550-1788 REV: 5.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-IM - Isolator Module
 SIGA-IO
Input/Output Module

Product description Personality code 32: N.C. relay output with monitor input:
Personality code 32 operates the same as personality code 31,
except that the output is configured as a normally closed, dry
contact relay.
Personality code 33: N.O. relay output with alarm latching
input (Class B): Personality code 33 configures the SIGA-IO as
8 7 6 5 a normally open, dry contact relay and an alarm latching input
for Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact of
the initiating device changes state, the SIGA-IO sends an
alarm signal to the Signature loop controller and the alarm
condition is latched at the module. The output must be
programmed to be activated by the panel.
Personality code 34: N.C. relay output with alarm latching
4 3 2 1 input (Class B): Personality code 34 operates the same as
personality code 33, except that the output is configured as a
normally closed, dry contact relay.
Personality code 35: N.O. relay output with delayed alarm
latching input (Class B): Personality code 35 configures the
SIGA-IO as a normally open, dry contact relay and an alarm
The SIGA-IO Input/Output Module is an intelligent analog- latching input for Class B contact initiating devices. This
addressable component of the Signature Series. The SIGA-IO personality requires that a change in the state of the initiating
requires one module address and provides the following device be maintained for approximately 16 seconds before the
modes of operation: SIGA-IO sends an alarm signal to the Signature loop controller.
The alarm condition is latched at the module, and the output
• Output with monitor input (personality codes 31 and 32) must be programmed to be activated by the panel. Personality
• Input/programmable output (personality codes 33 code 35 is only for use with non-retarded, normally open
through 40) waterflow alarm switches.

Personality codes downloaded to the SIGA-IO during system Personality code 36: N.C. relay output with delayed alarm
configuration determine its function. The Signature loop latching input (Class B): Personality code 36 operates the
controller automatically assigns an address to SIGA-IO, but it same as personality code 35, except that the output is
will accept custom address assignments from a laptop configured as a normally closed, dry contact relay. Personality
computer. code 36 is only for use with non-retarded, normally closed
waterflow alarm switches.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the
module when the cover plate is removed: Personality code 37: N.O. relay output with active non-
latching input (Class B): Personality code 37 configures the
• Normal: green LED flashes SIGA-IO as a normally open, dry contact relay and an active
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes latching input for Class B contact initiating devices. When the
input contact of the initiating device changes state, the SIGA-
Mounting
IO sends an active signal to the Signature loop controller. The
The SIGA-CT2 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in active signal does not latch, and restores when the input
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 device returns to its normal state. The output must be
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept programmed to be activated by the panel. Personality code 37
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). is typically used for monitoring normally open fans, dampers,
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. doors, etc.
System controller compatibility Personality codes 38: N.C. relay output with active non-
latching input (Class B): Personality code 38 operates the
The SIGA-IO requires the Signature loop controller. The loop same as personality code 37, except that the output is
controller downloads the personality code which determines configured as a normally closed, dry contact relay. Personality
how the module operates. The following personality codes can code 38 is typically used for monitoring normally closed fans,
be downloaded to the SIGA-IO. dampers, doors, etc.
Personality code 31 (factory default): N.O. relay output with Personality code 39: N.O. relay output with active latching
monitor input: Personality code 31 configures the SIGA-IO as a input (Class B): Personality code 39 configures the SIGA-IO as
normally open output relay contact that requires a maintained a normally open, dry contact relay and an active latching input
dry contact input activation. The activation must take place for Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact of
within a time period defined by the user (15 second default, 5 the initiating device changes state, the SIGA-IO sends an
to 120 second selectable) after the output circuit activation. If active signal to the Signature loop controller and the active
the fire alarm control panel does not receive a monitor input condition is latched at the module. The output must be
within the specified time, it will generate a trouble condition. programmed to be activated by the panel.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387346 REV: 3.0

SIGA-IO - Input/Output Module 1/3
Personality code 40: N.C. relay output with active latching 4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
input (Class B): Personality code 40 operates the same as provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
personality code 39, except that the output is configured as a
normally closed, dry contact relay. 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
provided, mount the module to the electrical box.

Warnings Notes

1. Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing 1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the 2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
terminals even when power is shut off. the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.
2. This module will not operate without electrical power. As 3. Route power-limited wiring and nonpower-limited wiring
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you through separate conduit holes. Maintain 1/4-inch (6.4
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection mm) separation between power-limited and nonpower-
specialist. limited wiring
3. This module does not support conventional smoke 4. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
detectors. Code.
Wire stripping guide
Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 250 µA
1/4 in (~6 mm)
Activated current: 430 µA
Contact ratings (pilot duty)
24 Vdc @ 2A Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
120 Vac @ 0.5 A connect to the terminal block of the module.
Relay type: Form A or B
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.
Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 0.34 lb (0.15 kg)
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
Compatible electrical box
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
1-gang cover
Initiating device circuit (IDC)
EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF

Wall plate, white

Installation instructions (1-gang)
Note: The SIGA-IO is shipped from the factory as an
assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
should not be disassembled.
To install the module:

1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and

ground faults.
2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
diagram.
3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
removable serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

P/N: 387346 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/3 SIGA-IO - Input/Output Module
Wiring diagram

[8]

N.O. or N.C.
[5]
N.O. or N.C. UL/ULC
Listed
47 kΩ
EOL

[7] [2] [6] [3] [2] [1]

TB2
8 7 6 5

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)

TB1

[6] [4] [2]

Data in (+) Data out (-)

From Signature loop controller To next device
or previous device Data in (-) Data out (+)

Notes [7] Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limited

source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the
[1] 25 Ω max per wire power-limited mark and:
[2] 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) max; 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min • Maintain a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) space from power-
[3] 10 Vdc @ 350 µA, max limited wiring.

[4] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for or

wiring specifications. • Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in
[5] Personality code determines whether this output will be accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
N.C. or N.O. [8] The Nomex isolation barrier separates power-limited and
[6] Power-limited and supervised nonpower-limited wiring. Watch out for the sharp corners
during installation and maintenance.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387346 REV: 3.0

SIGA-IO - Input/Output Module 3/3
 SIGA-IPHS(B)
Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector

Product description Warnings

1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards
with your local fire protection specialist.
Tamper-reist lever arm
Break off to disable 2. This detector will not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot
(located on base) reach it. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of
closed doors may not reach the detector.
3. Ionization detectors are best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires.
Access slot for tamper- Photoelectric detectors are best suited for detecting slow,
resist mechanism smoldering fires. The heat sensor in this device provides a source
of supplemental information to that provided by the other sensors.
The heat sensor by itself does not provide life safety protection.
4. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having
Description: The Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector, model Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and
SIGA-IPHS(B), is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent ULC Standard CAN 536.
analog device contains ionization and photoelectric smoke sensors
and provides an additional heat-sensing element for detecting fire. The 5. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on
detector analyzes the data from all three sensors and determines the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
whether an alarm should be initiated. operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the
detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies
the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning 6. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
service while the detector still operates within UL/ULC limits. temperature before applying power.

LEDs: The detector has two LEDs that show status. 7. Under normal conditions this unit does not require calibration. If
calibration is required, call Customer Service at 1-800-655-4497 to
• Normal: Green LED flashes arrange for return to the factory.
• Alarm/active: Red LED flashes
• Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously See Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for cleaning instructions.

Electronic Addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns 8. Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Installation instructions
Stand-Alone Operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the
detector alarms when smoke levels exceed a preset value. See the 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot and
applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capability. rotate the detector counterclockwise to remove it. Note: You can
permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking and
Self-Diagnostics: The detector contains a microprocessor capable of
removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results.
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity 2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile
memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired. 3. Install and wire the base as described in the Installation Sheet
supplied with the base.
Specifications 4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
Normal operating current: 45 µA
5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise
Alarm current: 45 µA until it snaps into the locked position.
Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
Alarm point temperature: 60 to 70 °F (33 to 38 °C) above ambient 6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed
Ionization source: Americium 241, 0.14 µCi upon completion of the original installation and following any
Air velocity: 0 - 500 ft/min (0 to 2.54 m/s) modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can
ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity range: 0.67% to 3.70% obsc/ft (305 mm) perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.
Environmental compensation: Automatic
Operating environment 7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of
Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm
Humidity: 0% to 93% RH, noncondensing Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
Installation altitude: 6,000 ft (1,828 m) maximum 8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
Compatible bases notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.
Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall-mounted): 12 in (305 mm)
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387016P REV: 8.0

SIGA-IPHS(B) - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector 1/2
 SIGA-IPHS(B)
Détecteur 4D multicapteurs intelligent

Informations sur le produit Avertissements

1. Ce dispositif ne fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons
aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les
incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Levier de verrouillage
- Casser pour mettre hors 2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un
service - (situé sur la base) endroit où la fumée ne peut pas l'atteindre. La fumée dégagée par un feu à
l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne
pas atteindre le détecteur.

Fente d'accès du 3. Les détecteurs à ionisation peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux et
mécanisme de verrouillage offrent une excellente détection des feux à développement rapide avec
flammes. Les détecteurs photoélectriques peuvent dé-tecter de nombreux
types de feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux couvants à
développement lent. Le capteur thermique de ce dispositif est prévu pour
fournir des renseignements supplémen-taires à ceux du capteur de fumée
photoélectrique. Le capteur thermique tout seul n’assure pas la protection
de vies humaines.
Description: Le détecteur de fumée 4D multicapteurs intelligent, modèle SIGA-
IPHS(B), est l'un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique 4. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon
intelligent comprend à la fois des capteurs de fumée photoélectrique et à fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié con-formément
ionisation et un capteur thermique pour la détection des incendies. Le détecteur aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72
analyse les données des trois capteurs et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être et CAN/ULC 536.
déclenchée.
5. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit
Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service
l'environnement et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une alarme de du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est PAS suffisant pour protéger le détecteur
capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du capteur a lors de travaux de construction ou de réamé-nagement.
atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur du système de la nécessité
d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de fonctionner dans les 6. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit
limites UL/ULC. dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser
le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.
Témoins à DEL: Le détecteur comprennent deux témoins à DEL.
7. Dans les conditions normales ce dispositif ne nécessite pas d'étalonnage. Si
• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote un étalonnage est nécessaire, appelez Service à Clients au 1-800-655-4497
• Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote pour dispositions de renvoi à l’usine.
• Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue
Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage,
Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement des se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.
adresses aux détecteurs ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées aux
détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est utilisé. 8. Effectuer un essai du détecteur au moyen du dispositif d'essai de détecteur
de fumée et de l'accessoire adaptateur/tube, modèle 1490, fabriqué par
Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le Home Safeguard Inc.
contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de
fumée dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau
de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement Modes d’installation
autonome.
1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente
Auto-diagnostics: Le détecteur contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le
une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les résultats. sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de
Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la dernière verrouillage peut être mis définitivement hors service en cassant et en
date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et des enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.
problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces
statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment. 2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d'installation.

3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui

Caractéristiques techniques l'accompagne.

Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc 4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller
à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
Courant de veille: 45 µA
Courant d'alarme: 45 µA 5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des
Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.
Température - point d’alarme: 33 à 38 ºC (60 à 70 ºF) audessus de la temp.
ambiante 6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin
Source d’ionisation: Américium 241, 0,14 µCi d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le système
Vitesse de l’air: 0 à 2,54 m/s (0 à 500 pi/min) série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de
Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,67% à 3,70 % obsc/pi (305 mm) sensibilité.
Compensation/environnement: Automatique
Environnement de fonctionnement: 7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit
Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF) être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur
Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes
Altitude d'installation: 1.828 m (6.000 pi) maximum locales.
Bases compatibles 8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle anti-poussières du détecteur et notifier
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme
Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.
Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)
Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387016P REV: 8.0

SIGA-IPHS(B) - Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector 2/2
 recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
PRODUCT INFORMATION temperature before applying power.
7) Under normal conditions, this unit does not require calibration.
Description: The Intelligent 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector (model However, if calibration is required, return to:
IPHSI) is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog
GS Building Systems Corporation
device contains ionization and photoelectric smoke sensors and
5 North Main Street
provides an additional heat sensing element for detecting fire. The
Pittsfield, ME 04967-1500
detector analyzes the data from all three sensors and determines
whether an alarm should be initiated. See the Technical Bulletin for cleaning instructions.
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies 8) Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need
for service while the detector still operates.
LEDs: The IPHSI has two LEDs that show status.
Normal: Green LED flashes
Alarm/active: Red LED flashes SPECIFICATIONS
Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously
Electronic Addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to Normal operating current: 45 µA
the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Alarm current: 45 µA
Stand-Alone Operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
detector alarms when smoke levels exceed a preset value. See the Alarm point temperature range: 60 - 70 °F (33 - 38 °C) above ambient
applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capability. Ionization source: Americium 241, 0.135 µCi
Self-Diagnostics: The detector contains a microprocessor capable of Air velocity range: 0 - 500 ft/min (0 - 2.54 m/s)
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Operating temperature range: 32 - 100 °F (0 - 38 °C)
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity Operating humidity range: 0 - 93 % RH, non-condensing
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile Storage temperature range: -4 - 140 °F (-20 - 60 °C)
memory. These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired. Environmental compensation: Automatic
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Compatible bases
Standard: SB, SB4
Relay: RB, RB4
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Isolator: IB, IB4, IBS
Audible: AB4
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
1) Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot and Maximum distance from ceiling (wall-mounted): 12 in (305 mm)
rotate the detector counterclockwise to remove it. Note: You can Maximum installation altitude: 6,000 ft. (1,828 m)
permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism by breaking
and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
2) See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
3) Install and wire the base as described in the Installation Sheet
supplied with the base. PRODUCT DIAGRAM
4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book.
5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector
clockwise until it snaps into the locked position.
Tamper-Resist Lever Arm
6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and - Break off to disable -
notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is (Located on Base)
undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.

Access Slot for

Tamper-Resist Mechanism
WARNINGS
1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards
with your local fire protection specialist.
2) This detector will NOT sense fires in areas where smoke cannot INSTALLATION SHEET
reach it. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side
of closed doors may not reach the detector. SIGA-IPHSI
3) Ionization detectors are best suited for detecting fast, flaming Intelligent 4D Multisensor
fires. Photoelectric detectors are best suited for detecting slow, Smoke Detector
smoldering fires. The heat sensor in this device provides a source
of supplemental information to that provided by the other sensors.
The heat sensor by itself does NOT provide life safety protection. SHEET P/N: P-047550-1898 FILE NAME: P-047550-1898.CDR

4) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having DATE: 28APR99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell
Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain on Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
operation. The dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing the
detector during new construction or heavy remodeling. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
6) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
TM
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 SIGA-IS
Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector

Product description Warnings

1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, you should discuss further
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
Tamper-reist lever arm 2. This detector will not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot
Break off to disable reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the
(located on base) opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3. Ionization detectors have a wide range of fire-sensing capabilities
and are best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires.
Access slot for tamper- 4. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
resist mechanism accordance with the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC
Standard CAN 536.
5. Install the detector away from air supplies and air diffusers. The
average air velocity should not exceed 75 ft/min (22.8 m/min). Brief
Description: The Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector (SIGA-IS) is a gusts up to 300 ft./min (91.4 m/min.) are allowed.
component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device 6. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on
senses changes in air samples, analyzes the information, and then the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
determines whether an alarm should be initiated. operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
environment (e.g. dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the 7. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
loop controller of its condition. The SIGA-IS issues a dirty-sensor recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
warning when it reaches its preset limit. This notifies the operator of temperature before applying power.
the need for service while the detector is still operating within UL/ULC
limits. 8. Under normal conditions this unit does not require calibration. If
calibration is required, call Customer Service at 1-800-655-4497 to
LEDs: The SIGA-IS detector has two status LEDs: arrange for return to the factory.
• Normal: Green LED flashes Refer to Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for additional information
• Alarm/active: Red LED flashes and cleaning instructions.
• Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously
9. Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Installation instructions
Standalone operation: If unable to communicate with the loop
controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed its preset 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while
value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector.
verification of standalone capabilities. Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism
by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-IS contains a microprocessor capable of
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. 2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity 3. Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile supplied with the base.
memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.
4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
Specifications
5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise
Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc until it snaps into the locked position.
Normal operating current: 45 µA 6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed
Alarm current: 45 µA upon completion of the original installation and following any
Standalone alarm current: 18 mA modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can
Ionization source: Americium 241, 1 µCi perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.
Air velocity: 0 to 75 ft/min (0 to 22.8 m/min). See warning 5, below.
ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity: 0.61% to 1.34% obsc/ft (305 mm) 7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of
Operating environment CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm
Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
Humidity: 0% to 93% RH, noncondensing 8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
Installation altitude: 6,000 ft (1,828 m) maximum notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
Environmental compensation: Automatic undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.
Compatible bases
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall-mounted): 12 in (305 mm)
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387013P REV: 8.0

SIGA-IS - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector 1/2
 SIGA-IS
Détecteur de Fumée à Ionisation Intelligent

Informations sur le produit Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

Avertissements
1. Ce dispositif NE fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons
aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les
incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Levier de verrouillage
- Casser pour mettre hors 2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un
service - (situé sur la base) endroit où la fumée ne peut pas l'atteindre. La fumée dégagée par un feu à
l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne
pas atteindre le détecteur.

Fente d'accès du 3. Les détecteurs à ionisation peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux et
mécanisme de verrouillage offrent une excellente détection des feux à développement rapide avec
flammes.
4. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon
fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié conformément
aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72
et CAN/ULC 536.

Description: Le détecteur de fumée à ionisation intelligent modèle SIGA-IS est 5. Il est recommandé d'installer le détecteur loin des arrivées et des diffuseurs
l'un des composants du série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent d'air. La vitesse moyenne de l'air ne doit pas dépasser 22,8 m/min (75
détecte les changements dans la composition de l'air environnant, analyse ces pi/min). Des rafales d'air de 91,5 m/min (300 pi/min) maximum sont
informations et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée. acceptables pendant de courtes périodes.

Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à 6. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle antipoussière orange vif qui doit
l'environnement (en raison de poussières, de fumées, de changements de être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service
température ou d'humidité) et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est pas suffisant pour protéger le détecteur
alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.
capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur du système de la 7. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit
nécessité d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser
fonctionner dans les limites UL/ULC. le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.
Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-IS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état du 8. Dans les conditions normales ce dispositif ne nécessite pas d'étalonnage. Si
détecteur: un étalonnage est nécessaire, appelez Service à Clients au 1-800-655-4497
pour dispositions de renvoi à l’usine.
• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote
• Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage,
• Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins rouge et vertsont allumés de façon se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.
continue
9. Effectuer un essai du détecteur au moyen du dispositif d'essai de détecteur
Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement de fumée et de l'accessoire adaptateur/tube, modèle 1490, fabriqué par
des adresses aux détecteurs ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées Home Safeguard Inc.
aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est
utilisé.
Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le
Modes d’installation
contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de 1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente
fumée dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau d'accès du vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le sens inverse des
de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement aiguilles d'une montre. NOTE: Le mécanisme de verrouillage peut être mis
autonome. définitivement hors service en cassant et en enlevant le levier en plastique
de la base.
Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-IS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer
une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les 2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instructions d'installation.
résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la 3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui
dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et l'accompagne.
des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces
statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment. 4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller
à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des
Caractéristiques techniques aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 volts cc 6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin
Courant de veille: 45 µA d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le système
Courant d'alarme: 45 µA série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de
Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA sensibilité.
Source d'ionisation: Américium 241, 1µCi
7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit
Vitesse de l'air: 0 à 22.8 m/min (0 à 75 ft/min). Voyez avertissement 5, ci-
être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur
dessous.
L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes
Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,61% à 1,34% obsc/pi (305 mm)
locales.
Environnement de fonctionnement
Température: 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF) 8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle antipoussières du détecteur et notifier
Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme
Altitude d'installation: 1,828 m (6,000 pi) maximum d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.
Compensation/environnement: Automatique
Bases compatibles
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée auximpacts blanc
Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)

P/N: 387013P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-IS - Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
 PRODUCT INFORMATION 8) Under normal conditions, this unit does not require calibration. However, if
calibration is required, return to:
GS Building Systems Corporation
Description: The Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector (ISI) is a component of 5 North Main Street
the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device senses changes in air Pittsfield, ME 04967-1500
samples from its surroundings, analyzes the information, and then determines if
Refer to the technical bulletin for additional information and cleaning
an alarm should be initiated.
instructions.
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the
9) Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
environment (e.g., dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the loop
Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
controller of its condition. The ISI issues a dirty sensor warning when it reaches
a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for service while the
detector is still able to operate.
LEDs: The ISI has two LEDs that indicate the status of the detector.
Normal: Green LED flashes
Alarm / active: Red LED flashes
SPECIFICATIONS
Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns addresses to Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the detectors via laptop Normal operating current: 45 µA
computer. No addressing switches are used. Alarm current: 45 µA
Standalone operation: In the event of communications failure with the loop Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
controller, the detector will alarm when smoke levels exceed its preset value. Air velocity range: see Warnings Note 5
Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for verification of Ionization source: Americium 241, 1 µCi
standalone capabilities. Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH, non-condensing
Self-diagnostics: The ISI contains a microprocessor capable of performing a Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
comprehensive range of self-diagnostic measurements and storing the results. Environmental compensation: Automatic
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity values, Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
and number of recorded alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile memory. Compatible bases
These statistics may be retrieved and reviewed as desired. Standard: SB, SB4
Relay: RB, RB4
Isolator: IB, IB4, IBS
Audible: AB4
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz. (218 g)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Maximum distance from ceiling(for wall-mounted position): 12 in (305 mm)
Maximum installation altitude: 6,000 ft. (1,828 m)

1) Push a small screwdriver into the access slot for the tamper-resist
mechanism while rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the
detector. Note: The tamper-resist mechanism may be permanently
disabled by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base. PRODUCT DIAGRAM
2) Refer to the appropriate technical bulletin for installation guidelines.
3) Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet supplied with
the base.
4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and apply it to
the appropriate location in the serial number log book.
5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise until it Tamper-resist lever arm:
snaps into the locked position. break off to disable
6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and notify (located on base)
the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is undergoing maintenance
and will be temporarily out of service.

Access slot for tamper-

resist mechanism

WARNINGS
1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires frequently
cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards with your local fire
protection specialist.
2) This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke cannot
reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side
of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3) Ionization detectors have a wide range of fire-sensing capabilities and are INSTALLATION SHEET
best suited for detecting fast, flaming fires.
4) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in accordance with
the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction to ensure proper SIGA-ISI
operation.
5) It is recommended that the detector be installed away from air
Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
supplies and air diffusers. The average air velocity should NOT
exceed 75 ft/min (22.8 m/min). Gusts of up to 300 ft/min (91.4 m/min)
are allowed for short periods of time.
SHEET P/N: P-047550-1880 FILE: P-047550-1880.CDR
6) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain on the
detector during installation, and then be removed prior to operation. The REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing the detector during new
DATE: 28APR99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell
construction or heavy remodeling.
7) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the recommended RELATED DOCUMENTS: Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room temperature before applying
power. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806 SIGA-LED
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
Remote LED Alarm Indicator

Product description Installation instructions

1. Refer to Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145) for installation
guidelines.
2. Wire the LED to the base as described in the Installation
Sheet supplied with the base. Be sure to observe the
polarity of the terminals on the terminal block as shown in
the diagram below.

Wiring diagram

Description
The Remote LED Alarm Indicator (LED) is a component of the
Signature Series. This polarized device provides visual
indication when a detector initiates an alarm. A clear lens, light
emitting diode pulses on and off in case of an alarm condition.
The LED can ONLY be used with the Standard Detector Base,
Model SB or SB4. It is NOT compatible with any other bases.

Specifications
(To Terminal #5)
LED type: Clear lens, red light emitting diode
(To Terminal #4)
Luminous intensity: 65 mcd
Compatible
Operation: Pulses on alarm condition Detector Base

Resistance per wire: 10 W max.

Operating power
Voltage: 3 Vdc Warnings
Current: 2 mA
1. This remote annunciator is NOT intended to be used as an
Operating environment evacuation signal for Life Safety situations.
Temperature: 32 - 120 °F (0 - 49 °C)
Humidity: 0 - 93% RH 2. This remote annunciator will NOT operate if the device
that it is connected to it is not powered.
Storage temperature range: -4 - 140 °F (-20 - 60 °C)
3. The LED used in this device has a 180° range of visibility,
Compatible detectors: Signature Series detectors but the best visibility is achieved in direct viewing
Compatible bases: Standard bases: SB, SB4 applications. This device should NOT be installed in areas
of direct sunlight, or where its intensity may be reduced.
Duct applications: Duct detector mounting plate, DH
Compatible electrical boxes: North American 1-gang box,
standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with 1-
gang cover
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer,
white
Shipping weight: 3.2 oz (90 g)
Comments: Not for use with 24 Vdc circuits.

Installation Sheet 21AUG01 P/N: 387025P REV: 6.0

SIGA-LED - Remote LED Alarm Indicator 1/2
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806 SIGA-LED
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
DEL d’alarme à distance

Description de produit Construction et fini: Polymère technique avec résistance

élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison: 90 g (3,2 oz)
Commentaires :Ne Pas utiliser avec les circuits de 24 Vcc.

Mode d’installation
1. Se référer à la brochure technique (P/N 270145) pour
des instructions d’installation.
2. Câbler le LED à la base selon les explications de la
fiche d’installation fournie avec cette dernière.
Respecter la polarité des bornes du bornier, comme
indiqué dans le diagramme ci-dessous.

Diagramme de câblage

Description
La DEL d’alarme à distance (LED) est un composant du
Série Signature. Ce dispositif polarisé fournit une indication
visuelle du déclenchement d’une alarme par un détecteur.
Une diode électroluminescente à diffuseur transparent
clignote en cas d' alarme.
Le LED est utilisable avec une base de détecteur standard
UNIQUEMENT, modèle SB ou SB4. Il N’est PAS compatible
avec les autres bases.

Caractéristiques
Type de DEL: Diffuseur transparent, diode
électroluminescente rouge
Intensité lumineuse: 65 mcd
(Vers la borne n° 5)
Fonctionnement: Clignote en cas d’alarme
(Vers la borne n° 4)
Résistance par fil: 10 W Max.
Base de détecteur
Puissance de fonctionnement compatible
Tension: 3 Vdc
Courant: 2 mA
Enviroment de fonctionnement
La température: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F) Avertissements
Humidité: 0 - 93 % HR
1. Ce téléannonciateur N’est PAS conçu pour être utilisé
Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 comme signal d’évacuation dans des situations de
°F) danger mortel.
Détecteurs compatibles: Détecteurs de la Série Signature 2. Ce téléannonciateur NE fonctionne PAS si le dispositif
auquel il est connecté n’est pas sous tension.
Bases compatibles: Bases standard: SB, SB4
3. La DEL utilisée dans ce dispositif a une visibilité de
Applications sur conduits: Plaque de montage de détecteur 180°, mais une visibilité optimale n’est obtenue que
pour conduits, DH dans des situations de visualisation directe. Ce dispositif
Boîtes électriques compatibles: Boîte Amérique du Nord NE doit PAS être exposé directement au soleil ni installé
simple standard. Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 à un emplacement où l intensité de sa lumière naturelle
po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur avec pourrait être réduite.
couvercle simple.

P/N: 387025P REV: 6.0 21AUG01 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-LED - Remote LED Alarm Indicator
 PRODUCT INFORMATION
Description
The SIGA-MAB Class A/B Input/Output Module, is an addressable Signature
Series component, that may be used in any of the following configurations:
Class A or B dry contact initiating device circuit (IDC)
Class A or B notification appliance circuit (NAC)
The personality code determines the function performed by the SIGA-MAB.
The Signature controller automatically assigns two addresses and
downloads personality codes to the SIGA-MAB during system configuration.
A custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No
addressing switches are used.
Note: See Programming, on the next page, for personality code definitions.
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of module status. A flashing green
LED indicates normal status. A flashing red LED indicates the alarm/active
state.
The SIGA-MAB plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-UIO(R)
series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the board. All wiring
connections are made to terminals on the motherboard.

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage Range 15.2 to 19.95 VDC
Current Ratings
Class B IDC
Personality Code(s) 1, 2, 3, or 4
Standby Current 250 µA
Activated Current 400 µA
EOL Resistor 47 KΩ
Class A IDC
Personality Code(s) 9, 10, 11, or 12
Standby Current 223 µA
Activated Current 365 µA SIGA-MAB
EOL Resistor N/A
Class A or B NAC
Personality Code(s) 15 or 16
Standby Current 223 µA NOLO
GY

365 µA
TECH

Activated Current
EMS
SYST
RDS

ED
EOL Resistor 47 KΩ for Class B
EDWA

JP2
IMIT

JP1
No EOL for Class A
RL
B

E
8735
-MA

Output Ratings
387 POW
9 81 5 6 P
SIGAO.

24 VDC 2A
S
4733

3
0
N

UIT

25 V Audio 50 W
CAT

IRC

70 V Audio 35 W
LC
AL

Operating Temperature 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Operating Humidity 0 to 93% RH
Storage Temperature -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction High impact engineering polymer
Shipping Weight 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
Mounting SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
UL Compatibility ID 0.0
INSTALLATION SHEET:

SIGA-MAB
Class A/B Input/Output Module
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387356P FILE NAME: 387356P.CDR
REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
DATE: 08/17/98 CREATED BY: B. Graham

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GSBUILDING
GS BUILDINGSYSTEMS
SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
CORPORATION USA Canada N4K 5P8
 ?
PROGRAMMING
Personality Code 1: N/O Alarm Latching (Class B) Personality Code 12: N/O Active - Latching (Class A)
Personality code 1 configures the SIGA-MAB for Class B normally-open dry Personality code 12 operates the same as personality code 9, but the
contact initiating devices (for example: pull-stations and heat detectors). contact closure causes an active status, which latches at the module,
When the N/O input contact of an initiating device closes, an alarm signal is instead of an alarm status. Personality code 12 typically monitors
sent to the Signature controller and the alarm condition is latched at the supervisory and tamper switches.
module. This is the default personality code assigned by the factory.
Personality Code 15: Signal Output (Class A)
Personality Code 2: N/O Alarm Delayed Latching (Class B)
Personality code 15 configures the SIGA-MAB for the connection of a
Personality code 2 operates like personality code 1, but the contact must
Class A NAC output (for example: bells, speakers, and strobes).
remain closed for approximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is
generated. Personality code 2 is only used with non-retarded waterflow
Personality Code 16: Signal Output (Class B)
alarm switches.
Personality code 16 configures the SIGA-MAB for the connection of a
Personality Code 3: N/O Active Non-latching (Class B) Class B NAC output (for example: bells, speakers, and strobes).
Personality code 3 typically monitors equipment like fans, dampers, and
doors. A contact closure causes an active status, which does not latch at the Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-UM. Make sure the
module, instead of an alarm status. personality code for channel 2 remains 00.
Personality Code 4: N/O Active Latching (Class B)
Personality code 4 typically monitors supervisory and tamper switches. A
contact closure causes an active status, which latches at the module,
instead of an alarm status.

Personality Code 9: N/O Alarm Latching (Class A)

Personality code 9 configures the SIGA-MAB for the connection of Class A
normally-open dry contact initiating devices (for example: pull stations and
heat detectors). When the N/O input contact of an initiating device closes, an
alarm signal is sent to the Signature controller and the alarm condition is
latched at the module.

Personality Code 10: N/O Alarm Delayed Latching (Class A)

Personality code 10 operates the same as personality code 9, but the
contact must remain closed for approximately 16 seconds before an alarm
status is generated. Personality code 10 typically monitors waterflow alarm
switches.

Personality Code 11: N/O Active - Non-latching (Class A)

Personality code 11 operates like personality code 9, but the contact closure
causes an active status, which does not latch at the module, instead of an
alarm status. Personality code 11 typically monitors equipment like fans,
dampers, and doors.

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS

Warnings INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

1 Disconnect power to the cabinets before removing or installing The SIGA-MAB is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit. It
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.
life.
1 Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to its
2 The SIGA-MAB will not operate without electrical power. As fires installation sheet.
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. 2 Verify that the Signature Data Circuit (SDC) is properly connected to
3 The personality code for the SIGA-MAB is factory set to 0. TB7.

3 Plug the SIGA-MAB into any available position on the motherboard.

! Caution! 4 Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its captive
screws.

Observe static-sensitive material handling practices. 5 Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring instructions of this
installation sheet (following pages).

6 Write the module's address on the label provided and apply the label
to the module.

7 Peel off the removable bar-coded serial number label from the
module and apply it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number
Logbook.

Note: All wiring should conform to NFPA 70-1996, National Electrical

Code Article 760, Section 760-54(a)(1), Exception No. 2 and 3.
Refer to UIO series motherboard installation sheets for wire
routing information.

387356P.CDR Page 2 of 4
 Dry Contact Input Wiring (Personality Codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12)

UL/ULC
Personality Codes: 1, 2, 3, or 4
Notes Listed
47KΩ
EOL
Maximum 25Ω resistance per
1 wire. Maximum circuit
1 2 4
capacitance of 0.1 µF.

Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) 2 Personality Codes: 9, 10, 11, or 12

2 wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75
mm ) 2

Refer to Signature controller Green LED (Normal)

3 Installation Sheet for wiring Red LED (Active)
specifications.
1 2 4
4 Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350µA Remove 1 23 4 SIGA-MAB
Module SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
The SIGA-UIO6R does not come Jumpers
5 with TB14.
Data In 4
The SIGA-UIO6 does not come
6 3
with TB8 through TB13. 2 5

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

4 1
Maximum alarm current is 17 Signature 3
7 Data TB14
mA. Operating voltage range is 2 JP2
JP1
16.0 to 24.0 Vdc. Circuit 1 No connections required for
SIGA-MAB using personality

SIGA-MAB

473387356
TB7
8 All wiring is supervised and codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or
12.

CAT NO.
power-limited. Data Out
4
3 3
2
1
No connections required for SIGA-MAB using TB15
6 personality codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12. Remove motherboard jumpers.
1 23 4

387356P.CDR Page 3 of 4
 Single Input Wiring (Personality Code 15 or 16)
Personality Typical Speaker Circuit
! Transient Protection Caution Code 15
The SIGA-MAB requires transient protection for
installations that connect electromechanical bells or
horns to output circuits. The module's circuitry
requires a bi-polar transient protector (P/N
235196P) for protection against transient spikes
caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.
UL/ULC
Connect the bi-polar transient protector assembly Listed
across the terminals of the bell or horn electrically
closest to the module. The bi-polar transient Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit 47KΩ
EOL
protector is not polarity-sensitive. Code 16
+ + + + + +
Locate bells and horns at least 6ft. (1.83 m) from
the module.
_ _ _ _ _ _

Bi-polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) 1 2 7

Green LED (Normal) 1 23 4 SIGA-MAB

Red LED (Active) SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard

Data In 4
3 Riser 1 Out
2
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
4 1 Riser 1 In
Signature
3
Data TB14
2 JP2
Circuit 1
JP1
4 7 8 9
SIGA-MAB

TB7
473387356

Data Out
CAT NO.

4 No connections required for

3 3
2 SIGA-MAB using personality
Remove codes 15 or 16.
Module 1
6
Jumpers TB15
SIGA-UIOR series motherboard
individual Riser 1 connection. Install
1 23 4 the jumpers between adjacent
modules that use the same riser.
5 7 9

Riser 1 In Riser 1 Out

Notes

1 For maximum resistance, see the appropriate technical reference manual. Maximum circuit capacitance is 0.1 µF.

2 Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm )

2 2

3 Refer to Signature Controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications.

4 The SIGA-UIO6R does not come with TB14.

5 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13.

6 Supervised and power limited.

Supervised and power limited when connected to a power limited source. If the source is non-power limited, power limited marking shall
7
be eliminated.

8 The input for this riser is common to all modules.

9 Use UL/ULC Regulated Power Supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling.

387356P.CDR Page 4 of 4
 Product Information Specifications
DESCRIPTION Compatible Modules SIGA Series Modules (Table A)
The Transponder Mounting Bracket, Model SIGA-MB4, is a Compatible Electrical Boxes
component of the Signature Series System. This bracket allows North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) Deep 2-Gang Box
for mounting two 1-gang compatible modules in a European 100 Standard 4" Square Box 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Box
mm Square Box or Standard North American 4" Square Box. European 100 mm Square Box

WARNINGS
Ensure that the self-adhesive bar code label on the module is not
lost or damaged when removing the 1-gang module from the 1-
gang mounting bracket and installing it in the 2-gang mounting
bracket. Without the bar code label, you will be unable to
address the module.

Installation Instructions
The following items must be retained from the 1-gang
module(s) that are to be mounted in the SIGA-MB4:
• Self-adhesive address labels
• End-of-line resistors, if supplied
• Bilingual faceplate labels
• Peel-off bar code labels

1) Install compatible electrical box.

2) Remove the desired module(s) from the 1-gang bracket
and snap into the SIGA-MB4 2-gang mounting bracket.
Ensure that the self-adhesive bar code label is NOT lost or
damaged.
NOTES: Use the faceplate and faceplate screws provided
with the SIGA-MB4 instead of those provided with
the modules.
When mounting two 1-gang modules in the SIGA-
MB4, the tabs on top and bottom should be
straightened flush with the top and bottom of the
bracket. This allows the modules to be placed
inside the bracket (See Figure). Transponder Mounting Bracket, SIGA-MB4
3) Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
ground faults. Wire and install the module(s) in accordance
with the appropriate instruction as listed in Table A.
4) Using the two 6-32 x 7/16" (11 mm) screws, mount the
SIGA-MB4 to the electrical box.
5) Use the faceplate and four 4-24 x 5/16" (8 mm) self-tapping
screws provided with the SIGA-MB4 and mount the
faceplate to the module.

Table A - Compatible Modules

Installation Instruction
SIGA Series Module
Part No.
SIGA-CT1 387021P
SIGA-MB4
SIGA-CR 387023P TRANSPONDER MOUNTING BRACKET
SIGA-CT2 387037P
PART NO.: P-047550-1775 ISSUE: 1
SIGA-MM1 387057P
SIGA-WTM 387058P EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
SARASOTA , FL 800-655-4497 Fax. 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT 203-699-3000 Fax. 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax. 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-678-6767 Fax. 905-678-9791
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
Description Operating Voltage Range 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
The SIGA-MCC1 Single Input Signal Module is an addressable Signature Standby Current 223 µΑ
Series component used to connect a supervised output circuit to the signal
riser. The SIGA-MCC1 does not supervise the riser; the fire alarm panel Activated Current 100 µA
must provide this function. Upon command from the Signature controller, Output Ratings
the SIGA-MCC1 connects the output circuit to the riser input, which may 24 Vdc 2A
be: 24 Vdc to operate polarized audible and visual appliances, 25 Vac or 70 25 V audio 50 W
Vac to operate audio evacuation circuits, or telephone audio. 70 V audio 35 W
The personality code downloaded to the module by the Signature EOL Resistor Value 47 KΩ
controller during system configuration determines the function performed
Operating Temperature 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
by the SIGA-MCC1. The SIGA-MCC1 requires one module address,
which the Signature controller assigns to it. A custom address can be Operating Humidity 0 to 93% RH
assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No addressing switches are
Storage Temperature -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
used.
Construction High impact engineering polymer
Note: See the programming information, below, for definitions of the
personality codes. Shipping Weight 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
Diagnostic LEDs provide a visible indication of module status. A flashing Mounting SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
green LED indicates normal status. A flashing red LED indicates the
alarm/active state.
The SIGA-MCC1 plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-
UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the
motherboard. All module wiring is made to terminals on the motherboard.

Warning!
?
PROGRAMMING Disconnect power to the cabinets before removing or installing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.
Personality Code 5: Riser Selector (Single Input)
Personality code 5 configures the SIGA-MCC1 as a signal power (24 Vdc)
or audio evacuation (25 or 70 Vac) riser selector, and disables the ring-tone
generator. The output is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short ! Caution!
exists, the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visual signal
circuit, so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.
Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.
Personality Code 6: Riser Selector (Single Input), Ring-tone
Personality code 6 configures the SIGA-MCC1 as a telephone riser
selector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its
hook, the SIGA-MCC1 will generate its own ring-tone signal. A separate SIGA-MCC1
ring-tone riser is not needed. The module sends a signal to the control
panel to indicate that an off-hook condition is present, and waits for the
system operator to respond to the call. When the system operator GY

responds, the ring-tone signal is disabled and the telephone is connected

NOLO
TECH
EMS

to the telephone riser.

SYST
RDS

ED
EDWA

IMIT

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CC1.

C1

981 352P ER L
2
8735
-MC

387 POW
SIGAO.

S
4733

0
N

UIT

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
CAT

IRC
LC
AL

The SIGA-MCC1 is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it

contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.

1 Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to its installation

sheet.

2 Verify that the Signature Data Circuit (SDC) is correctly connected to

TB7.

3 Plug the SIGA-MCC1 into any available position in the motherboard.

INSTALLATION SHEET:
4 Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its captive screws.

5 Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring instructions of this SIGA-MCC1
installation sheet (next page).
Single Input Signal Module
6 Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided and
apply the label to the module. INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387352P FILE NAME: 387352P.CDR

7 Peel off the removable bar coded serial number label from the module REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
and apply it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number Logbook. DATE: 08/17/98 CREATED BY: B. Graham
Note: All wiring should conform to NFPA70-1996, National Electrical Code
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
Article 760, Section 760-54(a)(1), Exception No. 2 and 3. Refer to 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
UIO series motherboard installation sheets for wire routing GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
information. USA Canada N4K 5P8
 WIRING
Personality Typical Speaker Circuit
! Transient Protection Caution
Code 5
UL/ULC Listed
The SIGA-MCC1 requires transient protection
47KΩ EOL
for installations that connect electromechanical
bells or horns to output circuits. The module's
circuitry requires a bi-polar transient protector
(P/N 235196P) for protection against transient
spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or Personality Typical Telephone Circuit
horns. Code 6
Connect the bi-polar transient protector
assembly across the terminals of the bell or UL/ULC Listed
horn electrically closest to the module. The bi- 47KΩ EOL
polar transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.
Locate bells and horns at least 6ft. (1.83 m)
from the module. Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit
Code 5
+ + + + + +
UL/ULC Listed
Bi-polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) _ _ _ _ _ _ 47KΩ EOL

Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) here.

1 2 7 Refer to the Transient Protection Caution above.
1 23 4
SIGA-MCC1
SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard

Data In 6 3 4
3
Riser 1 In
2
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

1 Riser 1 Out
Signature 4
Data 3 TB14
Circuit 2 4 7 8 9
1
SIGA-MCC1

473387352

TB7
CAT NO.

Data Out
4 No connections required for
3
2 SIGA-MCC1. Other modules
1 may require connections.
Green LED (Normal) TB15
Red LED (Active)
SIGA-UIOR series motherboard
1 23 4 individual Riser 1 connection. Install
5 7 9 the jumpers between adjacent
modules that use the same riser.
Riser 1 In Riser 1 Out

Notes Warnings
For maximum resistance, see the appropriate technical reference manual.
1 1 The SIGA-MCC1 will not operate without electrical
Maximum circuit capacitance is 0.1µF.
power. As fires frequently cause power interruption,
2 we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your
Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm ).
2 2

local fire protection specialist.

3 See the Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications. 2 The personality code for the SIGA-MCC1 is factory
set to 5.
4 The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14.
3 The SIGA-MCC1 does not support conventional
smoke detectors.
5 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13.

6 Supervised and power limited.

Supervised and power limited when connected to a power limited source. If

7
the source is non-power limited, power limited marking shall be eliminated.

8 The input for this riser is common to all modules.

9 Use UL/ULC Regulated Power Supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling.

387352P.CDR Page 2 of 2
 SIGA-MCC1S
Auto-Sync Output Module

Product description to indicate the presence of an off-hook condition, and waits for
the system operator to respond to the call. When the system
operator responds, the ring-tone signal is disabled.
Personality Code 25: Auto sync output (default)
Personality code 25 configures the module to provide
synchronization of compatible fire alarm signals across multiple
zones. The output wiring is monitored for open circuits and
short circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm control panel
to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal circuit so the
riser is not connected to the wiring fault. Personality code 25 is
only compatible with EST3, ADT3000, and XLS1000 panels.
Note: You may use nonsynchronous fire alarm signals with or
instead of compatible synchronized fire alarm signals, but the
operation of these devices will not comply with UL 1971.

The Auto-Sync Output Module is an intelligent, analog- Specifications

addressable component of the Signature Series. The Auto- Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Sync Output Module requires one device address and Current
connects a supervised output circuit to a signal riser. Upon Standby: 223 µA
command from the Signature loop controller, the Auto-Sync
Activated: 100 µA
Output Module connects the output circuit to the riser input.
Output ratings
The output circuit energizes a riser to operate:
24 Vdc (telephone riser also): 2 A
• 24 Vdc polarized audible and visual notification appliances 25 Vac audio: 50 W
(see note 1 below) 70 Vac audio: 35 W
• 25 Vac audible evacuation circuits EOL resistor value: 47 kΩ
• 70 Vac audible evacuation circuits Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
• Telephone audio Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °F)
Notes Construction: High impact engineering polymer
1. The output circuit uses a resynchronizing feature to Shipping weight: 0.22 lb (0.10 kg)
operate polarized notification appliances if they are Mounting: UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R motherboard
compatible with Genesis series products. See the Synchronization: Meets UL1971 synchronization requirement.
compatibility section below. All signaling devices signal within 0.01 seconds of each
other for a period of at least two hours while maintaining a
2. The Auto-Sync Output Module does not supervise the 24 one hertz signal rate. (For list of compatible devices, see
Vdc riser; the fire alarm control panel provides this Compatible device table.)
function. Note: For synchronization, the maximum resistance between
any two devices is 20 Ω. See the voltage specifications for
Personality codes the Auto-Sync Output Module, the signaling device, and
the control panel to determine the maximum allowable
System controller compatibility wire resistance.
Signature Series modules require personality codes,
downloaded from the Signature loop controller, to determine Number of devices
their operational features. The Auto-Sync Output Module is Strobe candela rating Maximum strobes
compatible with the personality codes described below.
15, 15PS, 5A 29
Personality code 5: Single-input riser selector
30, 15/75, 7A, 3A 16
Personality code 5 configures the module as a signal power
(24 Vdc) riser selector. The output wiring is monitored for open 60, 75PS, 6A 11
circuits and short circuits. A short circuit causes the fire alarm
control panel to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual signal 75 10
circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault. 110, 8A 8
Personality code 6: Riser selector (single-input) ring-tone
Personality code 6 configures the module as a telephone riser
selector. When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or
lifted from its hook, the Auto-Sync Output Module generates its
own ring-tone signal. A separate ring-tone riser is
unnecessary. The module sends this signal to the control panel

Installation Sheet 30JUN03 P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0

SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 1/4
Installation instructions LEDs
To install the module: Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the
module.
1. Install the Signature motherboard (UIO2R, UIO6, or
UIO6R). See the motherboard installation sheet for more
Status LED indicator
information.
2. Plug the module into any available position on the Normal/Trouble Green LED flashes
Signature motherboard. Short/Active Red LED flashes
3. Secure the module to the motherboard with the two
captive screws on the module. Transient protection caution
4. Wire the module according to the instructions in the wiring The Auto-Sync Output Module requires transient protection for
diagram. installations that connect electromechanical bells or horns to
5. Write the address assigned to the module on the label and output circuits. The module's circuitry requires a bipolar
apply it to the module. transient protector (P/N 235196P) for protection against
transient spikes caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.
6. Remove the bar-coded serial number label from the
module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the
number log book. terminals of the bell or horn electrically closest to the module.
The bipolar transient protector is not polarity-sensitive.
Notes
Locate bells and horns at least 6 ft (1.83 m) from the module.
• The factory ships the Auto-Sync Output Module as an
assembled unit; it contains no user-servicable parts and
should not be disassembled.
• Install in accordance with applicable requirements of the
Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)
latest editions of the NFPA codes and standards, the
Canadian Electrical Code (Part 1, Section 32), and the
authority having jurisdiction.

Warnings

• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing

components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury
or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the
terminals even when power is shut off!
• This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
• This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.

Caution: Observe static sensitive material handling practices.

P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0 30JUN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module
Wiring diagram

Personality code 5: typical speaker circuit

UL/ULC
listed
47 kΩ
EOL

Personality code 6: typical telephone circuit

See the UIO2R or UIO6(R) installation UL/ULC

sheet for additional instructions and details listed
about: 47 kΩ
EOL
• Terminal connections
• Separation of power-limited and
nonpower-limited wiring
Personality codes 5 and 25: typical notification appliance circuit

+ + + + + + UL/ULC
listed
[10]
47 kΩ
_ _ _ _ _ _
EOL

1 2
[1][3][8][9] Signature motherboard (UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R)
_
+
Green LED (normal/trouble)
Auto-Sync Output Module
Red LED (active/short)
4
3 Riser 1 out
Data in
2
1 Riser 1 in
4
Signature 3
data TB14
2 [3][5][7]
circuit 1
TB7
Data out No connections required for
[4] the Auto-Sync Output Module.
[2] 4 Other modules may require
3 connections.
2
1
TB15 Individual riser connection
Install the jumpers between
adjacent modules that use the
[3][6] same riser.
123 4

Riser in Riser out

Notes
[1] Supervised
[2] Supervised and power-limited
[3] Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the power-limited
mark and:
• Maintain a 1/4 in (6.4 mm) space from power-limited wiring
or
• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in accordance with the National Electric Code
[4] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for wiring specifications
[5] The UIO6R does not come with TB14. Modules connect to the riser through individual terminals (TB8 through TB13).
[6] The UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13. All modules connect to the riser through TB14.
[7] The input for this riser is common to all modules
[8] Polarity shown in supervisory condition. Polarity changes on alarm.
[9] Maximum 25 Ω resistance, 0.1 µF capacitance per wire
[10] Transient protection (see “Transient protection caution” above)

Installation Sheet 30JUN03 P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0

SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module 3/4
Compatibility
The Auto-Sync Output Module is compatible with Genesis, Enhanced Integrity (synchronized), and Enhanced Integrity Power
Saver (synchronized) models.

Compatible device table

Description Model number

Genesis strobes *G1-V15, *G1R-V15, *G1-V30, *G1R-V30, *G1-V60, *G1R-V60, *G1-V75, *G1R-V75,
*G1-V110, *G1R-V110
Genesis horn strobes, high output *G1-HOV15, *G1R-HOV15, *G1-HOV30, *G1R-HOV30, *G1-HOV60, *G1R-HOV60,
*G1-HOV75, *G1R-HOV75, *G1-HOV110, *G1R-HOV110
Genesis horn strobes, low output *G1-HV15, *G1R-HV15, *G1-HV30, *G1R-HV30, *G1-HV60, *G1R-HV60, *G1-HV75,
*G1R-HV75
Genesis wall speakers strobe *G4-S2VM, *G4R-S2VM, *G4-S7VM, *G4R-S7VM
Subsitute XLS or ADT for *

Compatible device table

Description Model number
Integrity mini strobes, synchronized *202-15PS, *202-15PSW, *202-75PS, *202-75PSW, *202-3A-T, *202-3A-TW,
*202-5A-T, *202-5A-TW, *202-7A-T, *202-7A-TW, *202-8A-T, *202-8A-TW
Integrity strobes, four inch square box 405-15PS, 405-15PSW, *405-3A-T, *405-3A-TW, *405-5A-T, *405-5A-TW, 405-6A-T,
405-6A-TW, 405-75PS, 405-75PSW, *405-7A-T, *405-7A-TW, *405-8A-T,
*405-8A-TW, CS405-7A-T, CS405-8A-T
Integrity chime strobes *757-3A-CS, *757-3A-CSW, *757-5A-CS, *757-5A-CSW, *757-7A-CS, *757-7A-CSW,
*757-8A-CS, *757-8A-CSW
Integrity horn strobes, temporal 757-7A-T, 757-7A-TW, 757-8A-T, 757-8A-TW
Integrity speaker strobes *757-3A-SS25, *757-3A-SS25W, *757-3A-SS70, *757-3A-SS70W, *757-5A-SS25,
*757-5A-SS25W, *757-5A-SS70, *757-5A-SS70W, *757-7A-SS25, *757-7A-SS25W,
*757-7A-SS70, *757-7A-SS70W, *757-8A-SS25, *757-8A-SS25W, *757-8A-SS70,
*757-8A-SS70W
Integrity speaker strobes, re-entrant wall *757-3A-RS25, *757-3A-RS25W, *757-3A-RS70, *757-3A-RS70W, *757-7A-RS25,
mount *757-7A-RS25W, *757-7A-RS70, *757-7A-RS70W, *757-8A-RS25, *757-8A-RS25W,
*757-8A-RS70, *757-8A-RS70W
Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount *964-3A-4RR, *964-3A-4RW, *964-3A-8RW, 964-3A-8SW, *964-5A-4RR,
25V *964-5A-4RW, *964-5A-8RW, 964-5A-8SW, *964-7A-4RR, *964-7A-4RW,
*964-7A-8RW, 964-7A-8SW, *964-8A-4RR, *964-8A-4RW, *964-8A-8RW,
964-8A-8SW
Integrity speaker strobes, ceiling mount *965-3A-4RR, *965-3A-4RW, *965-3A-8RW, 965-3A-8SW, *965-5A-4RR,
70V *965-5A-4RW, *965-5A-8RW, 965-5A-8SW, *965-7A-4RR, *965-7A-4RW,
*965-7A-8RW, 965-7A-8SW, *965-8A-4RR, *965-8A-4RW, *965-8A-8RW,
965-8A-8SW
Bell strobes adapter plate *403-3A-R, *403-5A-R, *403-7A-R, *403-8A-R
Power-saver speaker strobes *757S2-15PS, *757S2-15PSW, *757S7-15PS, *757S7-15PSW, *757S2-75PS,
*757S2-75PSW, *757S7-75PS, *757S7-75PSW
Subsitute XLS for *

P/N: 387355 REV: 3.0 30JUN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-MCC1S - Auto-Sync Output Module
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION Operating Voltage Range 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
The SIGA-MCC2 Dual Input Signal Module is an addressable Signature Standby Current 223 µΑ
Series component, which connects supervised output circuits to signal
risers 1 and 2. The SIGA-MCC2 does not supervise the riser; the fire Activated Current 100 µA
alarm panel must provide this function. Upon command from the Output Ratings
Signature controller, the SIGA-MCC2 connects the output circuit to the 24 Vdc 2A
riser input, which may be 24 Vdc, to operate polarized audible and visual 25 V Audio 50 W
appliances, or 25/70 Vac, to operate audio evacuation circuits. 70 V Audio 35 W
During system configuration, the Signature controller downloads the EOL Resistor Value 47 KΩ
personality code, which determines the function performed by the SIGA- Operating Temperature 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
MCC2, and automatically assigns the two addresses it requires. A
custom address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No Operating Humidity 0 to 93% RH
addressing switches are used. Storage Temperature -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Note: See the programming information, below, for the definitions of the Construction High impact engineering polymer
personality codes.
Shipping Weight 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of module status. A flashing
green LED indicates normal status. A flashing red LED indicates the Mounting SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
alarm/active state.
The SIGA-MCC2 plugs into any available module space on a SIGA-
UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it to the board.
All wiring connections are made to terminals on the motherboard.

Warning!
?
PROGRAMMING Disconnect power to the cabinets before removing or installing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of life.

Personality Code 7: Riser Selector (Dual Input)

Personality code 7 configures the SIGA-MCC2 as a one of two output
signal power (24 Vdc) or audio evacuation (25 or 70 Vac) riser selector. ! Caution!
Each output circuit is monitored for open and shorted wiring. If a short
exists, the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visual
signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault. Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.

Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CC2.

SIGA-MCC2

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS NOLO

GY
TECH
EMS
SYST
RDS

ED
EDWA

The SIGA-MCC2 is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it

IMIT

contains no user-servicable parts and should not be disassembled.

C2

981 353P ER L
3
8735
-MC

387 POW
SIGAO.

1 Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to its

S
4733

0
N

UIT

installation sheet.
CAT

IRC
LC
AL

2 Verify that the Signature Data Circuit (SDC) is properly connected to

TB7.

3 Plug the SIGA-MCC2 into any available position on the

motherboard.

4 Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its captive

screws.

5 Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring instructions of this

installation sheet (next page).
INSTALLATION SHEET:
6 Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided and
apply the label to the module.
SIGA-MCC2
7 Peel off the removable bar coded serial number label from the Dual Input Signal Module
module and apply it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number
Logbook.
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387353P FILE NAME: 387353P.CDR
Note: All wiring should conform to NFPA 70-1996, National Electrical REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
Code Article 760, Section 760-54(a)(1), Exception No. 2 and 3.
Refer to UIO series motherboard installation sheets for wire DATE: 08/17/98 CREATED BY: B. Graham
routing information.
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 WIRING

! Transient Protection Caution Personality Typical Speaker Circuit

Code 7
The SIGA-MCC2 requires transient protection for UL/ULC Listed
installations that connect electromechanical bells or 47KΩ EOL
horns to output circuits. The module's circuitry
requires a bi-polar transient protector (P/N
235196P) for protection against transient spikes
caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.
Connect the bi-polar transient protector assembly
across the terminals of the bell or horn electrically
closest to the module. The bi-polar transient Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit
protector is not polarity-sensitive. Code 7
Locate bells and horns at least 6ft. (1.83 m) from + + + + + +
the module. UL/ULC Listed
_ _ _ _ _ _ 47KΩ EOL

Bi-polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P)

1 2 7
SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard

1 23 4 SIGA-MCC2

7 8 9
6 3
4
Data In 3 Riser 1 Out
2
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY

1 Riser 1 In
Signature 4
3 TB14
Data 2
Circuit 1
SIGA-MCC2

473387353

TB7
CAT NO.

Data Out 7 8 9
4
3 Riser 2 Out
2
1 Riser 2 In
Green LED (Normal) TB15
Red LED (Active)
SIGA-UIOR series motherboard
7 9 individual Riser 1 connection. Install
the jumpers between adjacent
1 23 4 modules that use the same riser.
Riser 1 In Riser 1 Out

Notes
For maximum resistance, see the appropriate technical reference
1
manual. Maximum circuit capacitance is 0.1 µF.

2 Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm ).

2 2

3 See the Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications. Warnings
4 The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14.
1 The SIGA-MCC2 will not operate without electrical
5 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13. power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we
suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local
6 Supervised and power limited. fire protection specialist.
2 The personality code for the SIGA-MCC2 is factory set
7 Supervised and power limited when connected to a power limited to 7.
source. If the source is non-power limited, power-limited marking shall
be eliminated. 3 The SIGA-MCC2 does not support conventional smoke
detectors.
8 The input for this riser is common to all modules.

9 Use UL/ULC Regulated Power Supply listed for Fire Protective

Signaling.

387353P.CDR Page 2 of 2
 SIGA-MCR
Control Relay

Product description Programming

Personality Code 8: Dry contact output
The SIGA-MCR is assigned personality code 8 at the factory,
which configures the module as an output dry contact relay.
Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CR.

WARNING: This module will not operate without electrical

power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we
suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire
protection specialist.

Installation instructions
The SIGA-MCR is shipped from the factory as an assembled
unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be
disassembled.
To install the module:
The SIGA-MCR Control Relay is an addressable Signature
Series component. A Form C dry contact relay in the SIGA- 1. Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to
MCR can control equipment shutdown or external appliances its installation sheet.
such as door closers, fans, and dampers. The system firmware
ensures that the relay is in the proper ON/OFF state. The 2. Verify that the Signature loop is properly connected to
SIGA-MCR relay energizes on command from the Signature TB7.
controller. 3. Plug the SIGA-MCR into any available position on the
The SIGA-MCR requires one device address, which the motherboard.
Signature controller automatically assigns. A custom address 4. Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its
can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No captive screws.
addressing switches are used.
5. Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring diagram
Note: See “Programming,” below, for the application and shown below.
definition of personality code 8.
6. Write the module's address on the label provided and
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the module apply the label to the module.
status:
7. Peel off the removable bar-coded serial number label from
• Normal: green LED flashes the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes serial number logbook.
The SIGA-MCR plugs into any available module space on a Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it Code. Refer to the UIO motherboard installation sheets for wire
to the board. All wiring connections are made to terminals on routing information.
the motherboard.

Specifications
Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 100 µA
Activated current: 100 µA
Contact rating (pilot duty)
30 Vdc: 2 A
120 Vac: 0.5 A
Relay type: Form C
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Operating humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing
Mounting: SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387358P REV: 2.0

SIGA-MCR - Control Relay 1/2
Wiring diagram

Normally open Common Normally closed

[2] [6]
1 23 4 SIGA-MCR
[1] [5] SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
Data in
[3]
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
TB7 TB14
No connections required for
Data out SIGA-MCR. Other modules

SIGA-MCR
may require connections.

473387358
CAT NO.
4
3
2 No connections required for
Green LED (normal) 1 SIGA-MCR. Other modules
Red LED (active) TB15 may require connections.
123 4
[4]

Notes
[1] Refer to the Signature Controller installation sheet for
wiring specifications
[2] Install the SIGA-MCR within the same room as the device
it is controlling
[3] The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with
TB14
[4] The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13
[5] Supervised and power-limited
[6] Power-limited when connected to a power-limited source.
If the source is nonpower-limited, power limited marking
shall be eliminated.
7. Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; Minimum 18 AWG
(0.75 sq mm)

P/N: 387358P REV: 2.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-MCR - Control Relay
 SIGA-MCRR
Control Reversing Relay

Product description Specifications

Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 100 µA
Activated current: 100 µA
Contact ratings (pilot duty): 24 Vdc @ 2A
Wire gauge: 12 to18 AWG (2.5 to 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and
18 AWG are preferred.
Compatible bases: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Operating temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C)
Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing
Mounting: SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation instructions
The SIGA-MCRR is shipped from the factory as an assembled
unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be
disassembled.
The SIGA-MCRR Control Reversing Relay Module is an
addressable Signature Series component used to power and To install the module:
activate the audible sounder in Signature Audible Detector
1. Install the SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard according to
Bases. On command from the Signature controller, the SIGA-
its installation sheet.
MCRR relay energizes, reversing the polarity of its 24 Vdc
output. 2. Verify that the Signature loop is properly connected to
TB7.
The SIGA-MCRR requires one device address, which the
Signature controller assigns to it automatically. A custom 3. Plug the SIGA-MCRR into any available position in the
address can be assigned to the module via the SIGA-PRO. No motherboard.
addressing switches are used.
4. Secure the module to the motherboard with both of its
Note: See “Programming,” below, for the application and captive screws.
definition of Personality Code 8.
5. Wire the terminal blocks according to the wiring diagram
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of module status: shown below.
• Normal: green LED flashes 6. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes provided and apply the label to the module.
The SIGA-MCRR plugs into any available module space on a 7. Peel off the removable bar coded serial number label from
SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard, and captive screws secure it the module and apply it to the appropriate location in the
to the board. All wiring connections are made to terminals on serial number logbook.
the motherboard.
Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code. Refer to the UIO motherboard installation sheets for wire
WARNING: This module will not operate without electrical routing information.
power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we
suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire
protection specialist.

Programming
Personality Code 8: Contact output
The SIGA-MCRR is assigned personality code 8 at the factory,
which configures the module as an output dry contact relay.
Note: Data entry may define this module as a SIGA-CRR.

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387359P REV: 2.0

SIGA-MCRR - Control Reversing Relay Module 1/2
Wiring diagram

Schematic

Power in Power out

– + + – First device SIGA-AB4G SIGA-AB4G Last device

IN/OUT

IN/OUT
DATA+

DATA+
S IG+

S IG+
S IG-

S IG-
Listed EOL
relay and
Polarity reverses supervising
when activated module

[4]

Data in

[5]

UL/ULC listed
24 Vdc power
supply —OR— [6]

1 23 4 123 4

SIGA-MCRR
[1] [4] SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
Data out 4
3
2 No connections required for
4 1 SIGA-MCRR. Other modules
3 TB14 may require connections.
Signature loop 2
1
[2]
SIGA-MCRR

SIGA-MCRR
473387360

473387359

TB7
CAT NO.

CAT NO.

Data in
4 Green LED (normal)
3
2 Red LED (active)
1
No connections required for
TB15 SIGA-MCRR. Other modules
Green LED (Normal)
123 4 123 4 may require connections.
Red LED (Active)
[3] [3]

Optional SIGA-MCRR
or SIGA-MCR for No connections required
disabling/disconnecting for SIGA-MCRR. Other
an audible base [6] modules may require
connections.

Notes [4] Supervised and power-limited

[1] Refer to the Signature controller installation sheet for [5] Power-limited when connected to a power-limited source.
wiring specifications If the source is nonpower-limited, power-limited marking
Must be eliminated.
[2] The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with
TB14 [6] Alternate wiring of the 24 Vdc power applies when an
optional SIGA-MCRR or MCR is used
[3] The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13

P/N: 387359P REV: 2.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-MCRR - Control Reversing Relay Module
 SIGA-MD(S)
Motion Detector

Product description Coverage

Patterns: Full, right, left, and center
Curtains: Up to 7
Range: 34 ft (10.36 m) x 90°
Mounting
Surface: Flat wall or corner
Height: Up to 10 ft (3 m)
Address requirement: 2
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Humidity: 10 to 93% noncondensing
Shipping weight
SIGA-MD: 7.3 oz (207 g)
SIGA-MDS: 9.6 oz (272 g)
Construction: High impact polymer
Color: White
Note: This unit complies with FCC and DOC requirements.

SIGA-MD SIGA-MDS Personality codes

System controller compatibility
The Motion Detector requires a Signature loop controller to
download the personality codes that determine how it will
The Motion Detector module is an intelligent, analog- operate. The first channel is user-definable to eight different
addressable device that interfaces a motion detector and a personalities. The second channel is automatically configured
security or guard tour input to a Signature loop controller. The for motion detection. The user-definable personality codes for
SIGA-MDS contains the same circuitry as the SIGA-MD, but its external security loops are described below.
mounting and wiring require different procedures. See the
mounting and wiring topics in this installation sheet for Personality code 3: N.O. active, nonlatching relay (guard
complete instructions. tour)
The Motion Detector requires two module addresses. One Personality code 3 configures the channel 1 input for use with
channel monitors the PIR (passive infrared) and the tamper Class B, normally-open (N.O.) contact guard tour devices.
switch in the detector. The second channel provides a security When the N.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signal
input, which can be configured for security or guard tour is sent to the loop controller. The active status is nonlatching
applications (per NFPA 72). A single Signature loop can and clears when the N.O. input is returned to the open
accommodate up to 62 units. condition. The panel will report an open circuit as a trouble
condition.
The Motion Detector provides seven separate coverage
patterns known as curtains. The curtains are actually infrared Personality code 41: security open with tamper
reflections that extend to 34 ft (10.36 m) and cover a width 4.8
Personality code 41 configures the channel 1 input for devices
ft (1.46 m) each. The coverage patterns, however, are
that use a Class B, N.O. contact for security conditions and a
configurable to specification. See “Configuring the reflector and
Class B, normally-closed (N.C.) contact for tamper conditions.
window” and “Mounting the detector” for more detail.
When the N.O. contact is closed, an active signal is sent to the
A coverage test function provides verification for the extent of loop controller; similarly, when the N.C. contact is opened, a
coverage within specific zones covered by the infrared tamper signal is sent to the loop controller.
curtains. A red LED flashes to indicate active motion within a
Personality code 42: security closed with tamper
covered zone.
Personality code 42 configures the channel 1 input for devices
Specifications that use a Class B, N.C. contact for security conditions and a
Input voltage: 15.20 to 19.95 Vdc Class B, N.O. contact for tamper conditions. When the N.C.
Current draw contact is opened, an active signal is sent to the loop
controller; similarly, when the N.O. contact is closed, a tamper
Standby: 600 µA
signal is sent to the loop controller.
Active: 700 µA
Input circuit Personality code 43: basic security (factory default)
EOL resistor: UL/ULC listed 47 kΩ
The factory assigns personality code 43 to the channel 1 input.
Max. resistance: 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
Personality code 43 configures the channel 1 input for devices
Max. capacitance: 0.1 µF that use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contact
Max. voltage: 18 Vdc for security conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or the
Max. current: 0.32 mA N.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signal is sent to
the loop controller.

Installation Sheet 17OCT02 P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector 1/8
 2. Insert a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in the slot and push
Personality code 44: tamper the handle down to lift the cover off of the base (as shown
Personality code 44 configures the channel 1 input for devices in Figure 3).
that use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contact 3. Remove the circuit board assembly (Figure 4).
for tamper conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or the
N.O. contact is closed, a tamper signal is sent to the loop
controller. Corner mounting Wall mounting
[1]
Personality code 45: security open [2] [2]

Personality code 45 configures the channel 1 input for use with

a Class B, N.O. contact. When the N.O. contact is closed, an
active signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will report
an open circuit as a SecurityFault condition. [1]

Personality code 46: security closed [1]

6 to 10 feet above the floor (1.8 to 3 m)
Personality code 46 configures the channel 1 input for use with
a Class B, N.C. contact. When the N.C. contact is opened, an
[1] Flat wall mounting holes [2] [1] [2]
active signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will report
[2] Corner mounting holes
a short circuit as a SecurityFault condition.
Personality code 48: security - maintenance Figure 1: Mounting locations
Personality code 48 configures the channel 1 input for devices
that use a Class B, N.C. contact or a Class B, N.O. contact for
maintenance conditions (e.g. a motion detector with a separate
maintenance contact). When the N.C. contact is opened or the
N.O. contact is closed, a maintenance signal is sent to the loop Tab
controller. Access plate
Note: See the SDU Online Help (P/N 180653) for additional
programming instructions.
Access plate

Installation instructions
Here are the general steps you'll follow to mount, wire, and test Cover
the Motion Detector. The details of each step are given in the
remaining topics of this installation sheet.
1. Disassemble the detector for mounting and wiring.
(Remove the access plate, cover, and circuit board.)
2. Mount the base to a flat wall or a corner. (See Figure 1
and “Mounting the detector.”)
Figure 2: Removing the access plate
3. Configure the reflector and window as required for the
coverage you want.
4. Wire the detector and replace the circuit board.
5. Set the jumpers for the required sensitivity and range.
Insert flat-bladed
6. Test the detector. screwdriver here.
7. Remove the keeper screw and reassemble the cover and
access plate.
Installation notes
1. For NFPA 72 guard tour applications, mount the Motion
Detector to an outlet box.
2. This product is compatible with the EST3 system. The
system must provide a minimum of 4 hours standby for
security applications and 24 hours standby for fire alarm
applications.

Figure 3: Removing the cover

Disassembling the detector
To disassemble the detector:

1. Use the tab to pull the access plate off of the cover (Figure
2).

P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0 17OCT02 Installation Sheet

2/8 SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector
 4. Remove the circuit board to expose the swivel screw. (See
Figure 4.)
5. Tighten the swivel screw to set the locking clip at the
desired angle.
6. Replace the circuit board. (See Figure 9 and Figure 10.)
7. Snap the cover back onto the base. (See “Reassembling
Use a small, flat-bladed the detector.”)
screwdriver to lift the circuit
board out of the base. Be
careful not to damage the Mounting the detector
circuit board or touch the
pyroelectric sensor on the
back of the circuit board.

Base (front view)

1-gang mounting box

Pyroelectric
sensor

Screw

Mounting plate
Base
Base (bottom view) Base (side view) Swivel

Figure 4: Removing the circuit board assembly

Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices. Cover

Mounting the detector Base

General guidelines Cover

Swiveling the detector up Swiveling the detector left
Mount the detector so the expected movement of an intruder and down and right
will cross the fields of detection. (See “Configuring the reflector
and window.”) Remove any object in front of the detector that Note: Shown in the correct position for maximum range. Any other
may prevent a clear line of sight. Keep metallic objects at least position may reduce range.
two feet away from the detector. Avoid locations that expose
the detector to:
Circuit board
• Moving or vibrating objects (fans, pulleys, conveyer belts) Pyroelectric sensor (Do not touch!)
• Water spray or corrosive environments
• Heat sources in the field of view (heaters, radiators)
• Windows in the field of view
• Strong air drafts on the detector (fans, air conditioners)
Tighten this screw to set the
• Animals larger than 20 pounds locking clip at the desired angle.
• Blinds, curtains, or drapes
• Electronic fields (electric motors, high-voltage equipment)
Mounting the SIGA-MDS
The SIGA-MDS requires a few additional mounting steps.
To mount the SIGA-MDS:
Tightening the locking clip
1. Secure the detector to the 1-gang box with two screws
(Figure 5).
Figure 5: SIGA-MDS mounting illustrations
2. Swivel the detector to the desired angle.
3. Remove the cover from the base.

Installation Sheet 17OCT02 P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector 3/8
Configuring the reflector and window 2. If needed, place the undercrawl window mask in the cover.
(See Figure 7.)
You can remove the infrared reflector to configure the detector
for the specifications of your job. 3. If needed, apply the plastic masks or curtain block stickers
to the infrared reflector. (See Figure 8.)
To configure the reflector and window:
4. Put the infrared reflector back into the base.
1. Remove the infrared reflector from the base.

Zone: 4
Width: 4.8 ft (1.46 m) Coverage: 34 ft (10.36 m)
Clearance: None

Zone: 2, 6
Width: 4.8 ft (1.46 m) Coverage: 26 ft (7.92 m)
Clearance: 8 ft (2.44 m)
You can modify the detector
coverage pattern to fit specific Zone: 1, 3, 5, 7
applications. Mask zones to avoid Width: 4.8 ft (1.46 m) Coverage: 9 ft (2.74 m)
sources of false alarms such as Clearance 25 ft (7.62 m)
heaters, air conditioners, windows, 10 ft (3.04 m) max.
and pets. Mounting heights 8 ft (2.44 m) nom.
Note: Do not apply masks or 6 ft (1.83 m) min.
curtain block stickers to the
detector in full coverage 8 ft (2.44 m)
applications. 25 ft (7.62 m)
Infrared reflector (upside down view) 34 ft (10.36 m)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2
34 ft (10.36 m)
3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4

5
6
7

Figure 6: Full coverage

The cardboard undercrawl

window mask allows objects to
be placed within 5 ft (1.52 m) of
the detector or directly below it.

7 1
6 2
5 4 3
Undercrawl window mask

P/N 14367
7.9 ft (2.41 m)

5 ft (1.52 m)
Motion Detector cover (lower-rear view)

Figure 7: Undercrawl coverage

P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0 17OCT02 Installation Sheet

4/8 SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector
 Masking for right-half coverage Masking for unique zone requirements

3 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 45 6 7

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6

Zones 3 and 6
receive no
coverage.
34 ft (10.36 m) 34 ft (10.36 m)

7 1
7
6 2
5 4 6
5 4 3

Masking for left-half coverage Masking for center zone coverage

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
For corridors
and hallways
34 ft (10.36 m)
34 ft (10.36 m)

1
4 4
4 3

Plastic masks Adhesive curtain stickers

Each zone of coverage requires both
numbered (small and large) curtain
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 block stickers.

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Caution: Do not use sharp objects to
remove unwanted stickers from the
Use the plastic masks to infrared detector. Carefully peel off
mask off wide areas of the sticker if it becomes necessary to
coverage. use the blocked curtain (zone).
2981-2B

Figure 8: Masked coverage patterns

Installation Sheet 17OCT02 P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector 5/8
Wiring the detector
Data in (+) [1][2][3][4]
[8]
To wire the SIGA-MD(S): Data in (-)
Channel 1 input
1. If necessary, remove the circuit board as instructed in [9] Data out (+) [5]
Data out (-)
Figure 4. Remember to observe electro-static precautions.
2. Remove the wiring knockouts (see Figure 9) on the base
for the wiring.
3. Run the wiring through the wiring knockouts.
Interface TB1
4. Connect the wiring to the appropriate terminals at TB1. card [S]
1 2 3 4 5 6
(See Figure 11 for SIGA-MDS wire runs.) [S]
Normal LED
DS2 (green)
5. If necessary, lower the circuit board into the base and DS1
snap it securely into place at the locations marked [S] in Active LED (red)
Figure 9 and Figure 10.
[S] J1 J2 [S]
Motion
Base detector
card Range Tamper switch
Top view SENS (engaged when
the top cover is
installed and
activated when
the cover is
removed)

Remove these wiring knockouts.

Lower the circuit board assembly and

and snap it back into place.
Infrared light reflector (7 curtains)
Apply curtain block stickers to limit the number of detection curtains.

TB1
[S] Figure 10: SIGA-MD wiring
[S]

[10]
Red
[S] Black
See Table 1 for wiring
[S] Snap color codes.

[S] White

Run wiring as illustrated here.

Figure 9: Running wires through the knockouts

Notes for Figure 10 and Figure 11

[1] The Channel 1 input circuit does not require a personality
code, but it is configurable to personality codes 3, 41, 42,
43, 44, 45, 46, or 48. Figure 11: SIGA-MDS factory installed wiring
[2] Class B (Style 4)
Table 1: SIGA-MDS wire color codes
[3] 25 Ω resistance per wire, max.
Color Wire path
[4] 16 AWG (1.0 sq mm) max. 22 AWG (0.25 sq mm) min.
Field installed Channel 1 in
[5] Listed 47 kΩ EOL resistor
Field installed Channel 1 out
6. All wiring is supervised and power-limited
Black Data in (-)
7. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors.
Red Data in/out (+)
[8] From Signature loop controller or previous device
White Data out (-)
[9] To next device
[10] Use a wire nut to connect the Data in (+) and Data out (+)
lines to the red Data in/out (+) wire inside the junction box.

P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0 17OCT02 Installation Sheet

6/8 SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector
Wire stripping guide Setting the jumpers

Jumper Settings
1/4 in (~6 mm) J1 SENS Determines the detector sensitivity
BI: Bicurtain mode (not UL listed) increases false
Strip 1/4 inch (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that alarm immunity by requiring the intruder to pass
connect to the terminal block of the module. through two curtains to trigger an alarm. Do not
use BI for single-curtain applications or ranges
under 5 ft (1.52 m).
Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.
Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection STD: Standard mode handles wide-angle or
single-curtain applications. The intruder only
needs to pass through one curtain to trigger an
alarm.
J2 Range Determines the detector range. Make sure the
N.O. with tamper Tamper jumper is in the 34 ft (10.36 m) position before
[2]
Alarm operation.

Alarm Sensitivity selection Range selection

N.C. with tamper [2]
Tamper 34 ft (10.36 m) range
Bicurtain

Standard N/A

Basic security
[2] J1 J2

Figure 13: Jumper settings

Guard tour [3]

[2] Testing the detector
Conducting a coverage test
[1] The coverage test allows for verification of the extent of
Channel 1 input coverage within a space.
The detector remains in the coverage test mode while the
cover is removed and for approximately 2 minutes after you
replace it. If the detector returns to normal before you make all
the adjustments, return to step 2 for additional time.
TB1
5 6 The Motion Detector will stay in alarm for approximately three
seconds after each alarm.

Notes To conduct a coverage test:

[1] See the previous page for notes that apply to the 1. Disable the device if you do not want a tamper or active
Channel 1 input. indication at the fire alarm panel.
[2] Listed 47 kΩ EOL resistor 2. Remove the cover (Figure 3). This activates the tamper
[3] UL/ULC listed guard tour station switch, which puts the detector in the coverage test mode.
3. Reinstall the cover.
Figure 12: Security circuits 4. Test each curtain for proper operation by walking through
each section in the space. The red coverage test LED
(Figure 14) flashes on each alarm.
WARNINGS
5. Make adjustments to the curtain coverage as necessary.
• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or 6. Re-enable the detector at the fire alarm panel if you
loss of life. disabled it before testing.
• This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
• This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.

Installation Sheet 17OCT02 P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector 7/8
 Snap the cover and the base
Cover Base together here.

J1 J2

Coverage test LED

Figure 14: Coverage test LED

Maintaining the detector Join the cover and the base here.
The Motion Detector, if properly installed and used, will provide
years of service with minimal maintenance. Conduct a Figure 16: Snapping the cover onto the base
coverage test annually as described here to verify proper
operation.
Clean the cover with a water-dampened cloth as needed to
keep the detector free of dust and dirt. Always test the detector
after you clean it.

Reassembling the detector

Keeper
To assemble the detector: screw

1 Remove the keeper screw from the base (Figure 15).

2 Join the cover and the base at bottom as shown below
(Figure 16).
3 Snap the cover shut at the top of the base.
4 Remove the access plate from the cover (Figure 17).
5 Secure the cover to the base with the keeper screw you
removed in step 1. Figure 17: Securing the cover to the base
6 Replace the access plate.

Remove the
keeper screw
and use it to
secure the
detector cover.

Figure 15: Finding the keeper screw

P/N: 387633 REV: 2.0 17OCT02 Installation Sheet

8/8 SIGA-MD(S) - Motion Detector
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
Description Power Requirements
The SIGA-MDM is a voice quality audio message record and playback Standby 8 mA @ 18 - 26.4 Vdc, (610 µA SDC)
module. One or two 30-second messages can be stored in the Record/Playback 20 mA (420 µA SDC)
module's non-volatile EEPROM memory. Control of the SIGA-MDM is Annunciate 20 mA (420 µA SDC)
via the Signature Data circuit (SDC), from instructions programmed in Messages
the host panel. Manual record and play switches are provided on the Quantity 2
front of the module for recording and test purposes. The module Length 30 seconds each
features low and line level audio inputs through a front panel jack. The
pre-amp level audio output is available on the motherboard terminals. Audio
An audio output jack is provided on the front panel for monitoring the Bandwidth 400 Hz to 2.8 kHz +3/-6 dB, ref. 1 kHz
audio output using headphones or an external speaker . Distortion <2% @ 1 kHz

Multiple SIGA-MDMs can be cascaded to provide multiple message Audio Input

outputs. The output of the MDM is DC supervised with an EOL resistor. Microphone 20 mVrms max. via front panel stereo jack
Line-Level 200 mVrms max. via front panel stereo jack
The SIGA-MDM mounts on any SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard.
Audio Output
Riser 1 Vrms into 600 Ω (min.) load with wiring
impedance of 50 Ω/0.4 µF (max.)
Riser Supervision DC Supervision by upstream MDM, 47 KΩ
EOL
Front Panel 1 Vrms 16 Ω 3.5 mm stereo jack
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS Multi-Unit Cascade
Priority Active downstream unit has priority
Remote Control Functions Playback and message select via SDC
Warning! Local Control Functions Message Select, Input Level Select,
Record, and Local Playback
Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing Module LED Indicators Record mode, Play mode, and Excessive
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss input level
of life. Signature
Address Requirement 2 addresses
Personality Emulate SIGA-CC2
! Caution! Control Low Address = off/play; High Address =
Msg 1/Msg 2
Mounting 1 Space in SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard
Observe static-sensitive material handling practices. Operational Environment
Temperature 32 to 100 °F (0 to 38 °C)
Humidity 0 to 93% RH
Weight 0.18 lb (0.08 kg)
1 Plug the SIGA-MDM 2 Secure the module to
into any available the motherboard with
position on the the captive screws.
motherboard. SIGA-MDM
NORMAL
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 MSG
1
2 SDC
TB1 TB2 CLIP
ACTIVE

MIC.
DM DULE

LINE REC.
1 NORMAL 1 NORMAL
O
Y
HNOLOG

MSG MSG MIC./LINE

SIG GE M

2 2
D

SDC SDC
S TEC

RE LIMITE
A-M
SYSTEM

TB7 PLAY
A

V X.

ACTIVE ACTIVE
IN
S

CLIP CLIP
N
SS
EDWARD

LATIR RATI 7470 ER

ATIO
W

4
RM D

HEAD
CA L ME

INFO AN
PO

MIC. MIC.
O.

NG

3
R TOUITS

LINE REC. LINE REC.

38

P1
T. N

P2
ITA

PHONES
RE CIRC

2
ON

MIC./LINE MIC./LINE
FE
DIG

FO
L

1
AL

AL

PLAY PLAY
INST

IN IN
HEAD HEAD TB15
4
PHONES PHONES
3
2
TB8 TB9 1

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

INSTALLATION SHEET:

SIGA-MDM
Signature Digital Message Module
Notes
INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387470 FILE NAME: 387470.CDR
1 These instructions apply to any SIGA-UIO(R) series
motherboard. REVISION LEVEL: 1.1 APPROVED BY: P. Decker
2 The motherboard shown above is a SIGA-UIO2R. DATE: 08/21/98 CREATED BY: M. Rimes
3 See the applicable installation sheets for detailed wire GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
routing information on the different SIGA-UIO(R) series A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
motherboards. GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 WIRING

Single Cascaded Audio Riser

Audio Preamp Riser
UL/ULC
IN OUT Listed
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
47 kΩ
1 4
4 EOL

TB1 TB2

Notes
1 NORMAL 1 NORMAL
To MSG
2
SDC
MSG
2
SDC
Signature 4 ACTIVE ACTIVE
CLIP CLIP
Loop TB7
Do not install on the first/single
Controller + 4
MIC. MIC. 1
REC. REC. SIGA-MDM audio preamp riser.
(SLC) _ 3
LINE
P1
MIC./LINE
LINE
P2
MIC./LINE
2
1 IN
PLAY IN
PLAY
2 Jumpers must be installed
HEAD HEAD TB15 on all downstream SIGA-MDM
4
_ 24 Vdc To modules.
PHONES PHONES
3 + Other Loads
2
3 Remove suitcase jumpers.
TB8 TB9 1 5

4 Supervised and power limited.

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Supervised and power limited if

3
connected to a power limited
source. If the source is non-
Downstream
1 4 power limited, power limited
_ Jumper
_ marking shall be eliminated.
+ +
To Other 2 4 24 Vdc 6 All wiring must be within the
SIGA Devices From Power Supply same room.

Separate Audio Risers

Audio Preamp
Riser 1 Out UL/ULC
IN Listed
Audio Preamp 47 kΩ
Riser 2 Out EOL
1 4 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

TB1 TB2

To MSG
1
2
NORMAL
MSG
1
2
NORMAL

Signature 4 SDC SDC

Loop TB7 CLIP

ACTIVE
CLIP
ACTIVE

Controller + MIC. MIC.

4 LINE REC. LINE REC.
(SLC) _ 3
P1
MIC./LINE
P2
MIC./LINE
2
1 PLAY PLAY
IN
HEAD
IN
HEAD
TB15 Wire Stripping Guide
4
_ 24 Vdc To
PHONES PHONES
3 + Other Loads Strip 1/4" from the ends of ALL wires that
2 connect to the terminal blocks of the
TB8 TB9 1 5 motherboard.

1/4" (6.4 mm)

1 2 3 4 3 1 2 3 4
Caution:
Downstream Exposing more than 1/4" of wire may
Jumper cause a ground fault.
_ 1 4
+ _ Exposing less than 1/4" of wire may result
To Other 2 4
+ in a faulty connection.
SIGA Devices 24 Vdc
From Power Supply

387470.CDR Page 2 of 2
 SIGA-MIO
Input/Output Module

Product description Warnings

• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury
or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the
terminals even when power is shut off.
• This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
• This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.

Personality codes
System controller compatibility
Signature Series modules require personality codes,
downloaded from the Signature loop controller, to determine
their operational features. The Input/Output Module is
compatible with the personality codes described below.
Personality code 31 (factory default): N.O. relay output
The Input/Output Module is an intelligent analog-addressable
with monitor input
component of Signature Series. The Input/Output Module
requires one module address and provides the following Personality code 31 configures the Input/Output Module as a
modes of operation: normally-open output relay contact that requires a maintained
dry contact input activation. The activation must take place
• Output with monitor input (personality codes 31 and 32)
within a time period defined by the user (15 second default, 5
• Input/programmable output (personality codes 33 to 120 second selectable) after the output circuit activation. If
through 40) the fire alarm control panel does not receive a monitor input
within the specified time, it will generate a trouble condition.
Personality codes downloaded to the Input/Output Module
during system configuration determine its function. The Personality code 32: N.C. relay output with monitor input
Signature loop controller automatically assigns an address to
Personality code 32 operates the same as personality code 31,
the Input/Output Module, but it will accept custom address
except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry-
assignments from a laptop computer.
contact relay.

Specifications Personality code 33: N.O. relay output with alarm latching
input (Class B)
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Personality code 33 configures the Input/Output Module as a
Current
normally-open, dry-contact relay and an alarm latching input
Standby: 250 mA
for Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact of
Activated: 430 mA
the initiating device changes state, the I/O module sends an
Contact ratings (pilot duty) alarm signal to the Signature loop controller and the alarm
24 Vdc: 2 A condition is latched at the module. The output must be
120 AC: 0.5 A programmed to be activated by the panel.
Relay type: Form A or B
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) Personality code 34: N.C. relay output with alarm latching
EOL (end-of-line) resistor: UL/ULC listed 47 kW input (Class B)
Max. circuit resistance: 50 W (25 W per wire)
Personality code 34 operates the same as personality code 33,
Max. circuit capacitance: 0.1 mF except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry-
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) contact relay.
Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C) Personality code 35: N.O. relay output with delayed alarm
Construction: High impact engineering polymer latching input (Class B)
Mounting: UIO2R or UIO6R motherboard
Personality code 35 configures the Input/Output Module as a
Shipping weight: 0.22 lb (0.10 kg)
normally-open, dry-contact relay and an alarm latching input
for Class B contact initiating devices. This personality requires
that a change in the state of the initiating device be maintained
for approximately 16 seconds before the I/O module sends an
alarm signal to the Signature loop controller. The alarm

Installation Sheet 12JUN02 P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module 1/4
condition is latched at the module, and the output must be LEDs
programmed to be activated by the panel. Personality code 35
is only for use with non-retarded, normally-open waterflow Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the
alarm switches. module.
Personality code 36: N.C. relay output with delayed alarm Status LED indicator
latching input (Class B)
Normal/Trouble Green LED flashes
Personality code 36 operates the same as personality code 35,
except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry- Active/Alarm Red LED flashes
contact relay. Personality code 36 is only for use with non-
retarded, normally-closed waterflow alarm switches.
Installation instructions
Personality code 37: N.O. relay output with active non-
latching input (Class B)
Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.
Personality code 37 configures the Input/Output Module as a
normally-open, dry-contact relay and an active latching input
for Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact of Note: The factory ships the Input/Output Module as an
the initiating device changes state, the I/O module sends an assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
active signal to the Signature loop controller. The active signal should not be disassembled.
does not latch, and restores when the input device returns to To install the Input/Output module:
its normal state. The output must be programmed to be
activated by the panel. Personality code 37 is typically used for 1. Install the Signature motherboard (UIO2R or UIO6R). See
monitoring normally-open fans, dampers, doors, etc. the motherboard installation sheet for more information.
Personality codes 38: N.C. relay output with active non- 2. Plug the Input/Output Module into any available position
latching input (Class B) on the Signature motherboard.
Personality code 38 operates the same as personality code 37, 3. Secure the module to the motherboard with the two
except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry- captive screws on the module.
contact relay. Personality code 38 is typically used for
monitoring normally-closed fans, dampers, doors, etc. 4. Wire the module according to the instructions in the wiring
diagram.
Personality code 39: N.O. relay output with active latching
input (Class B) 5. Write the address assigned to the module on the label and
apply it to the module.
Personality code 39 configures the Input/Output Module as a
normally-open, dry-contact relay and an active latching input 6. Remove the bar-coded serial number label from the
for Class B contact initiating devices. When the input contact of module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial
the initiating device changes state, the I/O module sends an number log book.
active signal to the Signature loop controller and the active
condition is latched at the module. The output must be
programmed to be activated by the panel.
Personality code 40: N.C. relay output with active latching
input (Class B)
Personality code 40 operates the same as personality code 39,
except that the output is configured as a normally-closed, dry-
contact relay.

P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0 12JUN02 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module
Wiring diagram

[5]

[1] [2] [4]

TB1 through TB6
Green LED (Normal/Trouble) Input/Output Module
Red LED (Active/Alarm) 123 4
Signature Series motherboard (UIO2R or UIO6R)
[3][4]

Data In

4
Signature 3
Data 2
Circuit 1
TB7
Data Out
4
3 No connections required for SIGA-MIO.
2 Other modules may require connections.
1
TB15
Remove motherboard jumpers

123 4
TB8 through TB13

[6][7] Dry contact relay

Input/Output Module (personality codes 31 - 40)

Notes [7] Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limited

source. If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the
[1] Maximum 25 W resistance per wire. Maximum circuit power-limited mark and:
capacitance of 0.1 mF.
• Maintain a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) space from power-limited
[2] 10 Vdc @ 350 mA, max wiring.
[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for or
wiring specifications.
• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in
[4] Supervised and power-limited accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
[5] UL/ULC listed 47 kW EOL [8] See the UIO2R or UIO6R installation sheet for additional
[6] System programming determines whether contact will be instructions about the separation of power-limited and
normally-open (N/O) or normally-closed (N/C) nonpower-limited wiring

Installation Sheet 12JUN02 P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module 3/4
P/N: 387350 REV: 2.0 12JUN02 Installation Sheet
4/4 SIGA-MIO - Input/Output Module
 SIGA-MM1
Monitor Module

Product description Specifications

Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 250 µA
Activated current: 400 µA
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
8 7 Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
Compatible electrical boxes
North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
1-gang cover
4 3 2 1 Initiating device circuit (IDC)
EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
Max. circuit capacitance (per channel): 0.1 µF

Installation instructions
The SIGA-MM1 Dual Input Module is a component of the Note: The SIGA-MM1 is shipped from the factory as an
Signature Series. The SIGA-MM1 is an analog addressable assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
device used to connect a Class B normally open monitor type should not be disassembled.
dry contact initiating device circuit (IDC) to a Signature loop
controller. One device address is required. To install the module:
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-MM1 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the ground faults.
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the diagram.
module when the cover plate is removed:
3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
• Normal: green LED flashes provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes removable serial number label from the module and apply
Mounting it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.

The SIGA-MM1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in 4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
Notes
System controller compatibility
1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
The SIGA-MM1 requires the Signature loop controller. electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
Personality code 3: N.O. active non-latching (Class B): A 2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
contact closure causes an active signal instead of an alarm the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.
signal and does NOT latch at the module. Personality code 3 is
typically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc. 3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code.
Warnings Wire stripping guide
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection 1/4 in (~6 mm)
specialist.
2. This module does not support conventional smoke Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
detectors. connect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0

SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module 1/4
 Compatible electrical box

Wall plate, white

(1-gang)

Wiring diagram

Style B (Class B)
[1] [2] [4]
Typical N.O.
TB2
initiating device
8 7
UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller To next device

[3]
or previous device

Notes [4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA

[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire 5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG 6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors
(0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for
wiring specifications

P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module
 SIGA-MM1
Module Moniteur

Description de produit Caractéristiques

Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
Courant de veille: 250 µA
Courant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µA
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR
Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
8 7
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts
Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de
profondeur
Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2
po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple
Circuit de déclenchement (IDC)
4 3 2 1
Résistance FDL: 47 KΩ, répertoriée UL
Résistance de circuit maximum (par canal): 50 Ω (25 Ω par fil)
Capacité de circuit maximum (par canal): 0,1 µF

Installation
Le Module Moniteur SIGA-MM1 est un composant du système série Note: Le SIGA-MM1 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne
Signature. Le SIGA-MM1 est un dispositif adressable analogique contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être
utilisé pour relier un Circuit de déclenchement (IDC, Initiating Device démonté.
Circuit) à contact sec normalement ouvert de classe B de type
moniteur, à un contrôleur de boucle Signature. Une adresse de Pour installer le module:
dispositif est nécessaire.
1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts
Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement une adresse au
de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.
SIGA-MM1 ou une adresse particulière peut être assignée au module
via ordinateur portatif ; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est utilisé. 2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du module 3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et
lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée: coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette
de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le
• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote
registre des numéros de série.
• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote
4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 1/2 po. (13 mm) fournie,
Montage monter la plaque murale sur le module.

Le SIGA-MM1 peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nord 5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies,
simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîte monter le module dans la boîte électrique.
carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur
Notes
avec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0,
et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de 1. Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, le
0,75 mm carrés sont préférables. conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique que
par une débouchure seulement.
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système
2. Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, le
Le SIGA-MM1 est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs de
conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par une
boucle Signature.
débouchure ou par les deux.
Code de personnalité 3: non verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B):
3. Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National Electric
La fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un état
Code.
d’alarme et NE verrouille PAS au niveau du module. Le code de
personnalité 3 est habi-tuellement utilisé pour la surveillance des Dénudage des fils
ventilateurs, des registres, des portes, etc.

Avertissements ~6 mm (1/4 po)

1. Ce module ne fonctionne pas en l’absence de courant électrique.
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant,
Dénuder l’extrémité de tous les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4
nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local
po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.
de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Attention: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquer
2. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée
un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courte
conventionnels.
peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0

SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module 3/4
 Boîte électrique compatible

Plaque murale, blanche

(simple standard)

Schéma de câblage

Style B (Classe B)
[1] [2] [4]

TB2 Dispositif de
8 7
déclenchement
N.O. typique FDL 47 KΩ,
répertoriée
UL/ULC
Témoin à DEL
rouge Témoin à DEL
(Alarme/Actif) 4 3 2 1
vert (Normal)

TB1

ENTRÉE DES (+) (+) SORTIE DES

DONNÉES DONNÉES
(–) (–)
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature
Au dispositif suivant
ou du dispositif précédent [3]

Notes [4] Maximum 10 Vcc à 350 µA

[1] Résistance maximum: 25 Ω par fil 5. Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage
[2] Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75 6. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée à deux fils
mm carrés (AWG 18)
[3] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
Signature pour obtenir les spécifications du câblage

P/N: 387057P REV: 7.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-MM1 - Monitor Module
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The MP1 mounting plate allows for the installation of Signature Series Size: 9.25 in x 6.25 in (L x W)
modules. Any combination of four (4) CC1, CC2, or UM large
Material: 1/8 in aluminum
modules or eight (8) CT1, CT2 CR, MM1, or WTM small modules can
be mounted on the MP1. Weight: .6 lb. (.27kg)
The MP1 is a flat aluminum plate that mounts in any standard full Mounting: 1 standard module footprint
footprint OPTION module position in standard enclosures. The
Module Spaces Available:
mounting plate removes the need for gang boxes and provides the
ease of mounting needed equipment in a common enclosure. Large 4
Small 8

WARNINGS

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE INSTALLING

OR REMOVING THE MP1

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Mounting modules to the MP1
1. The black metal mounting frame that comes standard with all
modules MUST be removed. Squeeze the snap-on tabs that
extend from the back of the modules and remove the black
metal frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)
2. Pop the snap-on tabs on the modules into the openings on the
MP1. When the snap-on tabs are completely pushed in, they will
lock into place. (Refer to Figure 2.)
Mounting the MP1
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
1. Mount the MP1 in a standard enclosure. The MP1 requires one
standard full footprint and mounts in any OPTION module
position using #6 screws. (Refer to Figure 3.)
2. Wire modules per the appropriate installation sheets.

Figure 1

INSTALLATION SHEET

MODULE SNAP-ON SIGA-MP1

TABS Mounting Plate

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387160 FILE NAME: 387160.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 11FEB00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes
BLACK METAL
FRAME EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2, Mounting Module to MP1

MODU
LE
MP1

Figure 3, Mounting MP1 to Enclosure Backplate

ENCLOSURE BACKPLATE

Standoffs

TB3 TB3
10 9 10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB1 TB1

MP1
WITH MODULES
TB3 TB3
#6 Screws 10 9
10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB1 TB1

P/N: 387160 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
La plaque de montage MP1 permet l'installation de modules de la
Dimensions: 23,495 cm x 15,875 cm (9,25 po x 6,25 po) (L x l)
série Signature. Toute combinaison de quatre (4) modules (large)
CC1, CC2, UM ou de huit (8) modules (petit) CT1, CT2, CR, MM1 ou Matériau: Aluminium 3,175 mm (1/8 po)
WTM peut être installés sur la plaque MP1.
Poids: 0,27 kg (0,6 livre)
Le plaque de montage MP1 est en aluminium mince qui se monte
Montage: 1 encombrement de module standard
dans un espace complet standard pour les modules optionnels dans
nos boîtiers de contrôle standard. La plaque de montage élimine le Espaces de module disponibles:
besoin d'ajouter des boîtiers électriques externes et facilite le
Grand 4
montage d'équipement dans nos boîtiers communs.
Petit 8

AVERTISSEMENTS
COUPER LA TENSION AVANT D’INSTALLER
OU D’ENLEVER LA MP1

MODE D’INSTALLATION
Montage des modules sur la MP1
1. Le cadre du montage en métal noir qui est standard avec tous
les modules DOIT être enlevé. Presser sur les onglets
encliquetables qui se pro-longent vers l’avant depuis l’arrière
des modules et enlever le cadre en métal noir. (Se référer à la
figure 1.)
2. Passer les onglets encliquetables sur les modules dans les
ouvertures sur la MP1. Lorsque les onglets encliquetables sont
complètement enfoncés, ils se bloquent à leur place. (Se référer
à la figure 2.)
Montage de la MP1
SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT
1. Monter la MP1 dans une enceinte standard. La MP1 requiert un
encombrement plein standard et se monte dans n’importe quelle
position de module OPTIONNEL en utilisant des vis n0 6. (Se
référer à la figure 3.)
2. Câblez les modules selon les fiches d’installation appropriées.

Figure 1

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

SIGA-MP1
MODULE ONGLETS
Plaque de montage
ENCLIQUETABLES
FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : 387160 NOM DU FICHIER : 387160.CDR
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 2.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE: 11FEB00 CRÉÉ PAR : S. Hawes

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.

CADRE DE SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
MÉTAL NOIR CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 INSTALLATION MÉCANIQUE
Figure 2, Montage d’un module sur la MP1

MODU
LE
MP1

Figure 3, Montage de la MP1 à la plaque arrière de l'enceinte

PLAQUE ARRIÈRE DE L'ENCEINTE

Entretoises

TB3 TB3
10 9 10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB1 TB1

MP1
WITH MODULES
TB3 TB3
#6 Screws 10 9
10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB1 TB1

P/N: 387160 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The MP2 mounting plate allows for the installation of Signature Series Size: 8.25 in x 2.75 in (L x W)
modules. Any combination of two (2) CC1, CC2, or UM large modules
Material: 1/8 in aluminum
or four (4) CT1, CT2 CR, MM1, or WTM small modules can be
mounted on the MP2. Weight: .45 lb. (.2kg)
The MP2 is a flat aluminum plate that mounts in any standard ½ Mounting: ½ standard module footprint
footprint OPTION module position on the inside, left or right side of a
Module Spaces Available:
standard enclosure. The mounting plate removes the need for gang
boxes and provides the ease of mounting needed equipment in a Large 2
common enclosure.
Small 4

WARNINGS

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE INSTALLING

OR REMOVING THE MP2

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Mounting modules to the MP2
1. The black metal mounting frame that comes standard with all
modules MUST be removed. Squeeze the snap-on tabs that
extend from the back of the modules and remove the black
metal frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)
2. Pop the snap-on tabs on the modules into the openings on the
MP2. When the snap-on tabs are completely pushed in, they will
lock into place. (Refer to Figure 2.)
Mounting the MP2
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
1. Mount the MP2 in a standard enclosure. The MP2 requires one
½ standard module footprint. The appropriate positions are
located on the inside, left/right side of the enclosure.
2. Snap the MP2 onto the two (2) stand-offs located on the left or
right side of the enclosure. Either side is adequate, depending
on the enclosure setup. (Refer to Figure 3.)
3. Wire modules per the appropriate installation sheets.

Figure 1

INSTALLATION SHEET

MODULE SNAP-ON SIGA-MP2

TABS Mounting Plate

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387161 FILE NAME: 387161.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 11FEB00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes
BLACK METAL
FRAME EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2, Mounting Module to MP2

MP2

MODU
LE

Figure 3, Mounting MP2 to Enclosure

Standard ½ Footprint Module Space

TYPICAL ENCLOSURE

MP2
Mounting Plate

Standoffs

Standard Standard
½ Footprint ½ Footprint
Module Space Module Space

Modules

Standoffs

P/N: 387161 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
La plaque de montage MP2 permet l'installation de modules de la
Dimensions: 20,955 cm x 6,985 cm (8,25 po x 2,75 po) (L x l)
série Signature. Toute combinaison de deux (2) modules (large) CC1,
CC2, UM ou de quatre (4) modules (petit) CT1, CT2, CR, MM1 ou Matériau: Aluminium 3,175 mm (1/8 po)
WTM peut être installés sur la plaque MP2.
Poids: 0,2 kg (0,45 livre)
La plaque de montage MP2 est en aluminium mince qui se monte
Montage: ½ encombrement de module standard
dans un demi-espace standard pour les modules optionnels, du côté
gauche ou droit dans nos boîtiers de contrôle standard. La plaque de Espaces de module disponibles:
montage élimine le besoin d'ajouter des boîtiers électriques externes
Grand 2
et facilite le montage d'équipement dans nos boîtiers communs.
Petit 4

AVERTISSEMENTS
COUPER LA TENSION AVANT
D’INSTALLER OU D’ENLEVER LA MP2

MODE D’INSTALLATION
Montage des modules sur la MP2
1. Le cadre du montage en métal noir qui est standard avec tous
les modules DOIT être enlevé. Presser sur les onglets
encliquetables qui se pro-longent vers l’avant depuis l’arrière
des modules et enlever le cadre en métal noir. (Se référer à la
figure 1.)
2. Passer les onglets encliquetables sur les modules dans les
ouvertures sur la MP2. Lorsque les onglets encliquetables sont
complètement enfoncés, ils se bloquent à leur place. (Se référer
à la figure 2.)
Montage de la MP2
SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT
1. Monter la MP2 dans une enceinte standard. La MP2 requiert un
demi encombrement de module standard et se monte dans
n’importe quelle position de module OPTIONNEL. Les positions
appropriées sont situées à l’intérieur, du côté gauche/droit de
l’enceinte.
2. Mettre la MP2 sur les deux (2) entretoises situées à l’intérieur du
côté gauche ou du côté droit de l’enceinte. L’un ou l’autre
convient, le choix dépend de la configuration de l’enceinte. (Se
référer à la figure 3.)
3. Câblez les modules selon les fiches d’installation appropriées.

Figure 1

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

SIGA-MP2
MODULE ONGLETS
Plaque de montage
ENCLIQUETABLES
FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : 387161 NOM DU FICHIER : 387161.CDR
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 2.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE: 11FEB00 CRÉÉ PAR : S. Hawes

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.

CADRE DE SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
MÉTAL NOIR CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 INSTALLATION MÉCANIQUE
Figure 2, Montage d’un module sur la MP2

MP2
MODU
LE

Figure 3, Montage de la MP2 à l’enceinte

Espace module égal à ½ encombrement standard

ENCEINTE TYPIQUE

Plaque de montage
MP2

Entretoises

Espace module Espace module

d’1/2 encombrement d’1/2 encombrement
standard standard

Modules

Entretoises

P/N: 387161 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The MP2L mounting plate allows for the installation of Signature Size: 11.8 in x 2.75 in (L x W)
Series modules. Any combination of three (3) CC1, CC2, or UM large
Material: 1/8 in aluminum
modules or six (6) CT1, CT2 CR, MM1, or WTM small modules can
be mounted on the MP2L. Weight: .3 lb. (.14kg)
The MP2L is a flat aluminum plate that mounts in any standard ½ Mounting: ½ standard module footprint
footprint OPTION module position on the inside, left or right side of a
Module Spaces Available:
standard enclosure. The mounting plate removes the need for gang
boxes and provides the ease of mounting needed equipment in a Large 3
common enclosure.
Small 6

WARNINGS

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE INSTALLING

OR REMOVING THE MP2L

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Mounting modules to the MP2L
1. The black metal mounting frame that comes standard with all
modules MUST be removed. Squeeze the snap-on tabs that
extend from the back of the modules and remove the black
metal frame. (Refer to Figure 1.)
2. Pop the snap-on tabs on the modules into the openings on the
MP2L. When the snap-on tabs are completely pushed in, they
will lock into place. (Refer to Figure 2.)
Mounting the MP2L
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
1. Mount the MP2L in a standard enclosure. The MP2L requires
one ½ standard module footprint and mounts in any OPTION
module position. The appropriate positions are located on the
inside, left/right side of the enclosure.
2. Snap the MP2L onto the two (2) stand-offs located on the left or
right side of the enclosure. Either side is adequate, depending
on the enclosure setup. (Refer to Figure 3.)
3. Wire modules per the appropriate installation sheets.

Figure 1

INSTALLATION SHEET

MODULE SNAP-ON SIGA-MP2L

TABS Mounting Plate

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387162 FILE NAME: 387162.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 11FEB00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes
BLACK METAL
FRAME EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 2, Mounting Module to MP2L

MP2L
MODU
LE

Figure 3, Mounting MP2L to Enclosure

Standard ½ Footprint Module Space

TYPICAL ENCLOSURE

MP2L
Mounting Plate

Standoffs

Standard Standard
½ Footprint ½ Footprint
Module Space Module Space

Modules

Standoffs

P/N: 387162 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
La plaque de montage MP2L permet l'installation de modules de la
Dimensions: 29,972 cm x 6,985 cm (11,8 po x 2,75 po) (L x l)
série Signature. Toute combinaison de trois (3) modules (large) CC1,
CC2, UM ou de six (6) modules (petit) CT1, CT2, CR, MM1 ou WTM Matériau: Aluminium 3,175 mm (1/8 po)
peut être installés sur la plaque MP2L.
Poids: 0,14 kg (0,3 livre)
La plaque de montage MP2L est en aluminium mince qui se monte
Montage: 1/2 encombrement de module standard
dans un demi-espace standard pour les modules optionnels, du côté
gauche ou droit dans nos boîtiers de contrôle standard. La plaque de Espaces de module disponibles:
montage élimine le besoin d'ajouter des boîtiers électriques externes
Grand 3
et facilite le montage d'équipement dans nos boîtiers communs.
Petit 6

AVERTISSEMENTS
COUPER LA TENSION AVANT D’INSTALLER
OU D’ENLEVER LA MP2L

MODE D’INSTALLATION
Montage des modules sur la MP2L
1. Le cadre du montage en métal noir qui est standard avec tous
les modules DOIT être enlevé. Presser sur les onglets
encliquetables qui se pro-longent vers l’avant depuis l’arrière
des modules et enlever le cadre en métal noir. (Se référer à la
figure 1.)
2. Passer les onglets encliquetables sur les modules dans les
ouvertures sur la MP2L. Lorsque les onglets encliquetables sont
complètement enfoncés, ils se bloquent à leur place. (Se référer
à la figure 2.)
Montage de la MP2L
SCHÉMA DU PRODUIT
1. Monter la MP2L dans une enceinte standard. La MP2L requiert
un demi encombrement de module standard et se monte dans
n’importe quelle position de module OPTIONNEL. Les positions
appropriées sont situées à l’intérieur, du côté gauche/droit de
l’enceinte.
2. Mettre la MP2L sur les deux (2) entretoises situées à l’intérieur
du côté gauche ou du côté droit de l’enceinte. L’un ou l’autre
convient, le choix dépend de la configuration de l’enceinte. (Se
référer à la figure 3.)
3. Câblez les modules selon les fiches d’installation appropriées.

Figure 1

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

SIGA-MP2L
MODULE ONGLETS
Plaque de montage
ENCLIQUETABLES
FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : 387162 NOM DU FICHIER : 387162.CDR
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 2.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE: 11FEB00 CRÉÉ PAR : S. Hawes

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.

CADRE DE SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
MÉTAL NOIR CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 INSTALLATION MÉCANIQUE
Figure 2, Montage d’un module sur la MP2L

MP2L
MODU
LE

Figure 3, Montage de la MP2L à l’enceinte

Espace module égal à ½ encombrement standard

ENCEINTE TYPIQUE

Plaque de montage
MP2L

Entretoises

Espace module Espace module

d’1/2 encombrement d’1/2 encombrement
standard standard

Modules

Entretoises

P/N: 387162 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 SIGA-MRM1
Riser Monitor Module

Product description Warnings

• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury
or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the
terminals even when power is shut off.
• This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
• This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.

Personality codes
System controller compatibility
The Riser Monitor Module is an intelligent analog-addressable
component of Signature Series. The Riser Monitor Module Signature Series modules require personality codes,
requires one module address and monitors the integrity of: downloaded from the Signature loop controller, to determine
their operational features. The Riser Monitor Module is
• 12 and 24 Vdc circuits compatible with personality codes 23 and 24, which are
• 25 Vac circuits described below.
• 70 Vac circuits
• Telephone riser signals Personality code 23: Riser monitor (factory default)
Upon the loss of a signal, the fire alarm control panel indicates Personality code 23 configures the Riser Monitor Module to
an alert status. monitor 70 Vac audio, 25 Vac audio, or 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc
risers. A trouble condition is reported back to the panel
Personality codes downloaded to the Riser Monitor Module wherever the voltage on the riser drops below the trouble
during system configuration determine its function. The threshold.
Signature loop controller automatically assigns an address to
the Riser Monitor Module, but it will accept custom address Note: The hardware jumper on the Riser Monitor Module must
assignments from a laptop computer. be configured for either 70 Vac or 25 Vac / 24 Vdc / 12 Vdc.
Personality code 24: Telephone riser monitor
Specifications
Personality code 24 configures the Riser Monitor Module to
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc monitor telephone risers. A trouble condition is reported back
Maximum input voltages to the panel whenever voltage on the riser drops below the
Riser monitor: 12 Vdc + 15%, 24 Vdc + 10%, trouble threshold.
25 Vac + 15%, 70 Vac + 15%
Telephone: 3.75 to 28 Vdc The delay time from when the device falls below the trouble
Current threshold to when it sends a trouble signal to the panel is user
Standby: 200 mA definable in the appropriate data entry program. A delay of 5 to
75 seconds can be assigned to the device; the default delay
Activated: 200 mA
period is 15 seconds.
Input currents
12 Vdc: 10 mA DC
24 Vdc: 10 mA DC Installation instructions
25 Vac: 10 mA RMS
70 Vac: 10 mA RMS
Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.
Telephone 24 Vdc: 20 mA DC
Riser loading
70 Vac: Impedance > 11 kW Note: The factory ships the Riser Monitor Module as an
25 Vac: Impedance > 1 kW assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
24 Vdc: Resistance > 2.4 kW should not be disassembled.
12 Vdc: Resistance > 1.2 kW To install the Riser Monitor Module:
Telephone: Resistance > 1.2 kW, Impedance > 1.2 kW
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C) 1. Install the Signature motherboard (UIO2R, UIO6, or
Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH UIO6R). See the motherboard installation sheet for more
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C) information.
Construction: High impact engineering polymer
Mounting: Signature Series motherboard 2. Plug the Riser Monitor Module into any available position
Shipping weight: 0.22 lb (0.10 kg) on the Signature motherboard.

Installation Sheet 12JUN02 P/N: 387354 REV: 2.0

SIGA-MRM1 - Riser Monitor Module 1/2
3. Secure the module to the motherboard with the two Jumper setup
captive screws on the module.
4. Wire the module according to the instructions in the wiring Jumper Riser
diagram.
12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, 70 Vac Telephone
5. Write the address assigned to the module on the label and or 25 Vac
apply it to the module.
JP1 Out In Out
6. Remove the bar-coded serial number label from the
JP2 In Out Out
module and apply it to the appropriate location in the serial
number log book.

Wiring diagram

12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser from power +

supply or audio amplifier (not polarity sensitive) _ Telephone riser from telephone controller
[7]

[6] Green LED [3] [1]

1 23 4 Riser Monitor Module
Signature Series motherboard
[1] (UIO2R, UIO6, or UIO6R)
[2]
Data in 4
3 [4]
2
4 1
Signature 3
data TB14
2 No connections required on
circuit 1 the Riser Monitor Module.
TB7 Other modules may require
See Jumper setup connections.
Data out
JP2 4
3
JP1
2
1
TB15
[5] No connections required
123 4

Notes [4] The UIO6R and the UIO2R do not come with TB14.
[1] Supervised and power-limited. [5] The UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13.
[2] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for [6] Active when communicating with the Signature loop
wiring specifications. controller.
[3] Supervised and power-limited unless connected to a [7] You cannot use the telephone riser while you use the 12
nonpower-limited source. If the source is nonpower- and 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser.
limited, eliminate the power-limited mark and:
[8] See the UIO2R or UIO6(R) installation sheet for additional
• Maintain a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) space from power-limited instructions about the separation of power-limited and
wiring. nonpower-limited wiring.
or
• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in
accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code.

P/N: 387354 REV: 2.0 12JUN02 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-MRM1 - Riser Monitor Module
 SIGA-PHS
Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector

Product description Warnings

1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards
with your local fire protection specialist.
Tamper-reist lever arm
Break off to disable 2. This detector will not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot
(located on base) reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the
opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3. Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities,
Access slot for tamper- and are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat
resist mechanism sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental
information to that provided by the photoelectric smoke sensor.
The heat sensor by itself does not provide life safety protection.
4. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
accordance with the requirements of the authority having
Description: The Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector (SIGA- jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC
PHS) is part of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device Standard CAN 536.
contains a photoelectric smoke sensor and a fixed-temperature heat 5. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on
sensor. The detector analyzes the data from both sensing devices and the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
determines whether an alarm should be initiated. operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning 6. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need for recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
service while the detector still operates within UL/ULC limits. temperature before applying power.
LEDs: The SIGA-PHS has two LEDs that show its status. 7. Under normal conditions this unit does not require calibration. If
• Normal: Green LED flashes calibration is required, call Customer Service at 1-800-655-4497 to
• Alarm/active: Red LED flashes arrange for return to the factory.
• Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously See Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for cleaning instructions.
Electronic Addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns 8. Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Stand-Alone Operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the Installation instructions
detector alarms when smoke levels exceed a preset value. See the
applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capability. 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while
rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector.
Self-Diagnostics: The SIGA-PHS contains a microprocessor capable Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism
of performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in nonvolatile 2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired.
3. Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet
supplied with the base.
Specifications
4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
Normal operating current: 45 µA
5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise
Alarm current: 45 µA
until it snaps into the locked position.
Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
Air velocity: 0 to 5,000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s) 6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed
ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity range: 0.67 to 3.77% obsc/ft (305 mm) upon completion of the original installation and following any
ULI fixed-temp. alarm rating: 135 °F (57 °C) modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can
ULC fixed-temp. alarm rating: 140 °F (60 °C) perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.
Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C)
Operating environment 7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of
Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C) CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm
Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
Environmental compensation: Automatic
8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
Compatible bases
notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.
Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm)
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387015P REV: 8.0

SIGA-PHS - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector 1/2
 SIGA-PHS
Détecteur 3D multicapteurs intelligent

Informations sur le produit Avertissements

1. Ce dispositif ne fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons
aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les
incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Levier de verrouillage
- Casser pour mettre hors
2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un
service - (situé sur la base) endroit où la fumée ne peut pas l'atteindre. La fumée dégagée par un feu à
l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne
pas atteindre le détecteur.

Fente d'accès du 3. Les détecteurs photoélectriques peuvent détecter de nombreux types de feux
mécanisme de verrouillage et offrent une excellente détection des feux couvants à développement lent.
Le capteur thermique de ce dispositif est prévu pour fournir des
renseignements supplémentaires à ceux du cap-teur de fumée. Le capteur
thermique tout seul n’assure pas la pro-tection de vies humaines.

4. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon

fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié con-formément
aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72
Description: Le détecteur de fumée 3D multicapteurs intelligent (SIGA-PHS) est
et CAN/ULC 536.
l’un des composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent
comprend à la fois un capteur photoélectrique de fumée et un capteur thermique 5. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit
à température fixe pour la détection des incendies. Le capteur de fumée être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service
photoélectrique utilise une chambre de détection à captage optique. Le capteur du détecteur. Ce couvercle n'est pas suffisant pour protéger le détecteur lors
thermique à température fixe contrôle la température de l’air environnant. Le de travaux de construction ou de réamé-nagement.
détecteur analyse les données des deux capteurs et détermine ainsi si une
alarme doit être déclenchée. 6. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit
dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser
Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.
l'environnement (en raison de poussières, de fumées, de changements de
température ou d'humidité) et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une 7. Dans les conditions normales ce dispositif ne nécessite pas d'étalonnage. Si
alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du un étalonnage est nécessaire, appelez Service à Clients au 1-800-655-4497
capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur de la nécessité d'un pour dispositions de renvoi à l’usine.
nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de fonctionner dans les
limites UL/ULC. Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage,
se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.
Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-PHS comprend deux témoins à DEL:
• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote 8. Effectuer un essai du détecteur au moyen du dispositif d'essai de détecteur
de fumée et de l'accessoire adaptateur/tube, modèle 1490, fabriqué par
• Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote
Home Safeguard Inc.
• Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins allumés de façon continue

Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement des

adresses aux détecteurs ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées aux Modes d’installation
détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est utilisé.
1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente
Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tour-nant le détecteur dans le
contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de fumée sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de
dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau de contrôle verrouillage peut être mis définitive-ment hors service en cassant et en
d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement autonome. enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.

Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-PHS contient un microprocesseur capable 2. Se référer à la brochure technique pour les instruc-tions d'installation.
d'effectuer une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser
3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui
les résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement,
l'accompagne.
la dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et
des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces 4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller
statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment. à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des
Caractéristiques techniques aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc 6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin
Courant de veille: 45 µA d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le Série
Courant d'alarme: 45 µA Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de
Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA sensibilité.
Vitesses de l air: 0 à 25,39 m/sec (0 à 5.000 pi/min)
Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,67 à 3,77% obsc/pi (305 mm) 7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit
Seuil de température fixe ULI: 57 ºC (135 ºF) être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur
Seuil de température fixe ULC: 60 ºC (140 ºF) L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes
Point d alarme réel: 54 à 60 ºC (130 à 140 ºF) locales.
Environnement de fonctionnement
Température: 0 à 38 ºC (32 à 100 ºF) 8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle anti-poussières du détecteur et notifier
Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme
Compensation/environnement: Automatique d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.
Bases compatibles
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)
Température de stockage: -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

P/N: 387015P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-PHS - Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector
 PRODUCT INFORMATION temperature before applying power.
7) Under normal conditions, this unit does not require calibration.
However, if calibration is required, return to:
Description: The Intelligent 3D Multisensor Smoke Detector (PHSI) GS Building Systems Corporation
is part of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device contains North Main Street
a photoelectric smoke sensor and a fixed-temperature heat sensor. Pittsfield, ME 04967-1500
The detector analyzes the data from both sensing devices and
determines whether an alarm should be initiated. See the Technical Bulletin for cleaning instructions.
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity and notifies 8) Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
the loop controller of its condition. It issues a dirty-sensor warning Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
when it reaches a preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need
for service while the detector still operates.
LEDs: The PHSI has two LEDs that show its status.
Normal: Green LED flashes
Alarm/active: Red LED flashes SPECIFICATIONS
Standalone alarm: Green and red LEDs glow continuously
Electronic Addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns Operating voltage range: 15.2 - 19.95 Vdc
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to Normal operating current: 45 µA
the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Alarm current: 45 µA
Stand-Alone Operation: If isolated from the loop controller, the Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
detector alarms when smoke levels exceed a preset value. See the Actual alarm point: 130 to 140 °F (54 to 60 °C)
applicable control panel manual to verify standalone capability. Air velocity range: 0 to 5000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s)
Self-Diagnostics: The PHSI contains a microprocessor capable of Operating temperature range: 32 to 100 °F (0 to 38 °C)
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, non-condensing
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile Environmental compensation: Automatic
memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired. Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Compatible bases
Standard: SB, SB4
Relay: RB, RB4
Isolator: IB, IB4, IBS
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Audible: AB4
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Maximum distance from ceiling (wall mounted): 12 in (305 mm)
1) Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while
rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector.
Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism
by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
2) See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
3) Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet
supplied with the base. PRODUCT DIAGRAM
4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book.
5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector
clockwise until it snaps into the locked position.
6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and Tamper-Resist Lever Arm
notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is - Break off to disable -
undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. (Located on Base)

Access Slot for

Tamper-Resist Mechanism
WARNINGS
1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards
with your local fire protection specialist.
2) This detector will NOT sense fires in areas where smoke cannot INSTALLATION SHEET
reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the
opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector. SIGA-PHSI
3) Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities, Intelligent 3D Multisensor
and are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat
sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental Smoke Detector
information to that provided by the photoelectric smoke sensor.
The heat sensor by itself does NOT provide life safety protection. SHEET P/N: P-047550-1899 FILE: P-047550-1899.CDR
4) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. DATE: 28APR99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell
5) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain on
RELATED DOCUMENTS
the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
operation. The dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing the
detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
6) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 SIGA-PS
Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector

Product description Warnings

1. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards
with your local fire protection specialist.
Tamper-reist lever arm 2. This detector will not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot
Break off to disable reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the
(located on base) opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3. Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities,
but are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires.
Access slot for tamper-
resist mechanism 4. Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
accordance with the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. Refer to NFPA 72 and ULC
Standard CAN 536.
5. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the
Description: The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector (SIGA-PS) recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room
is a component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device temperature before applying power.
uses an optical sensing chamber to detect smoke. The detector 6. The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) must remain on
analyzes the sensor data to determine when an alarm is initiated. the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the operation. The dust cover is not a substitute for removing the
environment (e.g. dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the detector during new construction or heavy remodeling.
loop controller of its condition. The SIGA-PS issues a dirty sensor 7. Under normal conditions this unit does not require calibration. If
warning when it reaches its preset limit. This notifies the operator of calibration is required, call Customer Service at 1-800-655-4497 to
the need for service while the detector is still operating within UL/ULC arrange for return to the factory.
limits.
Refer to Technical Bulletin P/N 270145 for additional information
LEDs: The SIGA-PS provides two LEDs that show its status: and cleaning instructions.
• Normal: green LED flashes 8. Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
• Standalone alarm: both LEDs glow continuously
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns Installation instructions
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to the
detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. 1. Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while
rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector.
Standalone operation: If unable to communicate with the loop Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism
controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed its preset by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for
verification of standalone capabilities. 2. See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
Self-diagnostics: The SIGA-PS contains a microprocessor capable of 3. Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. supplied with the base.
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile 4. Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired. apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
5. Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise
Specifications until it snaps into the locked position.

Operating voltage: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc 6. NFPA code requires that a calibrated sensitivity test be performed
Normal operating current: 45 µA upon completion of the original installation and following any
Alarm current: 45 µA modifications or additions to the system. The Signature Series can
Standalone alarm current: 18 mA perform this test and generate a system sensitivity report.
Air velocity: 0 to 5,000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s) 7. In Canada your installation must meet the requirements of
ULI/ULC smoke sensitivity range: 0.67 to 3.77% obsc/ft (305 mm) CAN/ULC-S524-M91: Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm
Operating environment Systems, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
Temperature: 32 to 120° F (0 to 49° C)
Humidity: 93% RH, noncondensing 8. Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
Environmental compensation: Automatic notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
Compatible bases undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relay: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolator: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Audible: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Maximum distance from ceiling wall-mounted: 12 in (305 mm)
Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Installation Sheet 13NOV03 P/N: 387014P REV: 8.0

SIGA-PS - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1/2
 SIGA-PS
Détecteur photoélectrique de fumée intelligent

Informations sur le produit Avertissements

1. Ce dispositif ne fonctionne pas en l'absence de courant électrique. Les
incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant, nous conseillons
aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local de protection contre les
incendies pour la mise en place de systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
Levier de verrouillage 2. Ce détecteur ne peut pas détecter les incendies se déclarant dans un
- Casser pour mettre hors endroit où la fumée ne peut pas l'atteindre. La fumée dégagée par un feu à
service - (situé sur la base) l'intérieur d'un mur, d'un toit ou de l'autre côté de portes fermées peut ne
pas atteindre le détecteur.
3. Les détecteurs photoélectriques peuvent détecter de nombreux types de
Fente d'accès du feux et offrent une excellente détection des feux couvants à développement
mécanisme de verrouillage
lent.
4. Un entretien (régulier ou particulier) est nécessaire pour assurer le bon
fonctionnement du système. Cet entretien doit être planifié conformément
aux exigences des autorités compétentes. Se référer aux normes NFPA 72
et CAN/ULC 536.

Description: Le détecteur photoélectrique de fumée (SIGA-PS) est l’un des 5. Ce détecteur est livré avec un couvercle anti-poussière orange vif qui doit
composants du Série Signature. Ce dispositif analogique intelligent utilise une être laissé en place lors de l'installation puis retiré avant la mise en service
chambre de détection optique pour détecter la présence de fumée. Le capteur du détecteur. Ce couvercle N'est pas suffisant pour protéger le détecteur
recueille des données sur son environnement, puis le détecteur analyse ces lors de travaux de construction ou de réaménagement.
informations et détermine ainsi si une alarme doit être déclenchée.
6. Pour assurer un bon fonctionnement, stocker le détecteur de sorte qu'il soit
Le détecteur contrôle constamment toute modification de sensibilité due à dans les intervalles recommandés. Avant de le mettre sous tension, laisser
l'environnement (en raison de poussières, de fumées, de changements de le détecteur se stabiliser à la température de la pièce.
température ou d'humidité) et informe le contrôleur de boucle de la situation. Une
alarme de capteur sale est émise par le détecteur lorsque l'encrassement du 7. Dans les conditions normales ce dispositif ne nécessite pas d'étalonnage. Si
capteur a atteint une certaine limite. Ceci informe l'opérateur du système de la un étalonnage est nécessaire, appelez Service à Clients au 1-800-655-4497
nécessité d'un nettoyage alors que le détecteur est encore capable de pour dispositions de renvoi à l’usine.
fonctionner dans les limites UL/ULC. Pour des renseignements supplémentaires et les instructions de nettoyage,
Témoins à DEL: Le SIGA-PS comprend deux témoins à DEL indiquant l'état. se référer au Bulletin Technique P/N 270145.

• Normal: Le témoin à DEL vert clignote 8. Effectuer un essai du détecteur au moyen du dispositif d'essai de détecteur
• Alarme/actif: Le témoin à DEL rouge clignote de fumée et de l'accessoire adaptateur/tube, modèle 1490, fabriqué par
• Alarme autonome: Les deux témoins sont allumés de façon continue Home Safeguard Inc.

Adressage électronique: Le contrôleur de boucle assigne automatiquement

des adresses aux détecteurs ou des adresses spéciales peuvent être assignées Modes d’installation
aux détecteurs via un ordinateur portatif. Aucun commutateur d'adressage n'est
1. Pour retirer le détecteur de sa base, pousser un petit tournevis dans la fente
utilisé.
d'accès du mécanisme de vérouillage tout en tournant le détecteur dans le
Fonctionnement autonome: En cas de panne de communication avec le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Note: Le mécanisme de
contrôleur de boucle, le détecteur déclenche une alarme lorsque le niveau de verrouillage peut être mis définitivement hors service en cassant et en
fumée dépasse un seuil pré-établi. Se référer au manuel pertinent du panneau enlevant le levier en plastique de la base.
de contrôle d'alarme d'incendie afin de vérifier les possibilités du fonctionnement
2. Se référer à la Brochure Technique pour les instructions d'installation.
autonome.
3. Installer et câbler la base comme expliqué dans la fiche d'installation qui
Auto-diagnostics: Le SIGA-PS contient un microprocesseur capable d'effectuer
l'accompagne.
une gamme complète de mesures d'auto-diagnostic et de mémoriser les
résultats. Des informations telles que le nombre d'heures de fonctionnement, la 4. Décoller du détecteur l'étiquette de numéro de série détachable et la recoller
dernière date d'entretien, les valeurs de sensibilité et le nombre des alarmes et à l'endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de série.
des problèmes enregistrés sont stockés dans une mémoire permanente. Ces
statistiques peuvent être rappelées et lues à tout moment. 5. Relier le détecteur à la base en tournant le détecteur dans le sens des
aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place.

Caractéristiques techniques 6. Le code NFPA requiert q'un essai de sensibilité calibré soit effectué en fin
d'installation et après chaque modification du système ou ajout. Le système
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à19,95 Vcc Série Signature est capable d'effectuer cet essai et de générer un rapport de
Courant de veille: 45 µA sensibilité.
Courant d'alarme: 45 µA
Courant d'alarme (fonctionnement en mode autonome): 18 mA 7. L'installation de dispositifs de protection contre l'incendie au Canada doit
Vitesses de l’air: 0 à 25,39 m/s (0 à 5.000 pi/min) être conforme aux exigences de la norme CAN/ULC-S524-M91 Sur
Seuil de sensibilité à la fumée ULI/ULC: 0,67 à 3,77% obsc/pi (305 mm) L'installation des Alarmes à Incendie, et à celles des autorités compétentes
Environnement de fonctionnement locales.
Température: 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF) 8. Avant essai initial, retirer le couvercle anti-poussières du détecteur et notifier
Humidité: 0% à 93% HR, sans condensation les autorités pertinentes que des travaux d'entretien du système d'alarme
Compensation/environnement: Automatique d'incendie sont en cours et que ce dernier est temporairement hors service.
Bases compatibles
Standard: SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4
Relais: SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Isolateurs: SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4
Sonore: SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G
Distance max. du plafond (montage mural): 305 mm (12 po)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison: 218 g (7,7 oz)
ttempérature de stockage: 20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

P/N: 387014P REV: 8.0 13NOV03 Installation Sheet

2/2 SIGA-PS - Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
 PRODUCT INFORMATION 7) Under normal conditions, this unit does not require calibration.
However, if calibration is required, return to:
GS Building Systems Corporation
Description: The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector (PSI) is a
5 North Main Street
component of the Signature Series. This intelligent analog device
Pittsfield, ME 04967-1500
uses an optical sensing chamber to detect smoke. The detector
analyzes the sensor data to determine when an alarm is initiated. Refer to the Technical Bulletin for additional information and
The detector continuously monitors changes in sensitivity due to the cleaning instructions.
environment (e.g. dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity) and notifies the 8) Test the detector with Smoke Detector Tester and Model 1490
loop controller of its condition. The PSI issues a dirty sensor warning Adapter/Tube Accessory, manufactured by Home Safeguard, Inc.
when it reaches its preset limit. This notifies the operator of the need
for service while the detector is still operating.
LEDs: The PSI provides two LEDs that show its status.
Normal: green LED flashes
Alarm/active: red LED flashes
SPECIFICATIONS
Standalone alarm: both LEDs glow continuously
Electronic addressing: The loop controller automatically assigns Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
addresses to the detectors. Custom addresses can be assigned to Normal operating current: 45 µA
the detectors via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. Alarm current: 45 µA
Standalone operation: If unable to communicate with the loop Standalone alarm current: 18 mA
controller, the detector alarms when smoke levels exceed its preset Air velocity range: 0 to 5000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s)
value. Refer to the applicable fire alarm control panel manual for Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
verification of standalone capabilities. Operating humidity range: 0 to 93 % RH, non-condensing
Self-diagnostics: The PSI contains a microprocessor capable of Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
performing comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. Environmental compensation: Automatic
Details such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, sensitivity Construction and finish: High impact engineering polymer, white
values, and number of alarms and troubles are stored in non-volatile Compatible bases
memory. These can be retrieved and reviewed as desired. Standard: SB, SB4
Relay: RB, RB4
Isolator: IB, IB4, IBS
Audible: AB4
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Maximum distance from ceiling wall-mounted: 12 in. (305 mm)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) Push a small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while
rotating the detector counterclockwise to remove the detector.
Note: You can permanently disable the tamper-resist mechanism
by breaking and removing the plastic lever arm from the base.
PRODUCT DIAGRAM
2) See the Technical Bulletin for installation guidelines.
3) Install and wire the base as described in the installation sheet
supplied with the base.
4) Peel off the removable serial number label from the detector and
apply it to the appropriate location in the serial number log book. Tamper-Resist Lever Arm
5) Connect the detector to the base by rotating the detector - Break off to disable -
(Located on Base)
clockwise until it snaps into the locked position.
6) Before initial testing, remove the dust cover from the detector and
notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is
undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service.
Access Slot for
Tamper-Resist Mechanism

WARNINGS
1) This detector will NOT operate without electrical power. As fires
frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards
with your local fire protection specialist.
2) This detector will NOT sense fires in areas where smoke cannot INSTALLATION SHEET
reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the SIGA-PSI
opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector.
3) Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities,
Intelligent Photoelectric
but are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. Smoke Detector
4) Maintenance (regular or selected) should be planned in
accordance with the requirements of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction to ensure proper operation. SHEET P/N: P-047550-1900 FILE: P-047550-1900.CDR

5) To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
recommended ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room DATE: 04JUN99 CREATED BY: D. Chinell
temperature before applying power.
RELATED DOCUMENTS: Technical Bulletin (P/N 270145)
6) The bright orange-colored dust cover (supplied) MUST remain on
the detector during installation, and then be removed prior to
operation. The dust cover is NOT a substitute for removing the
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
detector during new construction or heavy remodeling. 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
TM
Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH
Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)

Normally- Normally- Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,

Closed Open White
Common
Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
Shipping Weight
SIGA-RB 3.2 oz (91 g)
Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)
6 (for wall mounting)
5
Compatible Electrical Boxes
North American 1-Gang Box
7
4

3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
3

European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers

2 BESA Box
DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-)
NOTES:
1) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq mm,
1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred.
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)
2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided and
From Signature Controller To Next Device apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
or Previous Device
3) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field
wires around terminals.
Term Description
1 Normally-Open
2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
3 Common SIGA-RB
4 DATA IN (-)
5 Not Used
6 Normally-Closed
7 DATA OUT (-)

CONTACT RATING
1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC
(Pilot Duty)

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-RB
Detector Base

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1886 FILE NAME: P-047550-1886.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01976 9

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES
Standard Detector Base Relay Detector Base Isolator Detector Base
Refer to
compatible panel
Installation Sheet
for terminal
assignments.
6 6 6
5 5 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

BESA Box North American 1-Gang Box

1.5 in
1.1 in (38 mm)
(27 mm)
0.8 in 0.8 in
(20 mm) (20 mm)

2.0 in 2.0 in
(51 mm) (51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm) 4.4 in (112 mm)

3-1/2 in or 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box 60.3 mm Fixing Centers

1.5 in
(38 mm) 1.75 in
(45 mm)
0.8 in
(20 mm) 0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm) 2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

P/N: P-047550-1886 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4

 DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
Base de détecteur à relais SIGA-RB
Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)

Normale- Normale- Construction et fini Polymère technique avec

ment ment résistance élevée aux
fermé ouvert impacts, blanc
Masse
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série
Signature
Poids à la livraison
SIGA-RB 91 g (3,2 oz)
Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)
6 (montage mural)
5
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord
7
4

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de

profondeur
3

Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de

Entrée des profondeur
2
données (-) Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de
Sortie des données (-) 60,3 mm
Boîte BESA

Entrée des NOTES:

Sortie des
données (+) données (+) 1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm 2 , 1,5 mm2 , 1 mm2 et 0,75 mm2
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature Vers le dispositif suivant (AWG nº 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
ou du dispositif précédent
2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette
dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.
3) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils
Borne Description du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.
1 Normalement
ouvert
2 Entrée/Sortie
des données (+)
3 Masse
4 Entrée des
données (-)
SIGA-RB
5 Inutilisée
6 Normalement
fermée
7 Sortie des
données (-)

AMPÉRAGE DES
CONTACTS
1.0 Amp @ 30 V CC
(fonction de commande)

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

Bases De Détecteur
SIGA-RB

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: P-047550-1886 NOM DU FICHIER: P-047550-1886.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR: C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: P-047550-1886 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4
 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux
feuilles Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le
câblage des 6 6 6
5 5 5
bornes.

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_
Isoler le blindage avec
+
S

Panneau de
commande
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.
2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.
Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au
3 niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE

Boîte BESA Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord

38 mm
27 mm (1,5 po)
(1,1 po)
20 mm (0,8 po) 20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po) 51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po) 112 mm (4,4 po)

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) ou de 10,16 cm (4 po) Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm,
de côté et de 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur centres de fixation de 60,3 mm

38 mm
(1,5 po) 45 mm
(1,75 po)
20 mm (0,8 po)
20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)
51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

P/N: P-047550-1886 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4

 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range +32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB4
Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH
Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Normally- Normally- Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,
Common Closed Open White
Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
Shipping Weight
SIGA-RB4 3.2 oz (91 g)
Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)
6 (for wall mounting)
5
Related Parts 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring
7 (SIGA-TS)
4

Compatible Electrical Boxes

North American 1-Gang Box
3

3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

2 European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers
DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-) BESA Box
4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (using outer mounting
brackets on base)
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)
From Signature Controller To Next Device NOTES:
or Previous Device 1) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq
mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are
preferred.
2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided
Term Description
and apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
1 Normally-Open
2 DATA IN/OUT (+) 3) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field
3 Common wires around terminals.
4 DATA IN (-)
5 Not Used
6 Normally-Closed
7 DATA OUT (-)
SIGA-RB4
CONTACT RATING
1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC
(Pilot Duty)

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-RB4
Detector Base

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1888 FILE NAME: P-047550-1888.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01979 0

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES

Refer to Standard Detector Base Relay Detector Base Isolator Detector Base
compatible panel
Installation Sheet
for terminal
assignments.
6 6 6
5 5 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS
4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Surface Mount) 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring

1.5 in
(38 mm)

0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

SIGA-TS

4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Flush Mount) Flush Mount Electrical Box

NOTES:
1) A 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring (SIGA-TS) must be installed to give a
"finished" appearance to the 4 in base.
1.5 in
2) Refer to Installation Sheet P/N 387056P for additional information.
(38 mm)

0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

P/N: P-047550-1888 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 4
 DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Gamme de températures de
Base de détecteur à relais, SIGA-RB4 fonctionnement 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Normale- Normale- Construction et fini Polymère technique avec
résistance élevée aux
ment ment
impacts, blanc
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série
Signature
Poids à la livraison
SIGA-RB4 91 g (3,2 oz)
Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)
(montage mural)
6
5 Pièces apparentées Jupe de garniture de boîte
électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)
réf. P-025031-0039
7
4

Boîtes électriques compatibles

Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord
3

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de

Entrée des 2 profondeur
Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de
60,3 mm
Boîte BESA
Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
Entrée des Sortie des profondeur
Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature profondeur
(utilisation de supports de montage extérieurs sur la base)
NOTES:
1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm2, 1,5 mm2, 1 mm2 et 0,75 mm2
Borne Description (AWG n° 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
1 Normalement
ouvert 2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette
2 Entrée/Sortie dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.
des données (+)
3 Masse 3) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils
4 Entrée des du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.
données (-)
5 Inutilisée
6 Normalement
fermée
7 Sortie des
SIGA-RB4

AMPÉRAGE DES
CONTACTS
1.0 Amp à 30 V CC
(fonction de commande)

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

Base de détecteur
SIGA-RB4

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-047550-1888 NOM DU FICHIER : P-047550-1888.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE : 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR : C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: P-047550-1888 REV: 1.0 Page 3 of 4
 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur
feuilles
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le
câblage des
6 6
bornes. 5 5
6 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_
Isoler le blindage avec
+
S

Panneau de
commande
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.
2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.
Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au
3 niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE
Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de
Jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)
38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage en saillie)

38 mm
(1,5 po)

20 mm
(0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po) SIGA-TS

Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de

38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage encastré)
Boîte électrique pour encastrement

NOTES:
1) Une jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) (Réf.
38 mm SIGA-TS) doit être installée pour donner un aspect final soigné à la base de
(1,5 po) 10,16 mm.
2) Se référer à la fiche d’installation réf. 387056P pour des renseignements
20 mm supplémentaires.
(0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4)
P/N: P-047550-1888 REV: 1.0 Page 4 of 4
 SIGA-RM1
Riser Monitor Module

Product description The delay time from when the device falls below the trouble
threshold to when it sends a trouble signal to the panel is user
definable in the appropriate data entry program. A delay of 5 to
75 seconds can be assigned to the device; the default delay
period is 15 seconds.

Warnings
1. Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury
or loss of life. Dangerous voltages may be present at the
terminals even when power is shut off.
2. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
3. This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.
The SIGA-RM1 Riser Monitor Module is an intelligent analog-
addressable component of Signature Series. The SIGA-RM1
requires one module address and monitors the integrity of: Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
• 12 and 24 Vdc circuits Maximum input voltages
• 25 Vac circuits Riser monitor: 12 Vdc + 15%, 24 Vdc + 10%,
• 70 Vac circuits 25 Vac + 15%, 70 Vac + 15%
• Telephone riser signals Telephone: 3.75 to 28 Vdc
Upon the loss of a signal, the fire alarm control panel indicates Standby current: 200 µA
an alert status. Activated current: 200 µA
Input currents
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-RM1 12 Vdc: 10 mA DC
automatically. A custom address can also be assigned to the 24 Vdc: 10 mA DC
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used. 25 Vac: 10 mA RMS
Mounting 70 Vac: 10 mA RMS
Telephone 24 Vdc: 20 mA DC
The SIGA-RM1 can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in Riser loading
(64 mm) deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 70 Vac: Impedance > 11 kΩ
in (38 mm) deep with 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 25 Vac: Impedance > 1 kΩ
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). 24 Vdc: Resistance > 2.4 kΩ
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. 12 Vdc: Resistance > 1.2 kΩ
System controller compatibility Telephone: Resistance > 1.2 kΩ, Impedance > 1.2 kΩ
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
The SIGA-RM1 requires the Signature loop controller. The loop Operating humidity: 0 to 93% RH
controller downloads the personality code which determines Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
how the module operates. The following personality codes can Construction: High impact engineering polymer
be downloaded to the SIGA-RM1. Shipping weight: 0.48 lb (0.21 kg)
Personality code 23: Riser monitor (factory default): Compatible electrical boxes
Personality code 23 configures the SIGA-RM1 to monitor 70 North American 2.5-inch (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
Vac audio, 25 Vac audio, or 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc risers. A Standard 4-inch (101.6 mm) x 1.5-inch (38 mm) deep
trouble condition is reported back to the panel wherever the square box with 2-gang cover
voltage on the riser drops below the trouble threshold.
Note: The hardware jumper on the SIGA-RM1 must be
configured for either 70 Vac or 25 Vac / 24 Vdc / 12 Vdc.
Personality code 24: Telephone riser monitor: Personality
code 24 configures the SIGA-RM1 to monitor telephone risers.
A trouble condition is reported back to the panel whenever
voltage on the riser drops below the trouble threshold.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387347 REV: 3.0

SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module 1/3
Installation instructions Wire stripping guide
Note: The SIGA-RM1 is shipped from the factory as an
assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
should not be disassembled.
1/4 in (~6 mm)
To install the module:

1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
ground faults. connect to the terminal block of the module.

2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.
diagram. Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.
3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
removable serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw
provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Note: Wire in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical
Code.

P/N: 387347 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/3 SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module
Wiring diagram

Jumper settings
12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, or 25 Vac

JP1

70 Vac
Note: Leave the jumper out for telephone
riser operation.

Green LED [5]

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

[2] [4]
[3]
[6]
12 Vdc, 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac Data out (-)
riser from power supply or audio To Signature device
amplifier (not polarity sensitive) Data out (+)
[1] [2]
Telephone riser (+) Data in (-)
From Signature loop controller
Telephone riser (-) Data in (+) or previous device

Notes [4] Supervised and power-limited unless connected to a

nonpower-limited source. If the source is nonpower-
[1] Supervised and power-limited limited, eliminate the power-limited mark and:
[2] 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) max; 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm) min • Maintain a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) space from power-
[3] See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for limited wiring
wiring specifications or
• Use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an equivalent cable in
accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code
[5] Active when communicating with the Signature loop
controller
[6] You cannot use the telephone riser while you use the 12
and 24 Vdc, 25 Vac, or 70 Vac riser

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387347 REV: 3.0

SIGA-RM1 - Riser Monitor Module 3/3
 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)

Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH

Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C)
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,
Remote LED White
(SIGA-LED) Maximum Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
Resistance
per Wire Shipping Weight
Must NOT SIGA-SB 2.9 oz (82 g)
- + Exceed 10Ω Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)
(for wall mounting)

6
Compatible Electrical Boxes
5 North American 1-Gang Box
3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
7
4

European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers

BESA Box
3

NOTES:
2
DATA OUT (-) 1) The SIGA-SB provides wiring terminals for connection to Remote
DATA IN (-)
LED, Model SIGA-LED.
2) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, and 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5 sq
mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+) preferred.
From Signature Controller To Next Device 3) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided and
or Previous Device apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
4) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field
wires around terminals.
Term Description
1 Not Used
2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
3
4
Not Used
DATA IN (-)
SIGA-SB
4 Remote LED
5 Remote LED
6 Not Used
7 DATA OUT (-)

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-SB
Detector Base

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387019P FILE NAME: 387019P.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 8.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01977 6

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES
Refer to
compatible panel Standard Detector Base Relay Detector Base Isolator Detector Base
installation sheet
for terminal
assignments.

6 6 6
5 5 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS

BESA Box North American 1-Gang Box

1.5" (38 mm)

1.1" (27 mm)

0.8" (20 mm) 0.8" (20 mm)

2.0" (51 mm) 2.0" (51 mm)

4.4" (112 mm) 4.4" (112 mm)

3-1/2" or 4" by 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box 60.3 mm Fixing Centers

1.5" (38 mm)

1.75" (45 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

P/N: 387019P REV: 8.0 Page 2 of 4

 DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement 0 à 49 ºC (32 à 120 ºF)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
Base de détecteur standard, SIGA-SB
Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec
résistance élevée aux
DEL à distance impacts, blanc
(SIGA-LED)
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série
La résistance Signature
maximum par Poids à la livraison
fil NE doit PAS
- + dépasser 10Ω SIGA-SB 82 g (2,9 oz)
Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)
(montage mural)
6
5
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord
Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
7
4

profondeur
Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
3

profondeur
Entrée des Sortie des Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de
données (-) 2
données (-) 60,3 mm
Boîte BESA
NOTES:
Entrée des Sortie des 1) Le SIGA-SB dispose de bornes de câblage pour connexion à un témoin à
données (+) données (+) DEL à distance, modèle SIGA-LED.
2) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm 2 , 1,5 mm2 , 1 mm2 et 0,75 mm2
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature Vers le dispositif suivant (AWG nº 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
ou du dispositif précédent 3) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette
dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.
4) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils
du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.
Borne Description
1 Inutilisée
2 Entrée/Sortie
des données (+)
3 Inutilisée
4 Entrée des SIGA-SB
données (-)
4 DEL à distance
5 DEL à distance
6 Inutilisée
7 Sortie des
données (-)

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

Bases De Détecteur
SIGA-SB

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: 387019P NOM DU FICHIER: 387019P.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 8.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR: C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: 387019P REV: 8.0 Page 3 of 4
 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur
feuilles
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le
câblage des 6 6 6
5 5 5
bornes.

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_
Isoler le blindage avec
+
S

Panneau de
commande
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.
2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.
Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au
3 niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE

Boîte BESA Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord

38 mm
27 mm (1,5 po)
(1,1 po)
20 mm (0,8 po) 20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po) 51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po) 112 mm (4,4 po)

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) ou de 10,16 cm (4 po) Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm,
de côté et de 38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur centres de fixation de 60,3 mm

38 mm
(1,5 po) 45 mm
(1,75 po)
20 mm (0,8 po)
20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)
51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

P/N: 387019P REV: 8.0 Page 4 of 4

 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB4
Operating Humidity Range 0 to 93% RH
Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Remote LED Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,
(SIGA-LED) Maximum White
Resistance Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
per Wire
Shipping Weight
Must NOT
Exceed 10Ω SIGA-SB4 2.9 oz (82 g)
- +
Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)
(for wall mounting)
6
5 Related Parts 4 in Box Trim Skirt/Ring
(SIGA-TS)
Compatible Electrical Boxes
7
4

North American 1-Gang Box

3

3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box

1

European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers

2 BESA Box
DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-) 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Octagon Box
4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep Square Box (using outer mounting
brackets on base)

DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+) NOTES:

From Signature Controller To Next Device 1) The SIGA-SB4 provides wiring terminals for connection to Remote
or Previous Device LED, Model SIGA-LED.
2) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, and 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm, 1.5
sq mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18 are
preferred.
Term Description
3) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided
1 Not Used and apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
3 Not Used 4) Break wire run at each terminal. Do not loop signaling circuit field
4 DATA IN (-) wires around terminals.
4 Remote LED
5 Remote LED
6
7
Not Used
DATA OUT (-)
SIGA-SB4

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-SB4
Detector Base

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387034P FILE NAME: 387034P.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 7.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01980 6

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES
Refer to
compatible panel Standard Detector Base Relay Detector Base Isolator Detector Base
installation sheet
for terminal
assignments.

6 6 6
5 5 5

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high electrical noise.

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the last device.

MOUNTING DIAGRAMS
4" by 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Surface Mount) 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring

1.5" (38 mm)

0.8" (20 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

SIGA-TS

4" by 1-1/2" (38 mm) Deep Square Box (Flush Mount) Flush Mount Electrical Box
NOTES:
1) A 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring (SIGA-TS) must be installed to give a
"finished" appearance to the 4" base.
1.5" (38 mm) 2) Refer to Installation Sheet P/N 387056P for additional information.

0.8" (20 mm)

2.0" (51 mm)

4.4" (112 mm)

P/N: 387034P REV: 7.0 Page 2 of 4
 DIAGRAMMES DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Gamme de températures de
Base de détecteur standard, SIGA-SB4 fonctionnement 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec
DEL à distance résistance élevée aux
(SIGA-LED) impacts, blanc
Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série
La résistance Signature
maximum par Poids à la livraison
fil NE doit PAS
SIGA-SB4 82 g (2,9 oz)
- + dépasser 10Ω
Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)
(montage mural)
6 Pièces apparentées Jupe de garniture de boîte
5 électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)
(réf. SIGA-TS)
Boîtes électriques compatibles
7
4

Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
3

profondeur
1

Entrée des Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm, centres de fixation de

Sortie des 60,3 mm
données (-) 2
données (-) Boîte BESA
Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
profondeur
Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po) de
Entrée des Sortie des profondeur
données (+) données (+) (utilisation de supports de montage extérieurs sur la base)
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature ou Vers le dispositif suivant NOTES:
du dispositif précédent
1) Le SIGA-SB4 dispose de bornes de câblage pour connexion à un témoin à
DEL à distance, modèle SIGA-LED.
2) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm2, 1,5 mm2, 1 mm2 et 0,75 mm2
(AWG n° 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
Borne Description
1 Inutilisée 3) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller cette
2 Entrée/Sortie dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.
des données (+) 4) Interrompre le câblage au niveau de chaque borne. Ne pas enrouler les fils
3 Inutilisée du circuit de signalisation autour de bornes.
4 Entrée des
données (-)
4 DEL à distance
5 DEL à distance SIGA-SB4
6 Inutilisée
7 Sortie des

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

Base de détecteur
SIGA-SB4

FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : 387034P NOM DU FICHIER : 387034P.CDR

NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 7.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE : 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR : C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: 387034P REV: 7.0 Page 3 of 4
 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux Base de détecteur standard Base de détecteur à relais Base de détecteur à isolateur
feuilles
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le
câblage des 6 6 6
5 5 5
bornes.

7
7

4
4

7
4
_

3
3

1
1
+

1
S 2 2 2

2 2 3

_
Isoler le blindage avec
+
S

Panneau de
commande
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à interférences électriques élevées.
2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.
Câblage de classe B : aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le blindage et la terre au
3 niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit.

SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE
Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de
Jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po)
38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage en saillie)

38 mm
(1,5 po)

20 mm
(0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po) SIGA-TS

Boîte carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et de

38 mm (1,5 po) de profondeur (montage encastré)
Boîte électrique pour encastrement

NOTES:
1) Une jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po) (Réf.
38 mm SIGA-TS) doit être installée pour donner un aspect final soigné à la base de
(1,5 po) 10,16 mm.
2) Se référer à la fiche d’installation réf. 387056P pour des renseignements
20 mm
(0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4)
P/N: 387034P REV: 7.0 Page 4 of 4
 SIGA-SEC2
Security Loop Module

Product description Personality code 43: basic security (factory default)

The factory assigns personality code 43 to the channel 1 input.
Personality code 43 configures the channel 1 input for devices
that use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contact
for security conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or the
N.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signal is sent to
the loop controller.
Personality code 44: security tamper
Personality code 44 configures the channel 1 input for devices
that use a Class B, N.C. contact and/or a Class B, N.O. contact
for tamper conditions. When the N.C. contact is opened or the
N.O. contact is closed, a tamper signal is sent to the loop
The Security Loop Module is an intelligent, analog-addressable controller.
device that interfaces one or two security loops to a Signature
loop controller. Personality codes downloaded to the module Personality code 45: security open
during system configuration allow the user to configure each Personality code 45 configures the channel 1 input for use with
channel for almost any security application. This module also a Class B, N.O. contact. When the N.O. contact is closed, an
supports guard tour, per NFPA 72. The loop controller active signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will report
automatically assigns two addresses to the Security Loop an open circuit as a SecurityFault condition.
Module, but it will accept custom address assignments from a
laptop computer. Personality code 46: security closed
Personality code 46 configures the channel 1 input for use with
Personality codes a Class B, N.C. contact. When the N.C. contact is opened, an
active signal is sent to the loop controller. The panel will report
System controller compatibility
a short circuit as a SecurityFault condition.
The Security Loop Module requires a Signature loop controller
Personality code 48: security - maintenance
to download the personality codes that determine how it will
operate. The personality codes described below are Personality code 48 configures the channel 1 input for devices
compatible with the security loop module. that use a Class B, N.C. contact or a Class B, N.O. contact for
maintenance conditions (e.g. a motion detector with a separate
Personality code 3: N.O. active, nonlatching (guard tour)
maintenance contact). When the N.C. contact is opened or the
Personality code 3 configures the channel 1 input for use with N.O. contact is closed, a maintenance signal is sent to the loop
Class B, normally-open (N.O.) contact guard tour devices. controller.
When the N.O. contact of the device is closed, an active signal
Note: See the SDU Online Help (P/N 180653) for additional
is sent to the loop controller. The active status is nonlatching
programming instructions.
and clears when the N.O. input is returned to the open
condition. The panel will report an open circuit as a trouble
condition. Specifications
Data input voltage: 15.20 to 19.95 Vdc
Note: Configure both zones the same for personality code 3. Current draw
The security loop module requires connection to a listed guard
Standby current: 720 mA
tour station.
Tamper/active current: 850 mA
Personality code 41: security open with tamper Security circuit
EOL resistor: UL/ULC listed 47 kW
Personality code 41 configures the channel 1 input for devices
Max. resistance/channel: 50 W (25 W per wire)
that use a Class B, N.O. contact for security conditions and a
Class B, normally-closed (N.C.) contact for tamper conditions. Max. capacitance/channel: 0.1 mF
When the N.O. contact is closed, an active signal is sent to the Max. voltage/channel: 18 Vdc
loop controller; similarly, when the N.C. contact is opened, a Max. current/channel: 0.32 mA
tamper signal is sent to the loop controller. Address requirement: 2
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Personality code 42: security closed with tamper Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Humidity: 0 to 93% noncondensing
Personality code 42 configures the channel 1 input for devices Construction: High impact engineering polymer
that use a Class B, N.C. contact for security conditions and a Compatible electrical boxes
Class B, N.O. contact for tamper conditions. When the N.C. North American 1-gang box: 2.5 in (64 mm) deep
contact is opened, an active signal is sent to the loop Standard 4-inch square box: 1.5 in (38 mm) deep with
controller; similarly, when the N.O. contact is closed, a tamper 1-gang cover
signal is sent to the loop controller.

Installation Sheet 30OCT01 P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0

SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module 1/4
LEDs To surface mount the module:

Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the 1. Prepare the mounting knockouts in the backbox. (See
module when the front cover is removed. Figure 2.)

Status LED indicator 2. Mount the backbox on a smooth, flat surface.

3. Reinstall the circuit board.
Normal Green LED flashes
4. Replace the front cover.
Active/Tamper Red LED flashes

[1]
Active/
Tamper [2] [2]

[1]
Normal

Front cover Backbox (rear view)

Figure 1: LED locations and indications

Front
Backbox
cover
WARNINGS
• Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing
components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or Side view Backbox (front view)
loss of life.
[1] Mounting knockout
• This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires [2] Wiring entrance
frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. Figure 2: Surface mounting the module
• This module does not support conventional smoke detectors.
To mount the module in an electrical box:

1. Reinstall the circuit board.

Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.
2. Replace the front cover.
3. Place the security loop module inside the electrical box.
Installation instructions 4. Secure the appropriate cover to the electrical box.
To wire and label the module:
Signature data circuit
1. Open the front cover of the module to expose the circuit
board and the backbox.
4-inch electrical box
2. Remove the circuit board in accordance with static- Conduit
sensitive handling practices.
3. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and Security Loop Module Conduit
ground faults.
4. Run the wiring through the wiring entrances of the
backbox. (See Figure 2.) Security input circuits

5. Make the appropriate wiring connections to TB1 and TB2.

(See Figure 4.) Figure 3: Mounting the module in an electrical box
6. Write the module address assignment on the label Wire stripping guide
provided and apply it to the module.
7. Peel off the serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the Serial Number Log
Book. 1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 inch (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that
connect to the terminal block of the module.

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection

P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0 30OCT01 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module
Wiring diagram

Notes N.O. with tamper Tamper

[5]
[1] The circuits connected to TB2 are configurable to Alarm
personality codes 3, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, or 48. The
personality code assigned to the circuits determines the
types of devices on them.
Alarm
[2] Class B (Style 4) N.C. with tamper
[5]
[3] 25 W resistance per wire, max. Tamper
[4] 16 AWG (1.0 sq mm) max. 22 AWG (0.25 sq mm) min.
[5] Listed 47 kW EOL Basic security
[5]
[6] UL/ULC listed guard tour station
7. All wiring is supervised and power-limited
8. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors Guard tour [6]
[5]

Security Loop Module

From Signature loop controller or previous device [1] [2] [3] [4]
TB2
+
Data in (+) 4 8 -
+ Channel 1 input
Data in (-) _ 3 7
+ +
Data out (+) 2 6
Channel 2 input
Data out (-) _ 1 5 _

To next Signature device TB1

Signature loop

Figure 4: Wiring diagram

Installation Sheet 30OCT01 P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0

SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module 3/4
P/N: 387632 REV: 1.0 30OCT01 Installation Sheet
4/4 SIGA-SEC2 - Security Loop Module
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
The 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring, Model SIGA-TS, is a decorative cover intended Compatible Bases
for use with Signature Series 4" Bases. The trim skirt/ring covers the
mounting screws on the SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 to provide a Standard Base, SIGA-SB4
"finished" appearance to these bases. Relay Base, SIGA-RB4
Isolator Base, SIGA-IB4
The SIGA-TS may also be used with SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB, and SIGA-IB
bases (if necessary) to provide a "finished" appearance. Standard Base, SIGA-SB
Relay Base, SIGA-RB
Isolator Base, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer, White
Shipping Weight 3.9 oz (110 g)

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the base. Mount the base
to the electrical box.
2) Align the tabs on the trim skirt/ring with the notches on the base.
3) Push the trim skirt/ring onto the base until it snaps into position.
4) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the detector. Install the
detector in its base.

SIGA-TS

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-TS
4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387056P FILE NAME: 387056P.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 7.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 01981 3

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
DESCRIPTION Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série Signature
La jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po), modèle SIGA-TS, Bases compatibles
est un couvercle décoratif spécialement conçu pour les bases de 10,16 cm (4 Base standard, SIGA-SB4
po) de la série Signature. Elle permet de dissimuler les vis de montage des Base relais, SIGA-RB4
bases SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4 et SIGA-IB4 afin de leur donner un aspect final Base d’isolement, SIGA-IB4
plus soigné.
Base standard, SIGA-SB
Elle peut également être utilisée sur les bases SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB et SIGA-IB, Base relais, SIGA-RB
si nécessaire, afin de leur donner un aspect final plus soigné. Base d’isolement, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec résistance
élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison 110 g (3,9 oz)

MODE D’INSTALLATION
1) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec la base. Monter la base sur
la boîte électrique.
2) Aligner les onglets de la jupe de garniture avec les encoches de la base.
3) Enfoncez la jupe de garniture sur la base jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’enclen-che
en place.
4) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec le détecteur. Monter le
détecteur sur la base.

SIGA-TS

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

SIGA-TS
Jupe de garniture de boîte
de 10,16 cm (4 pouces)
FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF.: 387056P NOM DU FICHIER: 387056P.CDR
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 7.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 01/18/99 CRÉÉ PAR: C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: 387056P REV: 7.0 Page 2 of 2
 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the base.
DESCRIPTION
Mount the base to the electrical box.
The SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt Ring may be used with all
2) Align the tabs on the trim skirt/ring with the notches
Signature Series bases (if necessary) to provide a
on the base.
"finished" appearance around an installed base. It is
3) Push the trim skirt/ring onto the base until it snaps provided with all Signature Series 4" bases.
into position.
4) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the
detector. Install the detector in its base.
SPECIFICATIONS

Compatible Signature Series Detectors

Detectors
Compatible Standard Base, SIGA-SB4
Bases Relay Base, SIGA-RB4
Isolator Base, SIGA-IB4
Standard Base, SIGA-SB
Relay Base, SIGA-RB
Isolator Base, SIGA-IB
Construction & High Impact
Finish Engineering Polymer, White
Shipping Weight 3.9 oz (110 g)

SIGA-TS4

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-TS4
4" Trim Skirt/Ring

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1856 FILE NAME: P-047550-1856.CDR

DATE: 10/13/99

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 02869 3

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 MODE D'INSTALLATION INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT
1) Se référer à la fiche d'instalation fournie avec la base.
DESCRIPTION
Monter la base sur la boîte électrique.
La jupe de garniture SIGA-TS4 peut être utilisée avec la
2) Allgnez les anglets de la jupe de garniture avec les
gamme complète Signature (si nécessaire) afin de faire
encoches de la base.
une finition par dessus la base installée. Cette jupe est
3) Enfoncez a jupe de garniture sur la base jusqu'à ce fournit avec la série de bases de 4 pouces.
qu'elle s'enclenche en place.
4) Se référer à la fiche d'installation fournie avec le
détecteur. Monter le détecteur sur la base.
CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

Détecteurs Détecteurs de la Série Signature

Compatibles
Bases Base standard, SIGA-SB4
Compatibles Base relais, SIGA-RB4
Base d'Isolement, SIGA-IB4
Base standard, SIGA-SB
Base relais, SIGA-RB
Base d'Isolement, SIGA-IB
Construction Polymerè avec résistance
et fini élevée aux impacts
Poids à la livraison 110 g (3.9 oz)

SIGA-TS4

INSTALLATION SHEET:

SIGA-TS4
4" Jupe De Garniture

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1856 FILE NAME: P-047550-1856.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0 APPROVED BY: B. Right
DATE: 10/13/99 CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: PP-047550-1856 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2
 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
The 4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring, Model SIGA-TSB, is a decorative cover Compatible Bases
intended for use with Signature Series 4" Bases. The trim skirt/ring covers
the mounting screws on the SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 to Standard Base, SIGA-SB4
provide a "finished" appearance to these bases. Relay Base, SIGA-RB4
Isolator Base, SIGA-IB4
The SIGA-TSB may also be used with SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB, and SIGA-IB
bases (if necessary) to provide a "finished" appearance. Standard Base, SIGA-SB
Relay Base, SIGA-RB
Isolator Base, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer, White
Shipping Weight 3.9 oz (110 g)

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the base. Mount the base
to the electrical box.
2) Align the tabs on the trim skirt/ring with the notches on the base.
3) Push the trim skirt/ring onto the base until it snaps into position.
4) Refer to the Installation Sheet provided with the detector. Install the
detector in its base.

SIGA-TSB

INSTALLATION SHEET

SIGA-TSB
4" Box Trim Skirt/Ring

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1885 FILE NAME: P-047550-1885.CDR

DATE: 01/18/99

REVISION LEVEL: 1.0

APPROVED BY: B. Right

CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 02805 1

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 INFORMATIONS SUR LE PRODUIT CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
DESCRIPTION Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série Signature
La jupe de garniture de boîte électrique de 10,16 cm (4 po), modèle SIGA-TSB, Bases compatibles
est un couvercle décoratif spécialement conçu pour les bases de 10,16 cm (4 Base standard, SIGA-SB4
po) de la série Signature. Elle permet de dissimuler les vis de montage des Base relais, SIGA-RB4
bases SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4 et SIGA-IB4 afin de leur donner un aspect final Base d’isolement, SIGA-IB4
plus soigné.
Base standard, SIGA-SB
Elle peut également être utilisée sur les bases SIGA-SB, SIGA-RB et SIGA-IB, Base relais, SIGA-RB
si nécessaire, afin de leur donner un aspect final plus soigné. Base d’isolement, SIGA-IB, SIGI-IBS
Construction et fini Polymère technique avec résistance
élevée aux impacts, blanc
Poids à la livraison 110 g (3,9 oz)

MODE D’INSTALLATION
1) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec la base. Monter la base sur la
boîte électrique.
2) Aligner les onglets de la jupe de garniture avec les encoches de la base.
3) Enfoncez la jupe de garniture sur la base jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’enclen-che en
place.
4) Se référer à la fiche d’installation fournie avec le détecteur. Monter le
détecteur sur la base.

SIGA-TSB

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :

SIGA-TSB
Jupe de garniture de boîte
de 10,16 cm (4 pouces)
FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF: P-047550-1885 NOM DU FICHIER: P-047550-1885.CDR
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION: 1.0 APPROUVÉ PAR: B. Right
DATE: 01/18/99 CREATED BY:CRÉÉ PAR

A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL

GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
P/N: P-047550-1885 REV: 1.0 Page 2 of 2
 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
The SIGA-UIO2R Universal Input/Output Motherboard provides
mounting and wiring terminations for up to two (2) Signature M series Module Capacity Two Signature M series plug-in modules
modules. In addition, the motherboard features individual Terminal Capacity 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) to 18 AWG (0.75 mm2)
inputs/outputs and a common input/output bus. Jumpers, located
between the modules, facilitate sharing of common inputs/outputs Compatible Boxes GS Building Systems, Corp. listed fire alarm
between the two modules to reduce wiring. enclosures:
The motherboard conveniently mounts in equipment enclosures or 2-WB(X) series
racks. Modules plug into the motherboard, and captive screws fasten 2-CAB series
them down. All module field wiring goes to terminal blocks on the 3-CAB series
motherboard, which permits rapid removal and replacement for RACCR series
troubleshooting. 3-RACC series
Clearance Space 1 inch minimum all around the motherboard,
1/2 inch above the Signature M series
modules, and in accordance with the
National Electrical Code
Operating Temperature 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Storage Temperature -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS Humidity 0 to 93% RH
Dimensions (H x W x D) 4.30 in (10.9 cm) x 5.34 in (13.5 cm) x 0.87 in
(2.2 cm) + 2.25 in (5.7 cm) module depth
Warning! Weight 0.32 lb (0.15 kg)

Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or removing

components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or loss of
life.

! Caution!

Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.

1 See the specifications to determine which enclosure to mount

the motherboard in and how much clearance space to allow it.

2 Use the motherboard to mark the mounting hole locations.

3 Drill the mounting holes at the marks made in step 1 (mounting

TB1 TB2
hole diameter = 0.125 in or 3.175 mm).

4 Mount the motherboard in the cabinet with the screws and

washers provided.
TB7

P1 P2
Interior surface of enclosure SIGA-UIO2R

#6-32 TB15
Mounting space
Self-tapping
Screws
TB8 TB9

Mounting holes
0.125 in 3.175 mm diameter 1

INSTALLATION SHEET:

Interior surface of enclosure

#6 Flat Washers SIGA-UIO2R
Universal Input/Output Motherboard

Notes INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387349 FILE NAME: 387349.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: R. Right
1 Mark the mounting hole locations here.
DATE: 12/22/98 CREATED BY: B. Graham
2 See the installation sheets of the individual Signature M
series modules for mounting instructions to the A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
motherboard. 6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 WIRING

Power-limited wiring Nonpower-limited wiring

3
Module Input/Output Wiring SIGA-UIO2R

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

TB1 TB2

Data In
TB7
Signature 4 TB15
3
Data 2 4
Common input/output
Circuit 1 3
2 bus for Signature M series
1
Data Out modules
5

TB8 TB9
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Jumpers connect common
inputs/outputs between 1
Module Input/Output Wiring modules

5 3

Notes

1
Jumpers may be used to make the inputs/outputs
between modules common.

2 Not all modules use the motherboard terminals for the

! Caution!
same functions.

Refer to individual Signature M series installation sheets Observe static-sensitive material handling practices.
3
for jumper settings and wiring information.
In cabinets that house only one motherboard:
4 Do not mix incompatible signals. Group all modules with nonpower-limited sources to
the right of the motherboard and route their wiring to
5 Maximum current is 8 Amps. the right.
Group all modules with power-limited sources to the
left of the motherboard and route their wiring to the
left.
6 Maintain 1/4 in (6.4 mm) separation between power-
limited and nonpower-limited wiring. Maintain a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) spacing between power-
limited and nonpower-limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP,
FPLR, or an equirvalent in accordance with the NEC.
Wire Stripping Guide
Installations with multiple motherboards or enclosures,
Strip 1/4 inch from the ends of ALL wires that connect to the terminal which include other wiring, require FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or
blocks of the motherboard.
equivalent NEC-approved wiring for all power-limited
wiring.
1/4 in (6.4 mm)
Observe the details of supervision and power-limited vs.
CAUTION: nonpower-limited circuits, as found in the Signature M series
Exposing more than 1/4 inch of wire may cause a ground fault.
installation sheets.
Exposing less than 1/4 inch of wire may result in a faulty connection.

387349.CDR REV 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 PRODUCT INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS
The UIO6 and UIO6R Universal Input/Output Motherboards provide Capacity: Six M series plug-in modules
mounting and wiring terminations for up to six M series modules.
Terminal capacity: 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) to 18 AWG (0.75 sq mm)
The UIO6 provides two input/output buses common to all modules
Compatible boxes: GS Building Systems, Corporation listed fire
(TB14 and TB15). The UIO6R provides one input/output bus common
alarm enclosures:
to all modules (TB15) and six individual inputs/outputs (TB8 through
2-WB(X) series
TB13) for further flexibility. Jumpers, located between the modules,
3-CAB series
facilitate sharing of common inputs/outputs between adjacent
RACCR series
modules to minimize wiring.
3-RACC series
Both boards provide six terminal blocks to handle the inputs and MFC-A Cabinet
outputs for individual modules installed on the motherboard (TB1
Clearance space: 1 inch minimum all around the UIO6 or UIO6R, 1/2
through TB6). The Signature Data Circuit (SDC), which provides
inch above the M series modules, and in accordance with the
communication to all the modules, is connected at a single location
National Electrical Code
(TB7).
Operating temperature: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
The motherboard conveniently mounts into equipment enclosures or
racks. Modules plug into the motherboard at any of the six locations, Storage temperature: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
and captive screws fasten them to the motherboard. All module field
Humidity: 0 to 93% RH
wiring goes to terminal blocks on the motherboard to permit rapid
removal and replacement for troubleshooting. Dimensions (H x W x D): 4.30 in (10.9 cm) x 9.56 in (24.28 cm) x
0.87 in (2.2 cm) + 2.25 in (5.7 cm) module depth
Weight: UIO6 =0.56 lb (0.25 kg), UIO6R = 0.62 lb (0.28 kg)

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS PRODUCT DIAGRAM

WARNING: Disconnect power to cabinets before installing or 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
removing components. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB14
loss of life. 4
3
Caution: Observe static-sensitive material handling practices. TB7
2
1
4
1. See the specifications given here to determine the correct 3
2
enclosure and clearance space for a particular motherboard. 1
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

2. Use the UIO6 or UIO6R to mark the mounting hole locations. TB15
4
3. Drill 0.125 in (3.175 mm) mounting holes. 3
2
1
4. Mount the UIO6 or UIO6R in the cabinet, using the screws and
washers provided.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

UIO6
Interior surface of enclosure UIO6(R) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6

UIO6(R) Mounting Space #6 flat
washers
TB7
4
3
2 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
1

Mounting holes
0.125 in (3.175 mm) diameter [1] TB15
4
3
2
TB8 TB9 TB10 TB11 TB12 TB13 1
JP1A JP2A JP3A JP4A JP5A

JP1B JP2B JP3B JP4B JP5B

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

UIO6R
Interior surface of enclosure
#6-32
self-tapping
INSTALLATION SHEET
screws

Notes
SIGA-UIO6(R)
[1] Mark the mounting hole locations here.
2. See the installation sheets of the individual M series modules for
Universal Input/Output Motherboard
mounting instructions to the UIO6 or UIO6R.

INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: 387473 FILE NAME: 387473.CDR

REVISION LEVEL: 2.0 APPROVED BY: J. Burns
DATE: 14MAR00 CREATED BY: S. Hawes

EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.

SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
 WIRING DIAGRAM
UIO6
Power-limited wiring Nonpower-limited wiring
TB1 through TB6
provide module Maintain 1/4 in (6.4 mm) separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring.
input/output wiring.
Refer to individual
module installation UIO6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

TB1

TB2
sheet for wiring details.

TB3

TB6
TB4

TB5
TB14
Data In 4
Input/output bus 1
3 common to all M series
2 modules (maximum
4 1 current is 8 Amps)
Signature 3
Data 2 TB15
Circuit 1 4 Input/output bus 2
TB7 3 common to all M series
2 modules (maximum
Data Out 1
current is 8 Amps)

UIO6R Power-limited wiring Nonpower-limited wiring

TB1 through TB6
provide module Maintain 1/4 in (6.4 mm) separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring.
input/output wiring.
Refer to individual 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SIGA-UIO6R-LG
module installation
TB1

TB2

TB3

TB6
TB4

TB5

sheet for wiring details.

Data In
TB7
4
Signature 3
Data TB15
2 Input/output bus 2
Circuit 1 4
common to all M series
3
2 modules (maximum
1 current is 8 Amps)
Data Out
TB11
TB8

TB9

TB10

TB13
TB12

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Jumpers connect
common inputs and
outputs between
modules.
Module Input/Output Wiring (maximum current is 8 Amps)
Refer to individual module installation sheet for wiring details.

Wire Stripping Guide CAUTION

In cabinets that house only one UIO6 or UIO6R motherboard:
1/4 in (~6 mm) • Group all modules with nonpower-limited sources to the right of
the motherboard and route their wiring to the right
Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of ALL wires that connect to
• Group all modules with power-limited sources to the left of the
the terminal block of the module.
motherboard and route their wiring to the left
CAUTION: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing
• Maintain 1/4 inch separation between power-limited and
less wire may result in a faulty connection.
nonpower-limited wiring, or use FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or an
equivalent in accordance with the National Electric Code.
Installations with multiple UIO6 or UIO6R motherboards or enclosures
which include other wiring require FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or equivalent
NEC-approved wiring for all power-limited wiring.
Observe the details of supervision and power-limited vs. nonpower-
limited circuits, as found on the M series installation sheets.

P/N: 387473 REV: 2.0 Page 2 of 2

 SIGA-UM
Universal Class A/B Module

Product diagram Personality code 3: N/O active - non-latching (Class B): Contact
closure causes an active instead of an alarm status and does not latch
at the module. Code 3 is typically used for monitoring fans, dampers,
doors, etc.
Personality code 4: N/O active latching (Class B): Contact closure
causes an active instead of an alarm status which is latched at the
module. Code 4 is typically used for monitoring supervisory and tamper
switches.
Personality code 8: dry contact output: Configures the module as a
Form C dry relay contact to control external appliances (door closers,
fans, dampers, etc.) or equipment shutdown. Note: Jumper JP1 must
be moved to pins 2 and 3 for dry contact operation.
Personality code 9: N/O alarm latching (Class A): Configures the
module for connection of Class A normally-open dry contact initiating
devices (e.g., pull-stations, heat detectors, etc.). When the N/O input
contact of an initiating device is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the
loop controller and the alarm condition is latched at the module.
Personality Code 10: N/O alarm delayed latching (Class A): Same
The SIGA-UM Universal Class A/B Module is a component of the as code 9 except that contact closure must be maintained for
Signature Series. The SIGA-UM is an analog addressable device that approximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is generated. Code
can connect any one of the following: 10 is typically used with waterflow alarm switches.

• Dual input Class B initiating device circuit (IDC) Personality code 11: N/O active - non-latching (Class A): Same as
• Class A or B initiating device circuit (IDC) code 9 except that contact closure causes an active instead of an
• Class A or B notification appliance circuit (NAC) alarm status, and does not latch at the module. Personality code 11 is
• Class A or B circuit for 2-wire smoke detectors and initiating typically used for monitoring fans, dampers, doors, etc.
devices on one circuit Personality code 12: N/O active - latching (Class A): Same as code
• Form C dry contact relay 9 except that contact closure causes an active instead of an alarm
The loop controller assigns an address to the SIGA-UM automatically. status, which is latched at the module. Code 12 is typically used for
A custom address can also be assigned to the module via laptop monitoring supervisory and tamper switches.
computer. No addressing switches are used. Two device addresses Personality code 13: 2-wire smoke - non-verified (Class B):
are required. Configures the module for monitoring 2-wire conventional smoke
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the module detectors (that do not require alarm verification) and normally-open
when the cover plate is removed: contact initiating devices (e.g., pull-stations, heat detectors, etc.) on the
same circuit.
• Normal: green LED flashes
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes Personality code 14: 2-wire smoke - verified (Class B): Configures
the module for monitoring 2-wire conventional smoke detectors (that
Mounting require alarm verification). Normally-open contact initiating devices
may not be mixed with 2-wire conventional smoke detectors.
The SIGA-UM can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm)
deep 2-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep Personality code 15: signal output (Class A): Configures the
with a 2-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept 12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG module for connection of a Class A output notification appliance circuit
wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. (NAC). Code 15 is typically used to control bells, speakers, etc.
Jumper setup Personality code 16: signal output (Class B): Configures the
module for connection of a Class B output notification appliance circuit
Jumper JP1 is factory installed on pins 1 and 2 for normal operation. In (NAC). Code 16 is typically used to control bells, speakers, etc.
order to operate the SIGA-UM as a Form C dry relay contact to control
external appliances (door closers, fans, dampers, etc.), JP1 must be Personality code 20: 2-wire smoke - non-verified (Class A): Same
moved to pins 2 and 3 and personality code 8 must be downloaded to as personality code 13, except that wiring is Class A.
the module.
Personality code 21: 2-wire smoke - verified (Class A): Same as
System controller compatibility personality code 14, except that wiring is Class A.
The SIGA-UM requires the Signature loop controller. The loop
controller downloads the personality code which determines how the Warnings
module operates. The following personality codes can be downloaded
1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires
to the SIGA-UM.
frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss
Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching (Class B): Configures input further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
1 and/or 2 for Class B normally-open dry contact initiating devices 2. The personality code for this module is factory set to 0. This
(e.g., pull stations, heat detectors, etc.). When the N/O input contact of module will not operate until it is assigned a personality code of 1,
an initiating device is closed, an alarm signal is sent to the loop 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20, or 21.
controller and the alarm condition is latched at the module. 3. When using personality code 8, Jumper JP1 must be moved to
pins 2 and 3. Do not assume relay contacts are in the correct
Personality code 2: N/O alarm delayed latching (Class B): Same as state until this module is installed and signal power is applied.
code 1 except that contact closure must be maintained for 4. When using personality code 13 or 14, a UL/ULC Listed 15 KΩ
approximately 16 seconds before an alarm status is generated. This EOL resistor must be installed at the last device in the circuit.
code is only for use with nonretarded waterflow alarm switches.
Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0
SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module 1/4
5. Dangerous voltages may be present at terminals even when Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
power is shut off. Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Construction: High impact polymer
Shipping weight: 7.7 oz (218 g)
Specifications Compatible electrical boxes
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 2-gang box
Ripple voltage: 2 Vac Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep box with 2-gang
Output ratings cover
24 Vdc @ 2 A UL compatibility ID: 0.0
25 V Audio: 50 W Initiating device circuit (IDC)
70 V Audio: 35 W Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
Contact ratings Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF
24 Vdc @ 2 A Max. alarm current (per channel): 17 mA
120 Vdc @ 0.5 A Operating voltage range: 16.0 to 24.0 Vdc
Relay type: Form C
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)

Mode of operation Personality code Standby current Activated current EOL resistor

Class B initiating device circuit 1, 2, 3, or 4 396 µA 680 µA 47 kΩ

Form C dry contact relay 8 100 µA 100 µA N/A

Class A initiating device circuit 9, 10, 11, or 12 223 µA 365 µA N/A

2-wire smoke detectors and initiating 13, 14, 20, or 21 2.0 mA N/A Class A: 22 kΩ
devices (from 3rd wire) Class B: 15 kΩ
First UM module to go into alarm N/A N/A 12 mA smoke detector N/A
(Class A or B) 17 mA contact closure
Each subsequent UM to go into alarm N/A N/A 100 µA (from data line) N/A

Class A or B notification appliance 15 or 16 223 µA 365 µA Class A: N/A

circuit Class B: 47 kΩ

Installation instructions Wire stripping guide

Note: The SIGA-UM is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit;

it contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled.
To install the module: 1/4 in (~6 mm)

1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground
faults. Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that connect to the
2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram. terminal block of the module.

3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label provided Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault. Exposing less
and apply the label to the module. Peel off the removable serial wire may result in a faulty connection.
number label from the module and apply it to the appropriate
location in the serial number logbook.
4. Using the 4-24 x 5/16 in (8 mm) self-tapping screw provided,
mount the wall plate to the module.
5. Using the four 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided,
mount the module to the electrical box.
Notes
1. A valid personality code MUST be downloaded to the module
through programming for the unit to operate.
2. Wire in accordance with the current NFPA 70 National Electrical
Code.
Transient protection
This module requires transient protection for installations in which
electromechanical bells or horns are connected to the output circuits.
A Bipolar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) must be used to protect
the module's electronic circuitry from the effects of electronic transients
caused by the inductive load of bells or horns.
Connect the bipolar transient protector assembly across the terminals
of the bell or horn located electrically closest to the module. The
bipolar transient protector is not polarity sensitive.
Bells and horns must be located a minimum distance of 6 ft (1.83 m)
from the module.

P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module
Wiring diagrams [9] Power-limited and supervised
[10] Supervised and power-limited when connected to power-limited
These notes apply to the wiring diagrams that follow. source. If nonpower-limited, then all power-limited wiring in box
must use FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC.
[1] For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate technical
Power-limited marking must be eliminated.
reference manual
[11] Power-limited when connected to power limited source. If non-
[2] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA power limited, then all power limited wiring in box must use FPL,
[3] See Signature Loop Controller installation sheet for wiring specs FPLR, or FPLP cable or equivalent per NEC. Power-limited
[4] This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors unless marking must be eliminated.
configured for personality code 13, 14, 20, or 21 [12] A maximum of 15 UM modules per circuit can be configured to
[5] Maximum 12.5 Ω resistance per wire for Class A configurations support 2-wire smoke detectors (personality codes 13, 14, 20,
[6] Compatible smoke detector. See the control panel installation and 21). However, if a Signature Series IM module or Signature
manual for type and quantity. Series Detector with an Isolator Base (IB) is installed on the
[7] SIGA-UM must be installed in the same room as the device it Signature Data Circuit, only 7 UM modules may be configured to
controls support 2-wire smoke detectors.
[8] Polarity at terminals 11 and 12 shown in supervisory condition. [13] Maximum alarm current is 17 mA. Operating voltage range is
Connect as shown in diagram. (Polarity reverses on alarm.) 16.0 to 24.0 Vdc.
Dual input module (personality codes 1, 2, 3, and 4) [4]

INPUT 1 INPUT 2

UL/ULC listed UL/ULC listed

47 kΩ EOL 47 kΩ EOL

Not used

TB4 TB3
JP1 Style B (Class B)
16 15 14 13 3-2-1 12 11 10 9 [1] [2] [9]
Typical initiating
device

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) (Normal)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB2 TB1

Not used
From Signature (+) (+)
controller or DATA IN DATA OUT To next device
previous device (–) (–)
[3] [9]

Control relay module (personality code 8) [4]

Normally Normally
open closed Common

[7] [11]
Not JP1
Not used used Not used 3 2 1
TB4 JP1 TB3

16 15 14 13 3-2-1 12 11 10 9

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) (Normal)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB2 TB1
Wiring on terminals 1 - 4 is
Not used power-limited and supervised
From Signature (+) (+)
controller or DATA IN DATA OUT To next device
previous device (–) (–)
[3] [9]

Single input module (personality codes 9, 10, 11, or 12) [4]

Style D (Class A)
[1] [2] [5] [9] Not used Not used
Typical initiating
TB4 TB3 device
JP1

16 15 14 13 3-2-1 12 11 10 9

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) (Normal)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB2 TB1

Not used
From Signature (+) (+)
controller or DATA IN DATA OUT To next device
previous device (–) (–)
[3] [9]

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0

SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module 3/4
2-wire smoke detectors and initiating devices (personality codes 13, 14, 20, or 21) [6] [12]

Style D (Class A)
[5] [13]
UL/ULC listed
Style B (Class B) IN OUT
+ +
[6] 15 kΩ EOL for
[1] [9] [13] Class B only

Not used
Typical initiating device
Smoke detector (no devices allowed with
power (+24 Vdc) from personality code 14 or 21)
UL/ULC listed 22 kΩ EOL TB4
Signature controller
TB3
used for Class A only JP1 or previous device
16 15 14 13 3-2-1 12 11 10 9

Red LED Green LED

(Alarm / Active) (Normal)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB2 TB1

Not used
From Signature (+) (+)
controller or DATA IN DATA OUT To next device
previous device (–) (–)
[3] [9]

Single output module (personality codes 15 or 16) [4]

Circuit wired same as

diagram below

Install the bipolar

transient protector here

Style Z (Class A)
[1] [10]

Not used Not used

TB4 JP1 TB3

Style Y (Class B) Typical
16 15 14 13 3-2-1 12 11 10 9 [8] [10] notification
applicance

Red LED Green LED UL/ULC listed 47 kΩ EOL

(Alarm / Active) (Normal) used for Class B only
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TB2 TB1

(+) To next device or EOL resistor supplied

(–) RISER OUT with UL/ULC listed control panel
From UL/ULC listed (+) (+)
RISER IN
control panel (–) (–) DATA OUT To next device
From Signature controller (+)
DATA IN [3] [9] [10]
or previous device (–)

P/N: P-047550-1726 REV: 3.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-UM - Universal Class A/B Module
 SIGA-WTM
Waterflow/Tamper Module

Product description Personality code 4: N.O. active latching (Class B): A contact
closure causes an active instead of an alarm event, which is
latched at the module. Personality code 4 is typically used for
monitoring supervisory and tamper switches.

Warnings
8 7 6 5 1. This module will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you
discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection
specialist.
2. This module does not support conventional smoke
detectors.
4 3 2 1
Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 396 µA
Activated current: 680 µA
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
The SIGA-WTM Waterflow/Tamper Module is a component of Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
the Signature Series. The SIGA-WTM is an analog Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
addressable device used to connect Class B normally open Construction: High impact engineering polymer
waterflow alarm and supervisory initiating device circuits Shipping weight: 5.1 oz (145 g)
(IDCs) to a Signature loop controller. Two device addresses Compatible electrical boxes
are required. North American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep 1-gang box
Standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) deep with
Input channel 1 of the SIGA-WTM is used for waterflow alarm 1-gang cover
applications. Input channel 2 is used for supervisory Initiating device circuit (IDC)
applications. This is determined by a personality code that is EOL resistor value: 47 KΩ, UL listed
downloaded to the module by the loop controller during system Max. circuit resistance (per channel): 50 Ω (25 Ω per wire)
configuration.
Max. circuit capacitiance (per channel): 0.1 µF
The loop controller assigns two addresses to the SIGA-WTM
automatically. Custom addresses can also be assigned to the Installation instructions
module via laptop computer. No addressing switches are used.
Note: The SIGA-WTM is shipped from the factory as an
Diagnostic LEDs provide visible indication of the status of the assembled unit; it contains no user-serviceable parts and
module when the cover plate is removed: should not be disassembled.
• Normal: green LED flashes To install the module:
• Alarm/active: red LED flashes
Mounting 1. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
ground faults.
The SIGA-WTM can be mounted in a North American 2-1/2 in
(64 mm) deep 1-gang box or a standard 4 in square box 1-1/2 2. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
in (38 mm) deep with 1-gang cover. The terminal blocks accept diagram.
12, 14, 16, or 18 AWG wire (2.5, 1.5, 1.0, or 0.75 sq mm). 3. Write the address assigned to the module on the label
Sizes 16 and 18 are preferred. provided and apply the label to the module. Peel off the
System controller compatibility removable serial number label from the module and apply
it to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
The SIGA-WTM requires the Signature loop controller. The
loop controller downloads the personality code which 4. Using the 4-24 x 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw
determines how the module operates. The following provided, mount the wall plate to the module.
personality codes can be downloaded to the SIGA-WTM. 5. Using the two 6-32 x 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws
Personality code 2: N.O. alarm delayed latching (Class B): provided, mount the module to the electrical box.
Personality code 2 operates the same as personality code 1 Notes
except that contact closure must be maintained for
approximately 16 seconds before an alarm signal is generated. 1. If a 2 in (51 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter the
Personality code 2 is only for use with non-retarded waterflow electrical box through only one knock-out hole.
alarm switches.
2. If a 2-1/2 in (64 mm) 1-gang box is used, conduit can enter
the electrical box through one or both knock-out holes.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0

SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module 1/4
3. Wire in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code.
Wire stripping guide Compatible electrical box

1/4 in (~6 mm)

Strip 1/4 in (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that
Wall plate, white
connect to the terminal block of the module. (1-gang)

Caution: Exposing more wire may cause a ground fault.

Exposing less wire may result in a faulty connection.

Wiring diagram

INPUT 1 INPUT 2
Personality Code 2 Personality Code 4

Typical N.O. TB2 Typical N.O.

Waterflow Switch Supervisory/
8 7 6 5
Tamper Switch
UL/ULC Listed UL/ULC listed
47 kΩ EOL Style B (Class B) 47 kΩ EOL
[1] [2] [4]
Red LED Green LED
(Alarm / Active) 4 3 2 1 (normal)
TB1

(+) (+)
DATA IN DATA OUT
(–) (–)

From Signature controller To next device

[3]
or previous device

Notes [4] Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA

[1] Maximum 25 Ω resistance per wire 5. All wiring is power-limited and supervised
[2] Maximum 12 AWG (2.5 sq mm) wire; minimum 18 AWG 6. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors
(0.75 sq mm) wire
[3] Refer to the Signature loop controller installation sheet for
wiring specifications

P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module
 SIGA-WTM
Module débit d’eau / défaut

Description de produit Avertissements

1. Ce module ne fonctionne pas en l’absence de courant électrique.
Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions de courant,
nous conseillons aux utilisateurs de consulter le spécialiste local
de protection contre les incendies pour la mise en place de
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.
8 7 6 5 2. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée
conventionnels.

Caractéristiques
Tension de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
Courant de veille: 396 µA
4 3 2 1 Courant de fonctionnement actif: 680 µA
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93 % HR
Gamme de températures de stockage: -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
Construction: Polymère technique avec résistance élevée aux impacts
Poids à la livraison: 145 g (5,1 oz)
Boîtes électriques compatibles
Boîte Amérique du Nord simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de
Le Module débit d’eau / défaut SIGA-WTM est un composant du profondeur
système série Signature. Le SIGA-WTM est un dispositif analogique Boîte carrée standard de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2
adressable utilisé pour connecter des circuits de déclenchement po) de profondeur, avec couvercle simple
(Initiating Device Circuits ou IDC) à contact sec de classe B Circuit de déclenchement (IDC)
normalement ouverts, d’alarme de débit d’eau et de surveillance, à un Résistance FDL: 47 KΩ, répertoriée UL
contrôleur de boucle Signature. Deux adresses de dispositif sont
Résistance de circuit maximum (par canal): 50 Ω (25 Ω par fil)
nécessaires.
Capacité de circuit maximum (par canal): 0,1 µF
Le canal d’entrée 1 du SIGA-WTM est utilisé pour des applications de
type alarme de débit d’eau. Le canal d’entrée 2 sert aux applications
de type sur-veillance. Le contrôleur de boucle assigne Installation
automatiquement deux adresses au SIGA-WTM ou des adresses
particulières peuvent être assignées au module via ordinateur portatif. Note: Le SIGA-WTM est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il ne
Aucun bouton d’adressage n’est utilisé. contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être
démonté.
Des témoins à DEL donnent une indication visuelle de l’état du module
lorsque la plaque de protection est retirée:
Pour installer le module:
• Normal: le témoin à DEL vert clignote
• Alarme/actif: le témoin à DEL rouge clignote 1. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni défauts
de connexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise à la terre.
Montage 2. Faire les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme de câblage.
Le SIGA-WTM peut être monté dans une boîte Amérique du Nord 3. Écrire l’adresse assignée au module sur l’étiquette fournie et
simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) de profondeur ou dans une boîte coller cette étiquette sur le module. Décoller du module l’étiquette
carrée de 10,16 cm (4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1-1/2 po) de profondeur de numéro de série et la recoller à l’endroit approprié dans le
avec couvercle simple. Les borniers acceptent des fils de 2,5, 1,5, 1,0, registre des numéros de série.
et de 0,75 mm carrés (AWG 12, 14, 16, ou 18). Des fils de 1,0 et de
0,75 mm carrés sont préférables. 4. Avec le vis autotaraudeuses de 4-24 x 1/2 po. (13 mm) fournie,
monter la plaque murale sur le module.
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système
5. Avec les deux vis machine de 6-32 x 1/2 po (13 mm) fournies,
Le SIGA-WTM est uniquement compatible avec les contrôleurs de monter le module dans la boîte électrique.
boucle Signature. Le contrôleur de boucle télécharge le code de
personnalité déterminant comment le module fonctionne. Les codes de Notes
personnalité suivants peuvent être téléchargés dans le SIGA-WTM.
1. Si une boîte standard simple de 51 mm (2 po) est utilisée, le
Code de personnalité 2: verrouillage d’alarme retardé N.O. (classe conduit électrique ne peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique que
B): Le code de personnalité 2 fonctionne de la même façon que le par une débouchure seulement.
code de person-nalité 1, mais la fermeture du contact doit être
2. Si une boîte simple standard de 64 mm (2-1/2 po) est utilisée, le
maintenue pendant environ 16 secondes pour générer un état
conduit électrique peut pénétrer dans la boîte électrique par une
d’alarme. Le code de personnalité 2 n’est utilisé qu’avec des
débouchure ou par les deux.
interrupteurs d’alarme de débit d’eau non retardés.
3. Le câblage doit être conforme à la NFPA 70, National Electric
Code de personnalité 4: verrouillage d’activité N.O. (classe B): La
Code.
fermeture d’un contact déclenche un état d’activité plutôt qu’un état
d’alarme, verrouillé au niveau du module. Le code de personnalité 4
est habituellement utilisé dans la surveillance des contacts de
surveillance et des contacts de défaut.

Installation Sheet 17JAN03 P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0

SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module 3/4
Dénudage des fils

Boîte électrique compatible

~6 mm (1/4 po)

Dénuder l’extrémité de tous les fils sur une longueur de ~6 mm (1/4

po) avant de les connecter sur le bornier du module.

Attention: Exposer le fil sur une plus grande longueur peut provoquer Plaque murale, blanche
un défaut de mise à la terre. Exposer le fil sur une longueur plus courte (simple standard)
peut se traduire par une mauvaise connexion.

Schéma de câblage

ENTRÉE 1 ENTRÉE 2
Code de personnalité 2 Code de personnalité 4

Contact de TB2 Contact de défaut/

débit d’eau N.O surveillance N.O.
8 7 6 5
Typique
Style B (Classe B) FDL 47 KΩ,
FDL 47 KΩ,
[1] [2] [4] répertoriée UL/ULC
répertoriée UL/ULC
Témoin à
Témoin à DEL rouge DEL vert
(Alarme/Actif) 4 3 2 1 (Normal)
TB1

ENTRÉE DES (+) (+) SORTIE DES

DONNÉES DONNÉES
(–) (–)

Du contrôleur de boucle Signature ou Au dispositif suivant

[3]
du dispositif précédent

Notes [4] Maximum 10 Vcc à 350 µA

[1] Résistance maximum: 25 Ω par fil 5. Puissance limitée et contrôlée pour l’ensemble du câblage
[2] Calibre de fil maximum: 2,5 mm carrés (AWG 12); minimum: 0,75 6. Ce module ne supporte pas les détecteurs de fumée à deux fils
mm carrés (AWG 18)
[3] Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
Signature pour obtenir les spécifications du câblage

P/N: 387058P REV: 6.0 17JAN03 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGA-WTM - Waterflow/Tamper Module
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806 SIGI-271
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
Break Glass Station

Product description Specifications

Construction: High impact plastic
Operating voltage range: 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc
Standby current: 250 µA
Activated current: 400 µA
Switch contact: 150 mΩ maximum
Operating temperature range: 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Storage temperature range: -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
Operating humidity range: 0 to 93% RH
Replacement breakglass:
271-KG1 (package of 5 inserts)
Compatible electrical boxes:
KAC SR3T-P Surface Box
KAC ETT1-P Tray for Flush Mount
Shipping Weight: 26 lb (0.12 kg)

Installation instructions
Notes
• The SIGI-271 is shipped from the factory complete with a
single input module attached. The electronic module
contains no user-serviceable parts and should not be
disassembled.
• The SIGI-271 is factory assigned personality code 1. No
Description
user configuration is required.
The Break Glass Station (model SIGI-271) is a component of
• Refer to the Signature Loop Controller installation sheet
the Signature Series. It is designed for indoor use only. The
for wiring specifications.
single input module mounted to the back of the unit supervises
the station and sends an alarm signal to the loop controller • All wiring is power-limited and supervised.
when the switch is closed (i.e., when the glass is broken).
To install the station:
Device addressing
1. Loosen the captive screw on the front plate of the station
One device address is required. The loop controller assigns an and remove the front plate. Remove the glass panel from
address to the SIGI-271 automatically. A custom address can inside the station.
be assigned to the station via laptop computer. No addressing
switches are used. 2. Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and
ground faults.
Mounting
3. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring
The SIGI-271 can be mounted in a KAC SR3T-P Surface Box diagram. Attach the module wires to the appropriate
or a KAC ETT1-P Tray for flush mounting. electrical box terminals. (Station wiring is provided with
System controller compatibility spade lugs.)

The SIGI-271 requires the Signature Loop Controller. 4. Write the address assigned to the station on the label
provided and apply the label to the station. Peel off the
Personality code 1: N/O alarm latching (Class B) removable serial number label from the station and apply it
The SIGI-271 is assigned personality code 1 at the factory. to the appropriate location in the serial number logbook.
This configures the SIGI-271 for Class B operation. When the 5. Using the two machine screws provided, mount the break
SIGI-271 is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the loop glass station back plate to the electrical box.
controller and the alarm condition is latched at the station.
6. Reinstall the glass panel inside the station and reattach
the front plate to the station using the captive screw on the
WARNING: This device will not operate without electrical front plate.
power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we
suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire
protection specialist.

Installation Sheet 10JUN02 P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0

SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station 1/4
Wiring diagrams

Rear view Black wire B/W wire Red wire

Mounting holes

Data in (+) Data out (+)

Data in (-) Data out (-)

KAC ETT1-P Tray Wiring

Data in (+) Data out (+)

Data in (-) Data out (-)
Black Black and white
Data in (-) Data out (-)

Red
Data in/out (+)

Black wire Red wire

Compatible electrical box
KAC SR3T-P surface box shown

B/W wire

KAC SR3T-P Box Wiring

Back plate

Mounting screws

Glass panel

Front plate
See wiring
detail above

Test key
opening

P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0 10JUN02 Installation Sheet

2/4 SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station
EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY, INC.
SARASOTA, FL: 941-739-4300 FAX 941-753-1806 SIGI-271
CHESHIRE, CT: 203-699-3000 FAX 203-699-3075
OWEN SOUND, CANADA: 519-376-2430 FAX 519-376-7258
INTERNATIONAL, CANADA: 905-270-1711 FAX 905-270-9553
Poste Bris de Verre

Description de produit Caractéristiques

Construction: Plastique avec résistance élevée aux impacts
Gamme de tensions de fonctionnement: 15,2 à 19,95 Vcc
Courant de veille: 250 µA
Courant de fonctionnement actif: 400 µA
Contact de l'interrupteur: 150 mΩ maximum
Gamme de températures de fonctionnement: 0 à 49 ºC (32 à
120 ºF)
Gamme de températures de stockage: 20 à 60 ºC (-4 à 140 ºF)
Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement: 0 à 93% HR
Verre de rupture de remplacement: 271- KG1 (5 ajouts par
paquet)
Boîtes électriques compatibles:
Boîte surface KAC SR3T-P
Plateau KAC ETT1-P pour montage encastré
Poids à la livraison: 0,12 kg (26 livres)

Installation
Notes
• Le SIGI-271 est expédié de l’usine complètement monté; il
ne contient aucune pièce dépannable par l’utilisateur et ne
doit pas être démonté.
• Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné en usine au SIGI-
Description 271. Aucune configuration par l’utilisateur n’est
La station Bris de Verre (modèle SIGI-271) est un composant nécessaire.
du Série Signature pour l'intérieur seulement. Le module à une • Se référer à la fiche d’installation du contrôleur de boucle
seule entrée montée à l’arrière du dispositif surveille le poste et Signature pour les spécifications de câblage
transmet un signal d’alarme au contrôleur de boucle quand
l’interrupteur est fermé (i.e. quand le verre est cassé). • Ensemble du câblage surveillé et à limitation de courant.
Adressage électronique Pour installer la station:

Une adresse de dispositif est nécessaire. Le contrôleur de 1. Desserer la vis imperdable sur la plaque avant du poste et
boucle assigne une adresse au SIGI-271 automatiquement, ou enlever la plaque avant. Enlever le panneau en verre de
une adresse particulière peut être assignée au poste via l’intérieur du poste
ordinateur portatif; aucun commutateur d’adressage n’est
utilisé. 2. Vérifier que le câblage électrique du site ne comprend ni
défauts de con-nexion, ni court-circuits, ni défauts de mise
Montage à la terre.
Le SIGI-271 peut être monté dans une boîte surface KAC 3. Faire toutes les connexions indiquées dans le diagramme
SR3T-P ou un plateau KAC ETT1-P pour un montage de câblage. Relier les fils à la borne de la boîte électrique
encastré. appropriée. (Des cosses sont fournies pour le câblage du
Compatabilité avec le contrôleur du système poste.)

Le SIGI-271 requiert le contrôleur de boucle Signature. 4. Écrire l’adresse assignée au poste tirage sur l’étiquette
fournie et coller cette étiquette sur le poste tirage. Décoller
Code de personnalité 1: verrouillage d’alarme n/o (Classe B) du poste tirage l’étiquette de numéro de série et la recoller
à l’endroit approprié dans le registre des numéros de
Le code de personnalité 1 est assigné en usine au SIGI-271, série.
ce qui le configure pour un fonctionnement en Classe B.
Lorsque le SIGI-271 est activé, un signal d’alarme est envoyé 5. Avec les deux vis machine fournies, monter la plaque
au contrôleur de boucle et la condition d’alarme est verrouillée arrière du poste à rupture de verre à la boîte électrique.
au niveau du poste d’alarme d’incendie.
6. Réinstaller le panneau de verre à l’intérieur du poste et
resserer la plaque avant au poste en serrant les vis
Avertissement: Ce module ne fonctionne pas sans courant imperdables de la plaque avant.
électrique. Les incendies provoquant souvent des interruptions
de courant, nous vous conseillons de consulter le spécialiste
local de protection contre incendies pour mise en place de
systèmes de sécurité supplémentaires.

Installation Sheet 10JUN02 P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0

SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station 3/4
Schémas de câblage

Vue arrière Fil noir Fil N/B Fil rouge

Trous de montage
Entrée des Sortie des
données (+) données (+)
Entrée des Sortie des
données (-) données (-)

Plateau de câblage KAC ETT1-P

Entrée des Sortie des
données (+) données (+)
Noir et blanc Entrée des Sortie des
Sortie des données (-) données (-) données (-)
Rouge
Entrée/sortie des données (+)
Noir
Entrée des données (-)

Fil noir Fil rouge

Boîte électrique compatible
Illustration de la boîte surface KAC SR3T-P

Fil N/B

Câblage de la boîte KAC SR3T-P

Plaque arrière

Vis de montage

Panneau en verre

Plaque avant
Voir les détails du
câblage ci-dessus

Ouverture
pour
clef d’essai

P/N: P-047550-1725 REV: 3.0 10JUN02 Installation Sheet

4/4 SIGI-271 - Break Glass Station
 WIRING DIAGRAMS SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range 32 to 120 °F (0 to 49 °C)
Term Description
1 Operating Humidity Range 0 - 93% RH
Not Used
2 DATA IN/OUT (+) Storage Temperature Range -4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
3 DATA IN (-)
4 Not Used Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer,
5 Not Used White
6
5 6 DATA OUT (-)
7 Not Used Compatible Detectors Signature Series Detectors
Shipping Weight 3.2 oz (91 g)

7
4

Max. Distance From Ceiling 12 in (305 mm)

3

1 (for wall mounting)

2
DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-) Compatible Electrical Boxes North American 1-Gang Box
3-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep
Octagon Box
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+) 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm) Deep
From Signature Controller To Next Device
Octagon Box
or Previous Device
European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box
w/60.3 mm Fixing Centers
MOUNTING DIAGRAMS BESA Box
Besa Box NOTES:

1.1 in 1) These bases will accept 12, 14, 16, and 18 AWG (2.05 sq mm,
(27 mm) 1.5 sq mm, 1.0 sq mm, and 0.75 sq mm) wire. Sizes 16 and 18
0.8 in are preferred.
(20 mm)
2) Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided
2.0 in and apply the label to the inside rim of the base.
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm) SIGI-IBS

NorthAmerican 1-Gang Box

1.5 in
(38 mm)
0.8 in
(20 mm)

2.0 in
(51 mm)

4.4 in (112 mm)

3-1/2 in or 4 in by 1-1/2 in (38mm) Deep Octagon Box
1.5 in
(38 mm)
0.8 in
(20 mm) INSTALLATION SHEET

2.0 in
(51 mm) SIGI-IBS
Detector Base
4.4 in (112 mm)
European 1-Gang (75 mm) Box with 60.3 Fixing Centers INSTALLATION SHEET P/N: P-047550-1749 FILE NAME: P-047550-1749.CDR

DATE: 01/15/99
1.75 in
REVISION LEVEL: 3.0
(45 mm)
0.8 in APPROVED BY: B. Right
(20 mm)
CREATED BY: C. Hanrahan 7 93016 02785 6
2.0 in
(51 mm)
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
4.4 in (112 mm) CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8
 GENERAL WIRING PRACTICES
Refer to Isolator Detector Base, SIGI-IBS Isolator Detector Base, SIGI-IBS
compatible panel (shown below) (shown below as last device)
Installation Sheet
for terminal
assignments.
6 6
5 5

7
4
7
4
_

1
3
+

1
S 2 2

2 3

_ Insulate Shield/Drain
with tape Shield/Drain
+
S

Control Panel

NOTES TO
T-TAPPED
1. Shielded wire is required ONLY in environments with very high DEVICE
electrical noise. PROPER METHOD

2 Shields must be continuous and insulated from ground.

OK FOR T-TAPS

3 For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground

at the last device. FROM TO
PREVIOUS NEXT
DEVICE DEVICE
TERMINAL STRIP
JUNCTION BOX

YES NO NO

P/N: P-047550-1749 REV: 3.0 Page 2 of 4

 SCHÉMAS DE CÂBLAGE CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Borne Description Gamme de températures de
1 Inutilisée fonctionnement 0 à 49 °C (32 à 120 °F)
2 Entrée/Sortie Gamme d’humidités de fonctionnement 0 à 93 % HR
des données (+)
3 Entrée des Gamme de températures de stockage -20 à 60 °C (-4 à 140 °F)
données (-) Construction et fini Polymère technique avec
4 Inutilisée résistance élevée aux impacts,
6
5 5 Inutilisée
blanc
6 Sortie des
données (-) Détecteurs compatibles Détecteurs de la série Signature

7
4

Poids à la livraison 91 g (3,2 oz)

3

Distance maximale du plafond 305 mm (12 po)

1
Entrée des (montage mural)
2
Sortie des données (-) Boîtes électriques compatibles Boîte simple standard Amérique
du Nord
Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm
Entrée des données (+) Sortie des données (-) (3,5 po) de côté et 38 mm
(1,5 po) de profondeur
Du contrôleur de boucle Signature
ou du dispositif précédent Boîte octogonale de 10,16 cm
(4 po) de côté et 38 mm (1,5 po)
de profondeur
SCHÉMAS DE MONTAGE Boîte européenne simple
standard de 75 mm,
Boîte Besa centres de fixation
de 60,3 mm

27 mm (1,1 po) Boîte BESA

20 mm (0,8 po) NOTES:

2 2 2
1) Ces bases acceptent des fils de 2,05 mm , 1,5 mm , 1 mm et 0,75
2
mm (AWG n° 12, 14, 16 ou 18). Des fils de 16 ou 18 sont préférables.
51 mm (2,0 po)
2) Écrire l’adresse assignée au détecteur sur l’étiquette fournie et coller
cette dernière sur le bord intérieur de la base.

112 mm (4,4 po)

Boîte simple standard Amérique du Nord SIGI-IBS
38 mm (1,5 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

112 mm (4,4 po)

Boîte octogonale de 8,89 cm (3,5 po) ou de 10,16 cm (4 po)
et de 38mm (1,5 po) de profondeur

38 mm (1,5 po)

20 mm (0,8 po)

51 mm (2,0 po)

FICHE D’INSTALLATION :
112 mm (4,4 po)
Boîte européenne simple standard de 75 mm,
Base de détecteur
centres de fixation de 60,3 mm SIGI-IBS
FICHE D’INSTALLATION RÉF. : P-047550-1749
45 mm (1,75 po)
NOM DU FICHIER : P-047550-1749.CDR
20 mm (0,8 po)
NIVEAU DE RÉVISION : 3.0 APPROUVÉ PAR : B. Right
DATE: 01/15/99 CRÉÉ PAR : C. Hanrahan
51 mm (2,0 po)
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL
GS BUILDING SYSTEMS CORPORATION
6411 Parkland Drive 625 6th Street East
112 mm (4,4 po) GS BUILDING SYSTEMS Sarasota, FL 34243 Owen Sound, Ontario
CORPORATION
USA Canada N4K 5P8

P/N: P-047550-1749 REV: 3.0 Page 3 of 4

 CONSEILS GÉNÉRAUX DE CÂBLAGE
Référez-vous aux Base de détecteur à isolateur, SIGI-IBS Base de détecteur à isolateur, SIGI-IBS
feuilles
d'installation du
panneau
compatible pour le 6 6
5 5
câblage des
bornes.

7
4
7
4
_

1
3
+

1
S 2 2

2 3

_ Isoler le blindage avec

Blindage
+
S

Panneau de

NOTES VERS LE
DISPOSITIF À
1. Un fil blindé est requis UNIQUEMENT dans les environnements à MÉTHODE
interférences électriques élevées.
OK CORRECTE POUR

2 Le blindage doit être continu et isolé de la terre.

3 Câblage de classe B: aucune connexion n’est effectuée entre le

blindage et la terre au niveau du dernier dispositif du circuit. PROVENANCE VERS LE
DU DISPOSITIF DISPOSITIF

BARRETTE À BORNES

BOÎTE DE RACCORDEMENT

OUI NON NON

P/N: P-047550-1749 REV: 3.0 Page 4 of 4